Engelbert Kaempfer: The History of Japan, London 1727

Internet Edition by Wolfgang Michel, Kyushu University, Fukuoka-City, Japan. © 2007

 

RAW AND INCOMPLETE SCANNER VERSION. NOT EDITED YET


A General Description of the Empire of Japan


 Chap. I. Journal of our Voyage from Batavia to Siam, with an account of what happen'd during our Stay there.

AFter I had made some Stay at Batavia, the Capital of the Dutch East-India Company in the Indies, and Residence of the Director General, seated upon the great Island Java, an Opportunity offer'd for sailing to Japan, on board a Dutch Ship, call'd De Waelstroom. bound for that Country. I was offer'd the Place of Physician to the Embassy, which the Company sends once a Year to the Japanese Emperor's Court. It is now almost a Century, since this Empire hath been, as it were, shut up and kept some all Commerce with foreign Nations, except the Dutch, who being look'd upon as the sincerest of all Foreigners, are for this Reason admitted among them and tolerated through under a very strict Inspection, and are allow'd this particular    [002]     Favour, that their Resident may every Year appear at Court in order to pay their Respect to the Emperor. This is the only Opportunity at present, an European can have of going thither, and viewing the Majesty of that Court and Empire. Our Ship was bound first to Siam, there to dispose of Part of her Cargo, and to take in Goods of that Country, whereby I had an Opportunity of seeing also this famous Kingdom and its magnificent Court.

I went on Board on Sunday the Seventh of May 1690 early in the Morning. We weigh'd Anchor the same Day and set Sail with a small, but favourable Breeze. About Noon we made the small Island Eidam, lying a few Leagues off Batavia, along which we coasted till late at night, when we lost sight of it.

On Monday the Eighth we lost Sight of the high Land of Java, but not of the neighbouring Islands. We were becalm'd in the Afternoon and advancing but slowly, cast Anchor in Twenty nine Fathoms, lest the Currents, which run here very strongly, should carry us too much out of our Course. About half a League off us we saw a small Portuguese Vessel at Anchor, with Chinese Sailors on board, which set Sail from Batavia two days before. She was call'd the St. Paul, and had the Image of this Apostle painted upon her Stern. She had been in Japan about five Years ago, notwithstanding that by order of the Japanese Emperor all Portuguese whatever are forbid entring his Dominions under Pain of Death and Forfeiture of their Ships and Goods. I flatter myself the Reader will not be displeas'd to be inform'd of the Occasion and Event of this Voyage, which I particularly enquir'd into at Batavia, the rather since it bears a near relation to the main Subject of this History.

About six Years ago, a Japanese Vessel was forc'd away, in a violent Storm, from the Coasts of Japan towards China, and having suffer'd many incommodities, was at last wreck'd near Macao, a famous trading Town in China, belonging to the Portuguese. The Portuguese Government at Macao thought this an excellent Opportunity, to recommend themselves to the Japanese Emperor, and perhaps, which they had more at heart, to recover their former advantageous Trade. For this reason it was resolv'd to relieve the twelve Japanese, whose Lives had been sav'd, to treat them with kindness and civility, and generously to send them back to Japan on board one of their own Ships. But the Event fell far short from answering their Expectation; for when they got into the Harbour of Nangasaki, all the Japanese without exception were committed to Prison, and the Portuguese Vessel strictly guarded, without permitting any Body to set foot on shore, till the Governors of Nangasaki could give an Account of this nice Affair to the Imperial Court at Jedo and Orders sent from thence as to their further Conduct. The Portuguese were like to be put to Death and to have their Ship burnt, pursuant to the standing    [003]    Imperial Orders on this head; but the Severity of the Court being somewhat al]ay'd, partly by length of time, partly by the intercession of Mr. Buteman, then Resident of the Dutch East-India Company, they at last, in consideration of their good Intention, obtain'd leave to return to Macao, and Provisions were offer'd them consisting chiefly in Rice and Water. The unhappy Japanese, after a rude Imprisonment of two years, were set at Liberty, and under a strict Guard sent to their native Towns. One of our Residents, upon Piis return from Jedo to Nangasaki, met some upon the road. Thus this Voyage ended without the least advantage to the City of Macao. But to proceed on our own Voyage.

We weigh'd anchor after midnight, and on the Ninth in the Morning made the Thousand Islands, as they are here call'd. We were in Sight of the high Land Lampon, in Sumatra opposite to Bantam. We saw likewise the Western Mountains both of Java and Sumatra, and particu]arly one in Sumatra, remarkable for its height, which to our great Grief we had had so long in Sight, some Months before in our Voyage from Xtsijn to Batavia.

The Wind was variable, mostly S We were almost becalm'd in the afternoon, and could not make the Island Norderwachten, that is Northern Guard, before Evening. After Sunset a fresh favourable Gale sprung up.

It was cloudy all the Tenth. The Wind E. S. E. We steersd North out of sight of Land or Islands, excepting some few of the highest Mountains in Sumatra, the tops of which we percelv'd indistinctly through the Clouds. We cast Anchor late at Night in six Fathoms, to avoid running against Land in the Night, which was seen from the great Mast the evening before, and suppos'd to be the Island Lucipara, lying at the mouth of the Strait of Banca.

On the Eleventh of May we weigh'd anchor early in the morning, but a Calm ensuing forc'd us to drop it again, and to lie by for some hours. About two hours after Sun rising, a brisk Gale sprung up at S. and we steer'd North between Land, which we saw last evening, and found to be the Island Lucipara, and the Coasts of Sumatra towards the Straits of Banca.

Before I proceed further, I cannot forbear observing in general that the Voyage from Batavia to Siam is attended with no small difficulties and dangers, because of the many small low Islands, Rocks, Shoals and Sands. A careful and prudent Pilot must always keep at a due distance from Land, that is, neither too near it, nor too far off, that in case of strong stormy Winds and Turnado's, which frequently and unawares arise in this Passage, he may have an opportunity of coming to an anchor, and by this means preserve the Ship from running a-ground, or from being cast away too far out of her Course. For this Reason Ships commonly lie at anchor over night, the rather if Land was seen the day before, or some Signs appear'd of its    [004]    being near. The most dangerous Passage because of its Narrowness, Shoals and Rocks, are the Straits of Banca form'd by an Island of this name, and the Coasts of Sumatra. The Coasts of Sumatra all along the Straits are low, without Hills or Mountains, but well stor'd with Woods. Banca, on the contrary, is ragged and broken with high Hills and Mountains in some Parts, and low verdant ground in others. It seems in the main to be a very fruitful Island. All the Ships bound for the Eastern Coasts of Malacca, for Siam, Cambodia, Cochinchina, China and Japan, pass these Straits. The Coasts of Sumatra, opposite to Banca, have two or three remarkable points running out into the Straits. We got within half . a League of the said Coasts, because there is a good soft Clay at the bottom and even ground in six Fathoms Water and more. We made the second Point of the Coasts of Sumatra before Sun set, and lay by against the next morning.

On the twelfth of May we weigh'd anchor before Sun rising, and this morning got as far as the third and furthermost Point of the (:coasts of Sumatra. The St. Paul (of which above) which was hitherto far astern of us; was now got considerably ahead us. We steer'd along the Coasts to N. N. W. The Sky was thick and cloudy, the Wind variable, mostly S. The Coasts of Sumatra and Banca appeared much as yesterday. In the Afternoon the Wind turn'd contrary, which take us take in part of our Sails, and tack about for a while.

On the Thirteenth of May in the Evening, we got safe to the End of the Straits, between the Mouth of the River Pallmbang on our Larboard, and a very high Rock call'd Monapin, upon the extremity of Banca to the Starboard. The Mouth of the River Palimbang, which was about Palimbarg three quarters of a League distant, seem'd to be at least River; half a League broad. We could see no Land beyond it whither for its extent, or because of the dusk of the evening. We made the best of our way towards the said Mouth, and the Coasts of Sumatra in seven fathoms and a half, to avoid a dangerous Rock, call'd Frederic Henry, which lies hereabouts, and upon which a Dutch Ship call'd Prince William, bound for Siam, unfortunately stranded some Years ago, but the Captain and Crew sav'd themselves in the Boat. The Wind proving favourable, and we being past the Straits of Banca, we sail'd all night.

On the Fourteenth of May in the morning, we came in sight of the Islands Poele Tsju, that is the Seven Islands, even otherwise the Seven Brothers. We directed our Course so as to leave the said Islands to the Starboard. It was clear and cool, and a good favourable Gale all Day long. We lost sight of the Coasts of Sumatra, and in the Evening made the Island Puli Saya.    [005]    We advanc'd considerably all Night, and on the Puli Saya, Fifteenth in the Morning left Puli Saya so far a-stern that we could scarce perceive the Top of one of its Mountains, remarkable for its great height. About Noon we made Puli Lingan,and cross'd safely the AEquinoctial Line. It now clear'd up, having rain'd pretty hard the Night before. We were almost becalm'd in the Afternoon advancing but little; about four we had a strong Turnado, the Wind blew hard out of N. W. We run with incredible Swiftness in these dangerous Seas for about two Hours, when the Wind ceasing we came to an Anchor, having been cast pretty much out of our Course.

We set sail again on the Sixteenth in the Morning with low variable Wind, and clear Weather, after a rainy Night. We advanc'd but moderately, and could not get -out of sight of Puli Lingan till Evening, when we cast Anchor.

On the Seventeenth of May we weigh'd Anchor two Hours before Sun-rise: We steer'd N. W. but saw no ! Land all Day long: The Currents carried us with great Violence N. and N. N. E. It blowing but little, we; came to an Anchor towards Evening in Thirty Four Fathoms, and set sail again about Ten at Night.

The Wind was variable all the Eighteenths, and sometimes it blew hard. We steer'd to N. W. without Sight of Land, and resolv'd to pass by Puli Timon, where pursuant to the Company's Instructions our Ships commonly put in for Wood and Water, and with these favourable Southerly Winds, to proceed directly North for Siam.

We were under Sail all Night, and on the Nineteenth the Morning, perceiving the Top of a Mountain on our Larboard Side, we hop'd 'twould be the Island Puli Thingi, and therefore stood in directly for it. We were not disappointed in our Hopes, and in the Afternoon got Sight of Puli Aur, or Puli Oor, and soon after of Puli Pisang.

On the Twentieth of May about Eight in the Morning, we came to an Anchor before the Island Puli Timon, bearing N. E. to E. I went on Shore with some others, partly to view the Situation of the said Island, partly to observe what Plants and other Natural Things it produces, which hath been in all my Travels one of my chief Cares and Amusements.

Puli Timon is one of the largest Islands situate near the Eastern Coasts of Malacca. It is subject to the King of Johor, who resides at Siperka upon the Continent of Malacca. He governs it by Two Orang Kay's, one on each side of the Island. Orang Kay in the Malayan Language, signifies a Woodman, or a Man entrusted with the Care and Inspection of Woods and Forests. The Inhabitants are a sort of Banditto's, who have been possess'd of this Island a considerable Time, and are of late grown so numerous, that some Years ago one of their Orang Kay's, who came on board one of our Ships, boasted they were no less than Two Thousand in Number, tho' perhaps not half.    [006]    They live separate from each other in poor small Cottages, consisting only of one single Room, with a small Window and a Door to come in. These Huts are not above five or six Paces long, and two or three broad. All the Furniture within, consists in a Bench round the room to sit, or lye upon; without, there are some few Pinang Trees: For although the Island consists of scarce any thing but rocky Precipices, yet they choose for their Habitations such Places, where they can have a little flat ground round their Cottages, on purpose to plant some Pinang and other Trees. The Inhabitants are lively enough, and not ill shaped. They are somewhat blacker than the Javans, as they live also nearer the AEquinoctial Line, some of them seem'd to me to be of a very unhealthy Complexion. They pluck out the Hairs of their Beards, as do also the Inhabitants of Malacca and Sumatra, which makes them both look like ugly old Women. They are all Mahomethans, this Religion having spread almost all over the East. Their Habit consists in a Piece of coarse Cloath, made of the Bark of a Tree, which they wear about the Waste. They wear a piece of the same Cloath, twisted in form of a Garland, about their Heads; some wear Hats of Gabbe Gabbe Leaves. Gabbe Gabbe is a common Tree all over the East Indies, and not unlike the Palm Tree. The Indians make their Saga of it, which they eat instead of Bread. The Inhabitants came on board our Ship in small Boats just big enough to hold each a Man, and withall so light, that one Man can easily hawl them on Shore. The Man sits in the middle his Goods laid behind him: The Oars are above a Man's Length and so shap'd that the Man holding them in the middle rows with both ends on either side of the Boat. They have also larger Boats, which will hold conveniently four People, and with these they venture as far as the Coasts of Malacca. They brought us exceeding large Mango's, bigger than ever I saw them; Pisangs (Indian Figs) likewise of an uncommon Size, about a Span and a half in Length and a Span in their angular Circumference, very large Suursacks, Pine Apples, small Lemons, Fowl, and a very particular sort of Rams, of a redish colour, with long Hairs and a large Tusk on each side. They brought nothing of their Manufactures on board but Bags of Pisang neatly enough twisted, and small Mats of the same Substance, as also of Gabbe Gabbe Leaves, likewise very artfully wrought. They would take no Money for their Commodities; but Linnen, Shirts, Rice, Iron, and other Bawbles were very acceptable to them. They seem to have no Knowledge at all in Money, for having shew'd them some Pieces, they would ask for a small Mat ten times its Value. On the contrary, for a small Piece of 4 course Linnen, perhaps not worth three Farthings, they would readily exchange Victuals to the Value of two or three Shillings. The whole Island, as I have already observ'd is scarce any thing else but a heap of Stones, Rocks, and steep high Mountains, and yet, what appear'd to me remarkable, their barren Tops, where    [007]    perhaps one should be at a Loss to find two or three Inches of Ground, were cover'd with Trees and Bushes. We climb'd up the rocky Shores to look for the watering Places, not without some difficulty and danger, by the Help of the Roots of Trees, which grow up towards the Top, and which running down to the Ground ten, twenty, or more Fathoms, serv'd us instead of Ropes to catch hold at. Between the Heaps and Ruins, for so may I well call them, you meet very frequently with small Lakes, or Ponds of sweet Water, which is in some Places so cold, that having taken the Diversion of washing my self, I was very much indispos'd for some Days after. One River we met was large enough to drive a couple of Mills, and it came down . from the Tops of the Mountains, running over the Rocks and Stones with so much rapidity and roaring, that standing by we could scarce hear one another speak. The Water was clear, cool, and seem'd to me to taste somewhat bitter. I had not leisure enough to make what Observations I wish I cou'd have made upon the Plants of this Island. I observ'd in general that there grow many of those, which I found upon the Island Eidam, some few Leagues distant from Batavia, and have describ'd amongst the plants of that Island. Along the Shores I took notice of the following Trees and Shrubs.

Terum Lauk, a middle siz'd Shrub, with oblong leaves, two or three Inches long, an inch and a half broad, almost opaque, with a strong nerve running irregularly across the middle. The Flower was Yellow, pentapetalous or consisting of five petala, dispos'd in form of a Star. The seed was exceedingly beautiful, all green and like a Star of Seven rays. There were three, four or five of these Starry Seeds grew Close to one another, which altogether made a very handsom figure.

Prlja-Laut, is a Shrub which bears a berry somewhat. larger than our Juniper berries, green and of a fleshy substance. The leaves are serrated. I observ'd the very same plant in Persia about Gamron or Banderabassi, and have figur'd and describ'd it at large amongst my Persian plants.

Maanbu. A pretty large Tree with several obtuse tender leaves, soft to the touch, without a nerve in the middle, sticking together at the end of the branches. I observ'd the same tree at Eidam, but had not then the good luck to meet with the flowers and fruit, which I saw here in full perfection. The flower is somewhat particular. It consists of 5 petala, all on one side dispos'd in form of a Semi Circle, or half moon. Opposite to the flower leaves is a bent stylus standing upwards with a small round green head at the top To the flowers succeed five berries of a fleshy Substance.

Papiniok, hath a white flower not unlike the flower of beans, which family it comes nearest with regard to the leaves, there being three set    [008]    to each Stalk, the middlemost whereof is longer and larger than the two others, which stand opposite to one another. Another Tree, whose name I could not learn, had large tender, roundish leaves, not unlike the leaves of the Filberd-tree, but twice, or thrice as big with many irregular nerves running lengthways and transversely. The flower was Compos'd of an uncertain number of petala, commonly 7 or 9. The fruit was an Apple, not unlike the apples, of which the old Women at Batavia make a particular Ointment, to anoint and smooth the skins of Children after the Measles, of which I have elsewhere given some account.

Amongst the Plants there was particularly remarkable for its uncommon beauty a flesh colour'd Iris with yellow Streakes, and a thorny fruit much of the bigness and shape of a Nutmeg, and divided into three Cells, in each of which were lodg'd four round white seeds about as big as Pease.

All the Ships bound from Batavia to Siam have instruction from the Company to put in, if possible, at Puli Timon for wood and water, this Island being very commodiously seated for this purpose, about half way from Batavia. I was told, and it is not improbable, that there is but little difference between Puli Timon, and Puli-Oor, as to the situation, nature of the place and way of life of the Inhabitants. Upon our arrival in the morning a Gun was fired to invite the Inhabitants to trade with us; In the evening, after the Ship had taken in a good store of wood and water, the same signal was given for us, that went on Shore, to return on board.

We set sail after Supper with a brisk favourable gale. Puli Timon, which in the morning bearing N. E. by E. appear'd small and narrow, made now a much handsomer and larger appearance bearing E. N. E. about half a League distant and seem'd to be about four leagues long and two broad.

On the Twenty first of May in the morning we lost sight of Puli Timon and discovered the high mountains of Malacca at a considerable distance a-head. We steer'd to N W. and N. W. by W. to draw obliquely near Land, which we came in sight of before Sunset, being the main continent of Malacca and some small neighbouring Islands. We pass'd the said Islands in the night, and got on the Twenty second of May in the morning within a good league of the Coast of Malacca, along which we pursued our Course to the N. with a fine favourable Land Breeze. The Coasts of Malacca seem'd to me to be not unlike the Coasts of Ceylon very much broken, and rocky near the Sea with steep high mountains up in the Country, otherwisefgreen and full of Timber, and to all appearance very fruitful.

The weather continuing fair and the wind favourable all day long, we made after Sunset the two Islands Puli Capas.    [009]    We did not advance much on the Twenty third by t reason of calms, and contrary winds which obliged us to lay by the best part of the day.

On the Twenty fourth of May we made the Mouth of a River, and a small village upon the Continent of Bal. Malacca, in Portuguese Maps call'd Buse. The Inhabitants, who are all Fishermen, call'd it Terchannu. The village seem'd to consist of about Fifty Houses or Cottages, built along the Shore. A Portuguese Ship, which, as we were told by the Inhabitants, came from Macao, lay there at anchor with-her Colours flying. The Inhabitants speak both Siamish and Malayan. Three of them came on board in one of their boats to sell us fish; and for a course Table-cloth we had as much fish as Twenty hungry people could eat, and amongst others what they call King's Fish, which is a Fish not unlike a Pike, and about three foot long, Korkuades call'd by the Dutch Horse-heads, because of their figure, red Steenbrassems, Salammets, and Jacobs Ewertzen. We were becalm'd ih the afternoon, and cast anchor in sight of some small Rgdatts Islands call'd the Redans Islands. Some of the Ships Islan~~. Company diverted themselves, as usual, with fishing, and Cariou~~ one of them catch'd a very fine Starfish with nine Rays StarJ9Ih The main body held four Inches in Diameter, and each Ray was near one span and a half long, so that the I)iameter of the whole Creature was three spans at least. The upper surface was rough to the Touch, as it were full of small Scales. The thickness of the main body was two Inches representing a separate Star with nine short Rays rais'd above the substance of the body, in the Centre of which was a round hole, or mouth, pretty large and edged with two rows of fibres. The larger Rays were square in circumference, and of the thickness of a finger, streight, running into a point, of a whiteish, pale colour, and mark'd on the upper surface with Spots running across like Clouds, resembling those of a Tyger's skin. Both sides of the upper part were lin'd up to the point with a row of prickles joyning very close and growing still closer, as they run on towards the point. The under surface of this Creature was something softer to the touch or of a white colour, and each Raylin'd on each side with a row of small feet like an Indian Millepes, or Fortyleg, which in moving confusedly together afforded an odd and diverting sight. In the main body was a cavity tolerably deep, from which Issued a channel along each Ray. The inward substance was white, hard and so brittle that some of the Rays broke in my hands.

We had tolerable good weather on the twenty fifth, twenty sixth and Twenty seventh of May, safse, that meeting every day with Turnado's which frequently arise in this passage, we were obliged to lie by, till it blew over. The Coasts of Malacca seem'd to be all along well inhabited.

On the twenty eighth of May, we made Cape Patan, when the wind turning of a sudden to N. Vit. by W. we tack'd about for a while    [010]    advancing but little, and at last cast anchor in sight of the said Cape. We had several fishermen came on board, and sold us fish for Linnen Among the rest they brought us some of those Animals, which our Seamen call Sea Cats, and which are true Ichthyothuria having neither bones nor fibres like other fish. We catch'd abundance of then in our voyage to Japan, whether I refer the Reader as to a more particular description. It will not be improper here to obsenre, that Linnen is, what the Inhabitants of Malacca, as well on these as on the opposite Coasts, towards the Straits ot Malacca, and the Gulf of Bengale, as also the Inhabitants of the neighbouring Islands, covet most, and willingly Z exchange for the product of the Country, victuals, and Siii manufactures, to the great advantage of seafaring people. They are for the most part fishermen and admirable Summers, as they also pass the best part of their life at I was told by several of our Seamen, which had been that way, and were Eyewitnesses to the fact, that the Inhabitants of the Nicobar Islands, which lie in the Gulf of Bengale, and are commonly met with in going Malacca to Bengale, are such good swimmers, that they will follow a ship with all her Sails crowded, and come upg with her. In swimming they every now and then hZi. 0 out of the water. They tie their goods about ti't neck, and sell them on board for Fish hooks, small knXi=and such other bawbles, but chiefly for Linnen if ther get it. They climb up the Ship wherever they ~~ with great swiftness and dexterity. They are for the mstpart strong, and well built with wide mouths, and luge teeth; when for diversion's sake a Gun was Pd dwi-~~ would all jump over board, and a while after cli,mbi ik again. The Portuguese frequently put in at these XsS; to trade with the Inhabitants. T'hey speak a peculiar language of their own

 

[not processed yet]

 

they besmear'd them with the blood of the Birds they kill'd    [012]    upon the Island, having observ'd by chance to their great joy, that thus daub'd they would hold out longer. In short, little was wanting for the support of their Lives but fresh water, to supply which defect they dug holes in the ground, in several places of the Island, to gather the rain water, which they afterwards put by for use in the abovemention'd large Shells. They also took particular care, to gather and to lay by what pieces of wood were from time to time thrown upon the Coasts. After this manner they shifted for near eight years, having lost in the mean time three of their Companions, and thought of nothing else but ending their days in this solitude. But at last the desire of returning to their Wives, Relations and Friends prevail'd with them so strongly, that they resolv'd unanimously to build of their provision of wood a boat, or rather a monster of a boat, and to trust themselves once more to the mercy of the waves, rather than to lead any longer so comfortless and miserable a Life on a destitute, uninhabited Island. So they all went to work, and having got their boat ready, embark'd eleven in number, unknown where their fate and good fortune would carry them. After thirty one whole days driving, and many hardships endur'd, they at last got into the Bay of Tunquin upon the Coasts of the Island Haynam, and as good luck would have it, upon that part of the Island towards Canton, which belongs to the Chinese, the other side towards Cochinchina, being inhabited by a merciless and savage People. The Chinese Governor of this Island receiv'd them with all imaginable kindness, clad them, and sent them to Macao, from whence three of them came on board a Portugueze Ship to Batavia, one of which stay'd there. Hanjemon, and his Companion return'd to Siam on board our Ship; and the latter understood to his great grief, that his Wife, impatient of his long and tedious absence, had laid aside alf hopes of ever seeing her Husband again, and married a Portugueze, by whom she had already a Child.

We made very little way on the 30th. On the 3ISt we met with a small accident, being so suddenly befallen by a strong Turnado, that as we were taking in our Sails, we lost our foremast, which split to pieces, and fell down partly upon deck, partly over-board. Two of our Men, which stood at the top, fell over-board, one of which swam aboard directly, and was sav'd with ropes and wooden bars, which were held him down. The other miss'd the Ship, but catch'd hold of the tow, which tied our Boat to the Ship, and held it fast, notwithstanding the Ship run very swift, till two Men stept into the Boat, and took him up not without great difficulty: Neither of them seem'd to be hurt or bruis'd outwardly, but one complain'd of great pains in his side, the other in his breast. It was happy for us, that the rigging of the forenlast broke, because otherwise it might have endanger'd the great mast too. We had no sooner dropt anchor, and taken our sails in, when the Storm blew over; we lay by till the next day mending our foremast.    [013]    On the first of June) the Wind turn'd to S. S. W., S. AV. and S. we crowded all the sails we could, and to keep the Ship in balance, hoisted both sprit sails.

Having got our foremast mended, and up again, and the wind continuing favourable, we got pretty much forward in sight of flat low Land, being the Coasts of Ligor, and made on the fourth of June three large Islands in ten degrees of Northern Latitude, belonging to the Kingdom of Ligor, the first, set down in the Maps Puli Cornam, in the morning, the second Puli Sancorij, which

P2lg Sancort lies just under the tenth degree of North Latitude, about Pulia Bordia. noon, and the third, Puli Bordia, soon after. At night; we left them all a-stern, and were extreamly pleas'd with ~~. being now got within the Jurisdiction of Siam, for on the fifth of June we made the Country of Kui, the Wind ;~~ continuing still favourable by S. W., S. S. W. and S. Tbe $ Coasts are hereabouts very steep and rocky, and " I TYI thought not unlike the Coasts of Sweden, with manyiS dangerous Shoals7 Rocks and small Islands, partly:

inhabited, partly uninhabited, all along, which I was the more surpriz'd at, as there is not the least hint of any such thing in our Maps, and indeed I cannot forbear observing in general, that most Sea Maps are so ill done, that I wonder misfortunes don't happen oftner, there being nothing in the least to be depended upon their certalnty. Monproncena, a Merchant of Siam, gave me some information about these Coasts, which he was well acquainted withal. He was the late King's Factor and in the late revolution of Siam, of which more in the following Chapter, made Prisoner by the French, who took from him the goods he was entrusted with by the King, and some of his own, and set him ashore at Paliakatta, where the Governor receiv'd him kindly, and sent him with his family to Batavia. He nam'd the largest of the abovemention~~d Rocks and small Islands Samajotll, and mention'd the following places from thence to the mouth of the River Meinam. The several Rocks and Islands, which we saw on our Larboard, in general he call'd Pran, or Pranj. Next, he said, follow'd Czam, or Ce'am, then going further up, Putprib, then Isan, then Mayaklon, then Satzyn, then the mouth of the Meinam, which in the Language of Siam is call'd Pagnam Taufia.

On the sixth of June in the evening we arrivid safely in the road of Siam, and having notified our arrival by a dsscharge of five Guns, we cast anchor. The mouth of the Meinam bore directly N. about three Leagues of.

On the Seventh of June, early in the morning, I went on shore with Mr. Gudward and van Loohn. From the s anchoring place to the mouth of the River there is a soft muddy clay at the bottom, where all sorts of Ships may * safely ride. We took notice, as we went along, that marks were put up in several places for such ships, as can rsail up the River to avoid the shallows. We likewise smet several Fisherboats, and the Men busy about fishing. At the mouth of the River we could scarce    [014]    discern the tops tof our Masts. Several Chinese and other yonks lay there at anchor. The Mouth of the Meinam opens itself into the Sea, as it were, between two wings of low marshy Land, which is nothing but mud gather'd together, and overflow'd in high water. Not far off we saw some batteries planted with Cannons on both sides of the river, which were rais'd in the late french troubles. About noon we arriv'd safely at the Dutch habitation and storehouse call'd Amsterdam, near two Leagues distant from the mouth of the River, and were civilly receiv'd by the Governor of that place one Core, a Swede by birth.

On the Eighth of June in the morning I tried to walk about a simpiing in the adjacent woods, but to very little purpose. I had done the same the evening before with no better success, a great part of the woods being at that time overflow'd, and that part, which is dry, infested with Tygers, and other voracious beasts. Among the Ferns I observ'd very many I had seen growing wild with us in Europe; I found also several sorts of Cyperus grasses in marshy places, with a fine Alcea frutescens, and some other plants, which I have describ'd elsewhere. An old Guide that pretended to some skill in plants, assur'd me, that the Anacardium Tree is to be found plentifully about Bankok. We sent our boat back again to fetch four Chests of Silver from on board.

On the Ninth of June, We saiI'd up the River in our own boat, and by the way diverted ourselves with shooting of Monkey's which are seen frequently upon the Banks of the River climbing up the Trees.

At Bankock we saw the new Fort, which was rais'd by the French on the right bank, quite demolish'd. The banks above Bankok are pretty well inhabited, and stock'd with houses and villages. I do not mention here the names of particular places, because I have set them down in a Map of this River, which I had the opportunity of making at this time in going up, and which I corrected afterwards in several places as we fell down again to return on board. On the tenth in the morning we came to a small Island washed by two arms of the River where there are several temples and habitations of the Talapoins. I went on Shore, and took notice in one of the temples of three sitting, and a standing large Idols, gilt, with Mandarin's Caps. About Forty smaller Idols kept them Company standing at their feet. We cast anchor at night a few mlles from the Capital.

On the Eleventh of June We arriv'd, God be prais'd, in good health at our factory, situated below Judia, a little before nine in the morning, just as they were a going to perform Divine Service, it being Sunday. In the aiternoon the Director of our Factory had notice given him, to keep with his people within doors the next morning because his Majesty intended to go abroad. When the King of Siam goes abroad, every body must keep out of the way, as they do in Persia    [015]    when the King's Women go out. All the windows are shut, and not the least noise to be heard. If one happens by chance to meet the King, or his Wives, or the Princess Royal in the open fields, he must prostrate himself with his face flat to the ground turning his back to the Company, till they are out of sight.

On the Twelfth of June, at four in the afternoon, the Berklam's or Chancellor's of Siam, who hath also the direction of foreign affairs, his Mother was buried with great pomp and solemnity. The Siamites call also their Nurses mothers, and those brothers and sisters, who suck'd the same Breasts. This was only the Berklam's Nurse for his Mother died, and was buried about Fifteen months before. The burials of Siamites of quality are pompous and magnificent beyond expression. The Corpse is carried to the burial place by water in a stately Prow, as they are here ca)l'd; which is sometimes gilt all over, the Drums beating and the Music playing all the while. The Corpse is either laid on the face in a coffin, or placed in an open chair expose'd to the view of the Spectators, tho' often it smells intolerably, by reason of the time and delay the preparations for their burial require. And yet persons of quality esteem it one of their chief cares, assoon as they are taken ill of a violent, or lingring sickness, to order the necessary preparations for their funeral to be got ready betimes. The Coffin is a sort of an oblong-square Chest, or box, not unlike the German Coffins, gilt, or cover'd with gilt paper. It is plac'd under a stately herse with a cieling, which is likewise gilt and curiosly adorn'd with fine columns and cornishes, supporting several arched, bended roofs in proportion to the deceased's quality. At the side of the boat which carries the dead corpse is row'd another of equal length, with a beautiful gilt pyramid, built in form of a steeple. Before and behind are several other prows, with high poles of Bambous in the middle, hung with eight or ten gilt crowns made of paper. The annexed figures will give the Reader a much better Idea, than could be expected from the most accurate description All these several prows lie along the banks of the River till the tilneral is over. After this manner the Corpse it brought to the burial place, accompanied by Talapoins the Music playing all the while, and there burnt together with the coffin. The remaining bones and ashes are gather'd together, and interr'd, and a stately Pyramid erected over them, instead of a Monument, the height and magnificence of which are again proportionable to the deceased's quality. The place, where the Berklam's mother was interr'd, was seated between two branches of the River opposite to the City, and enclos'd with a square row of Banners, FIags and other Ornaments dispos'd in form of pallissado's. Upon the middle of the place was erected a stately tower of an extraordinary height, curiously adorn'd and supported with fine piSlars, columns and cornishes under this tower, which had two gates opposite to one another, the corpse was Iaid in a magnificent coffin    [016]    upon a pile of precious wood, to which the King put fire himself, in honour to the Berklam, for whom he hath a peculiar esteem. At one side of this Tower was erected a convenient building for the Talapoins, and the door leading to it was cover'd with several gilt roofs.

Some Days after Mynheer van Hoorn, Director of our Factory, with Mr. Daniel, and Mr. Moses BroccPhn-z~~

[023]    two Persons well skill'd in the Siamish, Malayans and several other Eastern Languages had a public audience of the Berklam, as Lord High Chancellor and Director of foreign affairs, in order to deliver the Letters, and Presents, we had brought over on board our Ship for his Majesty and him. The Captain of our Ship, and I, were likewise admitted to it. The day of the audience between seven and nine in the morning there came over to our Factoryb four Operas,- or Mandarins of tlie second rank

[024]    conduct us, of the number whereof were, Opera Tsijat, an Indostan, now chief of the Moors, or Mahometans, and the King's Siabander, or Receiver of the Customs for foreign goods, clad after the fashion of his Country, in a gown embroider'd with gold, with a turbant upon his head, a Chinese Mandarin with his Hairs tied up, otherwise clad as the Mandarins of Siam are, and two Siamites, both Mandarins, one of which was about fourscore years of age. We treated them and their retinues, with Brandy and Sweetmeats, but the Indostan and one of the Siamites refus'd to drink. Their prows were very sumptuous and pretty, particularly that which was sent to bring over the Letters for the King and Berklam, on board which went the Interpreter alone. It was not unlike the others as to its shape, but somewhat larger, and prow and stern higher'. The Moor's prow had this particular, that all the watermen were clad- in shirts or gowns of coarse linnen, with flat yellow and white Caps. His chair was lin'd with green, yellow and white. On each side of it there was a bench for his retinue. But the chair stood higher than the two benches, according to the fashion of the Country, which requires that persons of guality should have their seats plac'd higher than persons of an inferior rank. On each side of the chair stood a Scimeter and Pike, gilt and adorn'd with precious Stones, as badges of their authority which all the Mandarins cause to be carried after them upon solemn occasions. These state Scimeters havc handles fix'd to them at least a Man's length, so that one may cut and beat with them as with Scythes. The chairs are compos'd of several pieces. Right upon the prow lies the first deck, or layer, rais'd about a span above its borders, three or four paces long, and as broad as the prow, neatly carv'd and adorn'd with beautifill Cornishes Upon this first deck is plac'd another less in compass, but higher and adorn'd after the same manner. Upon this second Deck stands the Mandarins four legg'd gilt chair, and over it is extended a sort of Canopy, which is fix'd to the chair with gilt Crampirons, almost round and withal

[025]    so wide, that its Diameter    [017]    exceeds the breadth of the prow. It is made of Leather, lin'd within with bIack, without either gilt all over, or red with gilt borders.

[026]

Every thing being ready, we went away to the audience in the following order. First, Opera Sijot the Moor, then the three other Mandarins, each in his prow. Next follow'd the prow, which carried the Letters for the King and Berklam, which were writ in Malayan and Dutch, and kept each in a Purse embroider'd with gold. The purses were laid in.a golden bason, which was cover'd with an embroider'd cloth, and put into a box of Pinang, adorn'd with pearls according to the custom of the Country. With these Ornaments they were plac'd upon a stool right under the middle of the Canopy. The Interpreter sate before them upon a Carpet. We follow'd next to the prow with the King's Letters in a particular short prow sitting under a Canopy lin'd with red. In this order we went up the River, coasting for some time the walls of the City, and then turning in towards the Berklam's House, where he gives publick audience, and appears with all his pomp and splendor. We went ashore on this side of his House and walk'd the remaining part of our way thither. The Court was dirty and nasty enough, but however in somewhat better a condition, than that of his other House, where we had had a private audience of him some Days before. Entring the Court we took notice to the left of an open House, or Room, almost square, without walls, the floor of which was cover'd with boards and full of people, some sitting, some walking and conversing together. A large ELephant compleatly harnass'd stood in the Stable to the right. Opposite to the entry was a stony staircase, leading to the Berklam's House, where we were to have our audience. We went up the same and then pull'd oflF our Shoes. This House hath but one sin le Room, or rather lofty Hall, like a Church. It is whSte within and full of Dust and Cobwebs. Seven square pillars on each side, supported the cielLing, which was rais'd under the third roof, and neatly enough painted with red branch'd work. About the middle of each pillar hung a large plate of chinese Copper. In the wall between the pillars were long openings with shutters instead of

[027]    windows. There were two entries into the Hall, with a window between them; Poles of Bambous were fix'd to the pillars on each side of the Hall hung with white Cloth, behind which, between the pillars and the wall, were the Berklam's servants and domesticks, without any order, some sitting, some lying on the ground. Before sate the Mandarins, as Oja Tewejaata, a Mahometan, set over the Querry of the King's Elephants, next to the Berklam on his right, Oja Pipat, Deputy Berklam to his left, both with golden Boesets before them. Boesets are cubical boxes made of Pinang, and marks of the King's favour, which he presents his Mandarins with, when he gives them their names, and raises them to that dignity, which is never done without having first ask'd advice of his Astrologers. Below these    [018]    two there sate several other Siamish, Chinese, and Mahometan Mandarins. I counted twenty three to the Berklam's right, and one and twenty to his left. Seven of the chief on each side sitting uppermost, had golden, and two others which sate next them silver Boesets standing before them. The Letters, with the purses, bason and other orna'ments, were plac'd before the Berklam about four or five paces from him. We sate in the middle between the two rows of Mandarins, a Pinang bason with Betel and Pinang minc'd, and Jasmin and other flowers laid round the borders for ornaments sake, was set before each of us. The Berklam, as representing the person of the King sate in a particular enclos'd apartment, at the upper end of the Hall, behind an embroider'd Carpet laid over a pole of Bambous and rais'd about two or three foot above the ground, shewing only the upper part of his Body. Two gilt Umbrello's were plac'd before him, one at each side. Behind him were two golden Daggers, laid upon as many cushions, and a state Scimeter as above describ'd stood at each side. Two European pictures hung behind him on the wall encompass'd with branch'd work, instead of frames, after the Country fashion. Having all seated our selves, the BerkIam ask'd Mynheer van Hoorn by the Interpreter, how the General of our

[028]    East India Company did, how long he had been in the Indies, what Troops we had now at Batavia and at Bantam, which of the two was the better Country, as also who we, the Captain and I were ? These and some other questions being severally answer'd, the purses containing the Letters were open'd, and the Letters having pass'd through the hands of several of the Mandarins then present, read aloud. The Interpreter not understanding some of the Malayan expressions, Mr. Moses and Daniel were desir'd to help him out. The audience having lasted about three quarters of an hour, we were conducted by the Berklam's Son, who till then had been behind his Father, through his other House to our prows, and from thence to dinner, which stood prepar'd for us.

Nothing else remarkable happen'd during our stay at Siam, except, that towards the latter end of this month an order from the King was made publick, forbidding his Subjects to wash themselves in the River. I saw after­wards several Siamites washing themselves in their boats with River-water, it being impossible for this Nation to live without Water. The reason of this order was, because several people had been bit of late by a venomous water Snake, or Lizard, and died a few hours after. I was told that these Snakes do not exceed a finger in length, and a Leech in bigness, that they are cheker'd with brown and blue, and that they infest the River but once in eight or ten years. To oblige the people to a strict compliance with this order, it was order'd at the same time, that the Relations or Heirs of every Person that should die of the bite of this venomous Creature, should pay a fine of fifteen Thails.    [019]     

 

[030]

 

 Chap. ll. The present State of the Court of Siam, with a description of Juthia, the Capital City and Place of the King's Residence.

THe Kingdom of Siam is the most powerful, and its Court the most magnificent among all the black Nations of Asia. The present Tsiaufa, or Sovereign, is Petraatia, who upon the Death of his Predecessor Pro Narees Naray e pintsiau seiz'd the Scepter by cruelly extirpating all those, which had a better right to the Succession. He' had the greater power to effect this, as he was Captain General in the late King's life-time, who besides had ~entrusted him with the chief administration of the Kingdom during his long sickness, which at last, tho' he was not without hopes of recovery, prov'd incurable. The discovery of a Conspiracy form'd by a Minister of State, w whose name was Constantin Faulcon, against the next; heirs to the Crown, and their friends, furnish'd him with fair opportunity of compassing his ends. I will in a few words relate the History of this Conspirator, and the 0 particulars of the Conspiracy it self. 0 Faulcon, (or as he sign'd himself, Phaulkon,) was a Grecian by birth, a Man of a great understandingj of an -:agreeable aspect, and an eloquent Tongue, notwithstandinS : he was brought up to no Iearning, and had pass'd hls younger years mostly at Sea among different nations, particularly the English, whose Languages he had learnt. Being in the service of the latter in quality of Cockslvain, he came to Siam, and obtain'd an employment at Court. His natural parts, ready apprehension and good success in affairs entrusted with him, which were first of small ~; consequence, but by degrees of more moment, rais'd him; 0 in the space of nine years to the highest credit and; [31]

authority. For he was put at the head of the Finances of the Kingdom, and had also the direction of the King's Household: Almost all publick affairs of the most important concern were determin'd by his advice, and whoever had any thing to sollicit, was obliS'd to apply to -him. The better to secure himself in thls authority he thought it necessary to support it by some foreign power, of which he judg'd the French Nation to be the most cproper for seconding his designs, which even seem'd to f aim at the Royal dignity. In order to this he made his Sovereign believe, that by the assistance of the said nation he might polish his subjects, and put his dominions into a flourishing condition:    [020]    Accordingly an Embassy was sent from Siam to France, which occasion'd two in return from thence to Siam. Jesuits, Artists and military officers were invited from thence. General des Fargues being arriv'd with some hundred Soldiers was by him put in possession of the Fortress of Bankok, the Key of the Kingdom situated on the great River Meinam six Leagues from the d . Harbour. The French Soldiers together with other troops rais d in the Country were there put in Garrison, and the place made stronger by new fortifications. These preparations being made, he enter'd into measures with the French General, and some Mandarins, or officers of the Crown, whom he confided in. Monpi Totso, the King's Son in Iaw, and by him adopted, a dependant of his and the French, was to be placed on the throne, assoon as the sick King should be dead, whose encreasing dropsy threatned him with a sudden dissolution. Petraatia and bis Sons, the King's two brothers, as presumptive heirs - to the Crown, and whoever else was like to oppose the 4 iConsplrator's deslgns, were to be dispatch'd out of the Ni + way. Pursuant to this Scheme Monpi's Father, and ; rclahons, had already rais'd fourteen thousand Men, who

.i lay dispers'd through the Country and the better to Sicilitate the execution of this design, Faulcon persuaded tbe sick King, having found means to introduce himself uto his apartment in private, that it would be very much 3l

 

for the Security of his person during the ill state of his health, to send for the French General, and part of his Garrison, up to Livo, where the King then was, being a City fifteen Leagues North of Judia, and the usual place of the King's residence, where he used to spend most part of his time. General des Fargues being on his way thither, the Conspiracy was discover'd by Petraatia's own Son, who happening to be with two of the King's Con­ cubines in an apartment adjoyning to that where the Conspirators were, had the curiosity to listen at the door, and having heard the bloody resolution they had taken, immediateby repair'd to his Father to tell him of it. Petraatia without loss of time acquainted the King with this Conspiracy, and then sent for Monpi, Faulcon and the Mandarines of their party, as also for the Captain of the Guards to Court, and caused the Criminals forthwith to be put in Irons notwithstanding the King express'd the greatest displeasure, at his so doing. Faulcon had for some time absented himself from Court, but now being summon'd he could no longer excuse himself, though dreading some ill event, 'tis said, he took his leave from his famlly in a very melancholy manner. Soon after his Silver Chair, wherein he was usually carried, came back empty, a bad omen to his friends and domesticks, who could not but prepare themselves to partake in their master's misfortune. This happened the nineteenth of May in the year t689. Two days after Petraatia orderad against the King's will Monpi's head to be struck off, throwing it at Faulcon's feet, then loaded with Irons, with this reproach, See there is your King. The unfortunate    [021]    sick King heartily sorry for the untimely end of his dearest Monpi, earnestly desired, that the deceased's body might not be exposed to any further shame, but decently buried, which was accordingly complied with. Monpi's Father was seiz'd by a Stratagem upon his estate between Judia and Livo, and all their adherents were dispers'd. Faukon, after having been tortursd and starv'd for fourteen days, and thereby almost reduc'd to a skeleton, had at last his Irons taken off, and was carried away after Sunset, in an ordinary chair, unknowing what would be his fate. He was first carried to his House, which he found rifled: His Wife lay prisoner in the Stable, who far from taking leave of him spit in his face, and would not so much as suffer him to kiss his only remaining Son of four years of age another Son being lately dead and still unburied. From thence he was carried out of Town to the place of execution, where notwithstanding all his reluctancy he had his head cut off: His Body was divided into two parts and cover'd with a little earth, which the Dogs scratch'd away in the night time, and devoured the Corpse to the Bones. Before he died, he took his Seal, two silver Crosses, a relick set in gold, which he wore on his breast, being a present from the Pope, as also the order of St. Michael which was sent him by the King of France, and deliver'd them to a Mandarin, who stood by, desiring him to give them to his little Son. Presents indeed, that could be of no great use to the poor Child, who to this day with his Mother goes begging from door to door, nobody daring to intercede for them. General des Fargues being in the mean time arriv'd at Livo with a few men, could not but be extreamly surpriz'd at this unexpected turn of affairs: j He was indeed to all appearance well receiv'd, and in the Kinfs name presented, as usual, with a Golden Boeset or Pinang's box: but before he was permitted to return to i\0 Bankok, he was obliged to promise to deliver up this !.'s place to the Siamites, and to leave his two Sons, and j twelve of his Countrymen, as Hostages at Livo. The General upon his return thither, being enrag'd at this 0 disappointment, acted quite contrary to his promises, clapt the watermen, which brought him down, in prison, fired ; at the Siamites from the Fortress, and discharg'd his Guns at their Ships that pass'd by, on which occasion two of his Garrison, who were natives, appearing not guite so ready as he would have them, he caused them to be hang'd on : the ramparts in sight of their Countrymen, and committed 0: all sorts of Hostilities imaginable. This conduct was like s.l 33 c

to provoke the Siamites to act a bloody Tragedy with himif and his Sons, accordingly they had already begun to raise<a forts on the banks of the River to cut off his retreat byg water. But his Fire soon abated, upon which, and hisP laying all the blame of his conduct upon his people, who would not obey commands, the Dutch Residenv9 persuaded the Court, that it would be more for their7 Honour to take revenge of him by generously    [022]    overlookingfl and slighting his bravadoes. This representation had thei effect, that soon after he obtain'd leave to depart with hisj people. I cannot forbear mentioning an odd accident which happen'd on this occasion. The abovesaid Fourteen;; Hostages having endeavour'd to make their escape from Livo were overtaken again, and carried back on Horse­ back; Their Guards according to the custom of tht Country put ropes about every one's necks, which ceremony put one of the Frenchmen, an Engineer by hisy profession, into such a fright, that he fell stone dead to; the Ground. There were still tsro of the King's Ships out at Sea, with Frenchmen on board, sent to cruise upon Pirates, and their return was expected much about that time. These the Siamites endeavour'd to get into their power before the Captains could have notice of the rupture; between the two nations. Their attempts succeeded to expectation, for they attack'd the Sloop, which the French ;? General sent down in the night, to acquaint the Captains with what had happen'd, just as falling down the River she came out of reach of the Cannons of the fortress, and after a desperate fight took and burnt her. All the othe r Trenchmen, who then were in Siam, either in the Servicc of the Country or otherwise, pay'd very dear for the treasonable practices of Faulcon, and the ill conduct o f their General by suffering a long and tedious imprison~~ > ment. Monsieur Louis, the Metropolitan Bishop, who: had liv'd in the Country for several years, had his nc~~ Cgltody.built palace out of the Town plunder'd, and was himself in Custody into the Court of the Royal Magazines; together with the other Jesuits his Collegues, who I thi~~

34

were seven or eight in number. I visited them there, living chearfully in little Houses built of Bambous and Reed. M. Louis is a Gentleman of profound learning, and throughly versed in the Religion of Siam, and the Language of their holy books and priests: As he is also a very pious man, he had by his Christian doctrine and exemplary Life gained so much upon the Hearts of ;~~lis Keepers, as another Paul, that they venerated him as a holy Minister of God Almighty. Three other Jesuits, who had setled at Livo, near the Temple of Wathniak prani Waan, on pretence of learning the Siamian Pali, or Language of their Holy Books from the Priests, with whom they had also conform'd in shaving their head, in their habit, and in their way of living, disappear'd of a sudden, nor was it ever known what was become of them. During these Troubles, the Dutch were assur'd by order of Petraatia of his favour and protection. Orders also were sent down to Bankock to let their ships and boats pass by unmolested.

Petraatia afterwards seiz'd the King's two Brothers, on pretence of being in Faulcon's Interest, and caus'd them ~~wo to be carried out of the City of Livo to a neighbouring Temple, where they were beaten to death with Clubs made of Sandal-wood, the tespect for the Royal blood forbidding the shedding of it. And so the King to his great grief liv'd to see his own Brothers die the same death, to which he on the ninth    [023]    of October 656. had put his Uncle Pracitama Ratia, who had succeeded his Fathetj and was then in the third month of his reign, when his Nephew took posession of the Throne. What added still to the King's mortification was, that he had always look'd upon Petraatia, as his most intimate friend, who was his Sisterxs Son, whose Sisters and Daughters were the Kingxs Wives, and who besides having on all occasions express'd an abhorrence for the burthen of a Crown had never given the King room to suspect him of so cruel a design. Under this Grief he died two days after, being the eleventh Of July or according to the Soncarad (which is the

3s

Epocha of Siam) 2a3z, in the fifty ffth of his age, and the thirty second of his peaceable reign..;this manner Petraatia got possession of the Administration with the Title of King of Siam, Tanassari, Sucketa 0

and Poiseluke, as also of Protector of Cambodia, Jehoor, Pattany and Queda. By virtue of the ancient Laws of Siam upon the demisei of the King, the Crown devolves on his Brother, and upon the Brother's death, or if there be none, on the eldest on. But this rule hath been so often broken through, and the right of Succession brought into such a confusion, that at s present upon the death of the King he puts up for the~~­ Crown, who is the most powerful in the Royal Family, and so it seldom happens, that the next and lawful Heir:> ascends the Throne, or is able to maintain the peaceable possession of it.

This uncertaints of Succession even sometimes gives an opportunity to Strangers, who have no pretensions at all - ' i X to aspire to the Throne, two late Instances of which I will " briefly relate. A Prince of the family of the Kings of, a t Maccassar, having some years ago fled for protection ts s

Siam with many of his Countrymen, settled near the Q i Camp of the Malagans which the Kinz of Siam had assign'd to this latter Nation for their Habitation. (Itsl i must be observ'd here that the several spots of ground,>ir on which the Malagans, Chinese, Japanese, Portuguezc, Dutch and other Nations live at Siam, and which are more particularly express'd in the annex'd Plan of the KindsX

Residence, are call'd Camps.) The said Prince form'd 1; 2 design with the assistance of those Malagans, who proCcss the Mahometan Religion as well as he, to seize on the Capital City and to possess himself of the Throne. Buı t t his design being discover'd before it could take effect, t}ac Prince was summon'd to Court to submit and beg pardav. which he refusing according to the innate obstinacs of those of Maccassar, he was cut to pieces with all i Countrymen except his Son of eight years aste, af~~ a bloody fight, in which they made a brave defenct ud kill'd a great number of the Siamites. The Malagans, who had assisted him, having submitted in time, escapJd thi s severe punishment, and were pardo n' d and res tored the King being of a merciful temper. This happen'd in the year 1687 in the late King's Life time.    [024]     

In the year 1689 a Priest of Pegu, who had been formerly in Custody at Juthia, and was acquainted with the affairs of that Court, made the like attempt. He went @@ about the Country, giving out that he was the eldest of the late King's brothers (who were kill'd by order of Petraatia) and consequently was the next Heir to the Crown. This Story found so much credit, that in a short time he brought over to his Interest about Ten thousand men, being for the greater part an undisciplined rabble. Having had notice, that the Prince Royal was to go to a certain place for his diversion attended by his Court, he went ; thither, and hid himself in the wood, in order to murder the whole Company, afterwards to surprize the City, and to make away with the King and all his Servants. But he was disappointed in his Scheme, for the Prince perceiving so many people, and suspecting some ill design, lef; them his plate for a prey and fled back to Court. The King having with great speed gather'd an army of Twelve thousand Men, sent them to meet the undisciplined multitude, as they were marching towards the City. This unexpected opposition put them under such a consternation, that they immediately dispers'd and fled with so great a precipitation, that not above one hundred of them were kill'd, and but three hundred taken prisoners, whose escape the Victors prevented by burning the Soles of their feet. Some days after the Priest was found out himself lying a sleep under a Tree in the Wood, and having only a Boy with him. He was forthwith carried to Juthia, and being fetter'd with his neck and breast against a post, expos'd for a publick spectacle for some days; afterwards his belly was cut open he being alive, and his Intestines 7 given to the Dogs to tear and devour. The King's Court consists of the following great 037

Officers of the Crown. Peja Surusak call'd also Peja Wani-a and Faiwani, to whom the King hath committed the Crown affairs, as for instance the direction of the Criminal Courts and Confiscations, as being the most odious part of the Regal power. It is commonly thought the King by laying this trust upon him designs to render him obnoxious to the People, but others pretend it was rather done to secure the succession to him. Peja prah' klam, (Foreigners pronounce it Berklam) is High Chancellor, and hath the direction of foreign affairs. lIe is a more comely Person, and of better aspect, than I ever met with amongst this black race of mankind who are generally short siz'd and look almost like Monkeys. He is also of a quick understanding a/ nd lively action, for which reason he was a few years ago sent Ambassador to France, of which Country, its Govern­ ment, Fortresses and the like, he would often entertain us in his discourses; and the hall of his House, where we had a private audience of him, was hung with the pictures of the Royal Family of France, and European Maps, the rest of his furniture being nothing but Dust and Cobwebs.­ 3. Pejawam, otherwise call'd Tnau Peja Taramasa, is    [025]    great (Chamberlain, and hath the Inspection of the King's palaces and their apartments. 4. Peja Jummeraad, a learned Chinese, is Chief Justice. 5. Peja Polethep, Receiver general, hath the administration of the Gown Lands and their Revenue. 6. Peja Tsakru, great master of the Stables, hath the Inspection - over the Elephants and Horses, and all that relates to the King's Train and Equipages. 7. Peja Klahom, Steward of the Household, hath the command of the King's Servants, pleasure yachts, and the Royal furniture. These are the chief Mandarins, or officers of State, who make up the great Council of the Kingdom. Mandarin is properly a Chineze word us'd only among foreigners, and is in the Language of the Country express'd by Tsiankrue, or Tsiant Tsiam. Next to them are the State and Court officers of an inferiour rank, and an uncertain number, for instance: Peja Tareman, the chief of the Malagans; Opera Tsijat, the chief of the Moors, as they are call'd, or Mahometans: He is also Siabander, or Receiver of the customs for foreign merchandize. Oja Pipat, under or Deputy Berklam, was formerly a domestick of Faulcon, of whom he learnt the skill of pinching Strangers; Oja Tewijata, Querry of the Elephants, is a Mahometan from Indostan, a Man of worth. Oja Tamam Captain of the Guards. Oja De Tsiu, Captain of the Land forces. The Siamites have no hereditary family names, but receive their denomination from the fancy of others, particularly their Superiors. Great Men are call'd after their employments, and such are the names above related. Court Titles and Dignities go in this order. I. Peja and Oja is as much as a Prince. 2. Opera, who are about forty in number both at Court, and in the Country, are like Lords or Barons. 3. Oluang, or Luang are their Noblemen or Gentry. This Title the King bestows also on his Interpreters or Truchemans. 4. Okucen, are persons descended of great famiIies. 5. Omucen, Inferior oicers of distinction. 6. Majalacks, Pages and young Gentlemen.

The Kingdom of Siam is by the Natives called Muan Thai, which is as much as to say, the Land Thai. In their books it is sounded with this Epithet, Krom Thep Pramma haa Ikoon, (Circuitus visitationis Deorum) the Circuit of the Visitations of the Gods. The Malagans and Peguans call it Tziam, from whence comes the European name Siam. Its Northern Latitude about the middle of it, or where the Capital City is situated, is fourteen degrees eighteen minutes, and its Longitude according to the common Maps 138, but according to the late Observations of the Jesuits 120 degrees. Eastward it borders upon the Kingdoms Tunkin, Cosynsina and Cambodia; on the South it is limited by the Sea, and the Countries of Malacca, of which the King of Siam possesses Ligoor, Tanasseri, and some other small Provinces. On the West is the Kingdom of Pegu, and on the North that of Laos. Considering its extent it is but indiferently peopled being best inhabited only along the banks of the Rivers. The great quantity of Deer and    [026]    Buffalo-skins, that are yearly exported by Sea are a proof of vast Woods and Wildernesses, the rather because those Animals are killed only in the neighbourhood, Tygers and Morasses hindering the hunting of them far into the forests. This Kingdom contains twelve large provinces, each of which govern'd by an Oja, or Prince, as the King's Lieutenant, who hath several Opera's, or subaltern Officers under him. Besides there is an Oja at Court for every Provinces who manages its Concerns, and keeps a watchful Eye over the commanding Lieutenant's conduct. The late King had added a thirteenth Province to the aforesaid twelve, which he conquer'd from the Kingdom of Laos, and in all probability he would have conquer'd more, if the swelling of a large River had not put a stop to his progress. But a few years after that Province was taken from him again, so that all the benefit of an expedition undertaken in so remote a Country, and with so much expence, was only the creating a Jealousy between the two Nations, which ruinxd the former trade between them, and remov'd it to Cambodia.

Since I have mention'd Laos, it will not be improper to ; communicate to the Reader what account I had of this Kingdom, which is otherwise but little known, because of its being an Inland Country, and remote from the Sea Laos is situated under the same Northern Climate with Tunquin, and is a large and powerful Kingdom separate from the neighbouring States by Forests and Desarts. It lies a month's Journey North of Judia. It is very inconvenient and troublesome travelling thither by Land, on account of the high mountains, and on the River, by reason of the rocks and Catarracts, so that the Vessels, or Prows , as they call them, are built in such a manner, that they; can be taken to pieces, and carried over the eminences in i: order to pursue the Journey by water. It is a fruitfill; Country. The Soil is a fat clay, which in summer grows so hard and firm, that the Inhabitants use to thresh the Rice upon it, in order to separate it from the husks, for which in other places they make use of a wooden Trough. It produces Rice of the best kind in abundance, and furnishes Cambodia with the best Benzoin and Gumm Lacc, though both these commodities grow also in that Country. It likewise yields the most valuable Musk, some Gold, and some precious Stones, chiefly Rubies, besides Pearls, which the Siamites call Muk, which is the more to be admired, since I could not hear, that there was any Salt Sea in the Country. Their Religion agrees with that of Siam, nor do they much diflfer in their Language and writing, except only that the Inhabitants of Laos cannot pronounce the Letters L. and R. They write upon leaves like the Peguans and Malabarians, and as the Sianutes write their religious Books; but civil affairs are writ upon a sort of course paper with earthen pinns. They boast that the Siamites have learnt the art of writing and the Language of their holy Books from them. They resemble the Chinese in their shape and mien, but are more t awny and slender, and    [027]    consequently of a much handsomer appearance than the Siamites. They have long Earlaps like the Peguans, and the Inhabitants of the Sea-coast,the Men without any ornament, but the Women, as long as they remain unmarried, with pieces of gold in them. The Men cause their Legs to be painted from the ancle up to the knee with flowers and branches, like the Braspintados of the Siamites, as a mark of their Religion and Manhood. An arm of the River Ganges runs through the Country, which falls into the River of Cambodia, and renders it navigable, so that the Inhabitants of Cambodia go thither every Year in their Prows, or vessels in order to trade with t he Inhabitants. The two chief Cities are Landjam and Tsiamaja. The whole Country is said to have been formerly tributary to the King of Siam.

But not to expatiate beyound our subject, we will return to Juthia, or Judia, the Capital City and place of residence of the King of Siam, which in some descriptions of Travels ' is wrongly call India, perhaps by a mistake in print. This City in ancient times stood at the place, which is now call'd Bankok, on the West bank of the great River Menam, from whence it was afterwards remov'd to the place, on which it now stands, being a low Island form'd by the said River. This Island, with the City upon it, is of the shape of the sole of a man's foot, with the heel turning westward, and hath about two German Miles in circumference. It is situate in a Country all flat, as far as the Eye can reach, on a low ground, which is cut through by many Canals coming from the River, and by them divided into so many Isles and squares, that one cannot go far without the help of Boats. It is surrounded with a Brick wall, which on the South and North is four fathoms and a half high, clean, well condition'd and adorn'd with Battlements, but the rest of it is lower, neglected and decay'd. This wall is open in many places, where there are small gates towards the River. On the inside there are ramparts rais'd against it at diferent distances for placing Cannons upon them. At the lower end of the City appears a large bastion advancing into the water, besides several small ones. The first is furnish'd with Cannons against the Ships coming up. To fence the Citywall against the wasteing of the current, a narrow bank, or key is left, which is built upon in many places. Divers great Canils go out of the River quite through the City some from East to West, others from North to South, and abundance of smaller Canals being derived from the great ones, Ships may come from the River up into the Town, and put on shore near the principal Houses and Palaces. The Streets run in a streight line along the Canals; Some of them are tolerably large, but the greater part very narrow, and all, generally speaking, foul and dirty: Some also are overGow'd at high water. Considering the bigness of the City, it is not very populous, and in some parts but thinly inhabited, particularly on the West side on account of its remoteness, and towards the    [028]    South by reason of the morassy ground, over which people make shift to get upon planks, or paltry bridges. This makes that in those parts there are abundance of empt)spaces and large gardens behindL the streets, wherein they let nature work, so that they are full of grass, Herbs, Shrubs and Trees, that grow wild. The first Street upon entring the City is that which' runs Westward along the turning of the Wall: it hath the best Houses, amongst which are those, that formerly belonged to the English, Dutch, and French, as also that in whlch Faulcon resided. The middle Street, which runs North towards the Court, is best inhabited, and full of shops of Tradesmen, Artificers, and Handicraftmen. In both these Streets are seen above one hundred Houses belonging to the Chinese, Hindostanians and Moors, as they call them. They are all built alike of Stone, very small, being but eight paces in length, four in breadth and of two Stories, yet not abpvc two Fathoms and a half high. They are cover'd with flat tiles, and have large doors without any proportion. The rest of the Streets are less inhabited, and the Houses ot' ordinary Inhabitants are but mean and poor cottages, built of Bambous (which is a hollow reed, two or three Spans thick) and boards, and carelesly cover'd with Gabbé Gabbé, Branches and leaves of Palm Trees growing wild in Morassy places. The Mandarins or Ministers of State and Courtiers live in separate palaces, with Courtyards to them, which are very dirty. The Buildings in generd, though rais'd with Lime and Stone are but indifferent, and the apartments neither clean, nor well furnish'd. The booth, or Shops of the town are low, and very ordinary, however they stand in good order, and in a streight line, as the Streets are. The many Canals occasion a great number of bridges. Those which are laid over the great Canal are of Stone, with Ballisters of the same, but as there are no Waggons, nor Carts in this place, they we t narrow; in the middle they are high and eighty paces long; but the Bridges over the by Canals are of no Architecture, and for the greatest part of wood. (Fig. 7=See. Tab.II.)

There are three Royal palaces in this City. Tbe'1,' first is the new palace built by the late King on the Northside towards the middle of the Town. (Fig. 8 =See. Tab.III Fig. I.) It consists of a large square, with several subdivisions, and many buildings, which according to the Chinese Architecture are adorn'd with many Roofs, and Frontispieces part of which are gilt over. Within the walls of the Palace as well as without, are to be seen long Stables, in which some hundred of Elephants stand in a long row magnificently harnass'd. Since the French troubles, as they are here call'd, there is but one entry left to go into the palace, through which no person is admitted but on foot, though it is so dirty, that people sometimes step in the mud up to the calf of their Legs, if they do not keep an exact ballance in walking over the small planks, that are laid for them; even an ordinary Mandarin dare not enter but attended only with one servant. For this same reason no ships    [029]    or boats are allow'd to come upon the great river, as far as it runs by the walls of the palace. The gates, and other avenues of the palace are crowded with swarms of naked fellows, whose tawny skin is painted with black checquered figures, pointed in the manner, as they do with the Images at the holy sepulchre at Jerusalem; some of them are thus mark'd only on the arms, but others all over the body to the loyns, which are wrapt up in a cloth according to the general custom of the Natives. They are call'd by a Portu gueze word Braspintades. These are the King's Guards, Door-keepers, and watermen, who wear instead of arms short thick clubs, roving and sauntering about the palace like idle Vagrants.

Palace of the Prince Royal

The second palace, call'd the foremost palace, is situated in the North East part of the City towards its extremity. It is of a square figure, but not near so large as the first. It was the ancient place of Residence of the former King's, but at present, in 1690, it is inhabited by the Prince Royal, who is twenty years o f age. The third and last Palace is smaller than any of the two, and situated in the West and least inhabited part of the City. In this lives at present a Prince of the Roya1 Blood, and it is call'd the Palace of the (Querry of the King's Elephants, the said Prince being the Conductor and Manager of the Elephant, which carries the King. The Prince doth not ride upon the Elephants neck as usual, but lies upon its Crupper behind the King, from whence he hath a way of governing the beast by certain signs, to which it is used.

After the Palaces I shall take notice of the Temples and Schools of this City. They are in great number, for as the whole Country is stock'd with Priests and Monks, this City in particular abounds in all parts with Temples, the Courts of which keep a regular proportion with the Streets, and are full of pyramids and columns of divers shapes and gilt over. They do not equal our churches in bigness, but far exceed them in outward beauty, by reason of the many bended roofs, gilt frontispieces, advanced steps, columns, pilIars, and other ornaments Within they are adorn'd with many images as big as the life and bigger, skilfully formed of a mixture of pIaister rosin, oyI and hair, the outside of which is first varnish' over with black then giIt. They are placed in several rows on an eminence, on which the Altar stands. In some temples also along the walIs in single rows, sitting with their legs cross'd and naked, except the waste, about which is tied a dark yelIow cIoth; over the left shouIder down to the navel hangs another piece of cloth of the same colour twisted cIose together. Their earlaps are cut through with a slit, and are so Iong, that they reach the shouIders.Their hair iS curl'd, tied over the crown in two knots, so that it cannot be distinguish'd whether it is a cap, or some such ornament. The right hand rests upon the right knee and the left Iies in the lap. The chief place, which is in the middle, is for an Idol of a size far above human, sittinz in the same posture under a Canopy. It represents their chief Teacher, and the Founder    [030]    of their Religion. The Siamites call him Prah, the Saint, or Prah Pudi Dsiau, the aint of high descent, or with a particular name, Sammona Khodum, which the Peguans pronounce Sammona Khutama, a Man without passions. The Japanese and Chinese call him Siaka, or Saka, the Ceylonese Budhum and Budha. This Prah, or Khodum is represented in a monstrous size in some Temples. In a Peguan Temple out of the City, call'd in the Peguan Language Tsianpnun Tsiun, there sits on an eminence such an Idol strongln gilt, the proportion of which is such, that it would be of 120 foot in length, if standing, and we shall hereafter meet with another Siaka, or Idol, at Miaco, the Capital of Japan, and Residence of its Ecclesiastical Hereditary Emperor, which is not inferior to this at Judia, either in size, or beauty. The posture of the said Idol is the same with that, in which Budha, and his disciples placed themselves, when they were enthusiastically meditating upon religious Subjects. Even to this day the priests hls followers are obliged by their rules to sit down daily at stated times in the posture of their Master, when they arc exercising their devotions of meditation and Enthuslasm. They also go about in the same dress, only with their heads shav'd, covering their face against the Sun with aw Fan made of palm wood, and leaves.

Next to the Temples are the habitations of the Monks which are but poor Houses. On one side of them thev have a publick hall, or oratory, call'd Prahkdi, which commonly is a pretty large timber building much like tl.le Temples, the edges of the roof gilt, with a few steps leading up to it, and furnish'd with many Timbersheds instead of windows to give passage to the air, during their publick assemblies, or lectures. The cieling within is suported by two rows of columns, and the room divided into divers classes, and benches. In the midst of it, some steps above the floor, stands a desk, or pulpit, curiously carv'd and gilt, like those in our churches, on which at certain hours appears an old priest, who firom large palm leaves ingrav'd with black Characters, reads with a slow and distinct voice some holy words to his audience, con sisting chiefly in students of their divinity, or young monks. Upon the hearing of certain words, and names the audience clap their hands together above their forehead, but upon the main shew little attention, and devotion; for I my self saw some cutting Pinang, others grinding powders, or mixing Mercury with the Juice of Herbs, or employing their Hands with some other pastime. Near the Desk, or in some other place is to be seen the Idol of Amida standing upright on the flower Tarate, or Faba Aegyptiaca, or Nymphza magna incarnata, whom they believe to be the Intercessor of departed Souls. Round about the hall are hung up flowers and crowns, cut of paper banners, and other gilded ornaments, suspended of Bambou reeds, which they use to carry in filneral processions.

During their assemblies I have commonly observ'd a machine    [031]    standing before the Desk or Pulpit, awkwardly join'd together of Bambous in the form of a table, and hung with yellow pieces of doth, which the priests make ' use of for their dress, or rather covering their waste. There were flowers stuck about it for ornament's sake, and several dishes plac'd on it fill'd with Rice, Pinang, Pisang, dried Fishes, Lemons, Mangostanges, and other fruits of the Trees of the Country,which were offerings and presents made to the Convent. It happen'd once, when I was going into one of them, that on the steps I met such a machine, when they were carrying it home, the assembly being finish'd, either the throng of the people, or the h carelessness of the bearers, were the occasion of their breaking it to pieces, so that the Dishes with the eatables, .; and all the lrumpery together, fell upon the ground, which made me speedily get out of the way, for Fear the Mob might fall upon me as the cause of all the mischief.

Round the City lie many Suburbs and Villages, some of which consist of inhabited Ships, or Vessels, rather than Houses, containing two, three, or more Families each; they remove them from time to time, and float them particuIarly when the waters are high, where Fairs are kept, to sell their Goods there and get their Livelyhood by it. N (Figs. 9, 10) I I .=See. Tab. III. Fig. 4,5,6) The Houses in the common Villages, that , stand upon firm Ground, are generally built of Bambous, reed, planks, and other ordinary stulT; some of the Houses in the Viliages along the banks of the river stand on pales !fl1 a fathom high, that the waters, which overflow the Country for some months, may freely pass under the Houses. Each Housei is furnish'd with stairs, or a Ladder, to come down in dry weather and with a boat, to go about it at high water. (Fig. 12.=See. Tab. III. Fig. 7) Other villages stand on higher and dry ground, and consequently not being subject to those Inundations their Houses want neither such stairs nor boats. On those eminences also stand Temples, Convents, burying Places, where they bury their dead, and Yards where they burn their bones and ashes, and erect costly Pyramids over them. On the South-side, at a small distance down the River, the Dutch have their Fwactory and Magazines very splendidly and conveniently built on dry ground. Lower down on the same bank are other villages inhabited by Colonies of Japonese, (the best Soldiers of former Kings) Peguans and Malaccans. On the opposite side of the River stands a village inhabited by a Portuguese race begot on black Women, and filrther down stands a Church, dedicated to St. Domingo, to which belong the Fathers of the Dominican Order. Behind it stands another small Church, which is kept by two Fathers of the Order of St. Austin, who with the foresaid three Dominicans live peaceably [032]

[044]    makes that in those parts there are abundance of empty spaces and large gardens behindL the streets, wherein they let nature work, so that they are full of grass, Herbs, Shrubs and Trees, that grow wild. The first Street upon entring the City is that which' runs Westward along the turning of the Wall: it hath the best Houses, amongst which are those, that formerly belonged to the English, Dutch, and French, as also that in whlch Faulcon resided. The middle Street, which runs North towards the Court, is best inhabited, and full of shops of Tradesmen, Artificers, and Handicraftmen. In both these Streets are seen above one hundred Houses belonging to the Chinese, Hindostanians and Moors, as they call them. They are all built alike of Stone, very small, being but eight paces in length, four in breadth and of two Stories, yet not abpvc two Fathoms and a half high. They are cover'd with flat tiles, and have large doors without any proportion. The rest of the Streets are less inhabited, and the Houses ot' ordinary Inhabitants are but mean and poor cottages, built of Bambous (which is a hollow reed, two or three Spans vjlN thick) and boards, and carelesly cover'd with GabbE ' Gabbe, Branches and leaves of Palm Trees growing wild "' in Morassy places. The Mandarins or Ministers of State and Courtiers live in separate palaces, with Courtyards to them, which are very dirty. The Buildings in generd,'!$'@ though rais'd with Lime and Stone are but indlSerent,fg and the apartments neither clean, nor well furnish'd. The 1 booth, or Shops of the town are low, and very ordinary, ''i however they stand in good order, and in a streight line, '' as the Streets are. The many Canals occasion a great number of bridges. Those which are laid over the great Canal are of Stone, with Ballisters of the same, but as there are no Waggons, nor Carts in this place, they we re narrow; in the middle they are high and eighty paces long; but the Bridges over the by Canals are of no great Architecture, and for the greatest part of wood. (Fig. 7.)

There are three Royal palaces in this City. Tbe'1,' first is the new palace built by the late King oe

[045]    the Northside towards the middle of the Town. (Fig. 8 ) It consists of a large square, with several subdlvisions, and many buildings, which according to the plan of the royal palace of Siam, wherein A is the late Kings palace, together with the hall of audience. B, The old royal palace. C, The dining hall. Several temples. t c e, etc. Several centry-boxes about and within the enclosure of the palace walls. J; The house where they keep the King's plate, with the royal ornaments, and the furniture of the royal palace. g, The Kings wardrobe. h, Stables for the elephants. ii, Two houses where the Mandarin5 meet to consult about the affairs of the Kingdom. k, The apartment of the King's physicians. A, The Secretary's office. m, The royal armory. n n, Two ponds for the horses and elephants. o, The royal treasury. P, A large place for running of races. Q, The Seraglio, or apartment of the women. R, The court of the white elephant. S, Gardens. These points show what way the French ambassadors were conducted to audience.

[046]    the Chinese Architecture are adorn'd with many Roofs, and Frontispieces part of which are gilt over. Within the walls of the Palace as well as without, are to be seen long Stables, in which some hundred of Elephants stand in a long row magnificently harnass'd. Since the French troubles, as they are here call'd, there is but one entry left to go into the palace, through which no person is admitted but on foot, though it is so dirty, that people sometimes step in the mud up to the calf of their Legs, if they do not keep an exact ballance in walking over the small planks, that are laid for them; even an ordinary Mandarin dare not enter but attended only with one servant. For this same reason no ships or boats are allow'd to come upon the great river, as far as it runs by the walls of the palace. The gates, and other avenues of the palace are crowded with swarms of naked fellows, whose tawny skin is painted with black checquered figures, pointed in the manner, as they do with the Images at the holy sepulchre at Jerusalem; some of them are thus mark'd only on the arms, but others all over the body to the loyns, which are wrapt up in a cloth according to the general custom of the Natives. They are call'd by a Portu gueze word Braspintades. These are the King's Guards, Door-keepers, and watermen, who wear instead of arms short thick clubs, roving and sauntering about the palace like idle Vagrants. The second palace, call'd the foremost palace, is situated in the North East part of the City towards its extremity. It is of a square figure, but not near so large as the first. It was the ancient place of Residence of the former King's, but at present, in 1690, it is inhabited by the Prince Royal, who is twenty years o f age. The third and last Palace is smaller than any of the two, and situated in the West and least inhabited part of the City. In this lives at present a Prince of the Ro~~-a1 Blood, and it is call'd the Palace of the (Querry of the King's Elephants, the said Prince being the Conductor and Manager of the Elephant, which carries the King. The Prince doth not ride upon the Elephants neck as usu3I,

[047]    but lies upon its Crupper behind the King, from whence he hath a way of governing the beast by certain signs, to which it is used.

After the Palaces I shall take notice of the Temples and Te8Zpgel Schools of this City. They are in great number, for as the whole Country is stock'd with Priests and Monks, this City in particular abounds in all parts with Temples, the Courts of which keep a regular proportion with the Streets, and are full of pyramids and columns of divers shapes and gilt over. They do not equal our churches in bigness, but far exceed them in outward beauty, by reason of the many bended roofs, gilt frontispieces, advanced steps, columns, pilIars, and other ornaments Within they are adorn'd with many images as big as the life and bigger, skilfully formed of a mixture of pIaister rosin, oyI and hair, the outside of which is first varnish' over with black then giIt. They are placed in several rows on an eminence, on which the Altar stands. In some temples also along the walIs in single rows, sitting with their legs cross'd and naked, except the waste, about which iS tied a dark yelIow cIoth; over the left shouIder down to the navel hangs another piece of cloth of the same colour twisted cIose together. Their earlaps are cut through with a slit, and are so Iong, that they reach the shouIders. Their hair iS curl'd, tied over the crown in two knots, so that it cannot be distinguish'd whether it is a cap, or some such ornament. The right hand rests upon the right knee and the left Iies in the lap. The chief place, which is in the middle, is for an Idol of a size far above human, sittinz in the same posture under a Canopy. It represents their c ie eacher, and the Founder of their Religion. The Siamites call him Prah, the Saint, or Prah Pudi Dsiau, the aint of high descent, or with a particular name, Sammona Khodum, which the Peguans pronounce Sammona Khutama, a l\~~lan without passions.' The Japanese and Chinese call him Siaka, or Saka, the Ceylonese Budhum and Budha. Thls Prah, or Khodum is represented in a monstrous size sn some Temples. In a Peguan Temple

together in a House built of Reed. Not far from hence, on the same plain, stands a Jesuit Church nam'd St. Paul, after the chief Church at Goa, belonging to the Fathers of this Order, who through all Asia are better pleas'd to be call'd Paulins from that Church than Jesuits. South West of the City, opposite to that side of    [032]    the River, where it lets out the branch Klang Nam Ja the Metropolitan Bishop Mr. Louis had caus'd a stone Palace to be built, together with a fine Church, which is now lock'd up since his Imprisonment. The Roman Catholick Ecclesiasticks in Siam have assur'd me, that there live above three thousand six hundred Christians in the neighbourhood of Judia, who are past seven years of age, and have been admitted to the Sacrament.

Pyramid@Pkah Thon. See Tab. IV.

I cannot forbear taking notice in a few words of two TJ2ots. remarkable curiosities near Judia. The first is the famous Pyramid Pkah Thon or Puka' thon, which stands on a,, plain one League North West of the City. It was built by the Siamites in remembrance of a great victory obtaind in that place over the King of Pegu, whom they kill'd, and defeated his numerous Army, thereby freeing them- selves of the subjection they were under to the Peguans, and restoring their ancient Liberty. It is a bulky, but magnificent structure, forty odd fathoms high, standing ina square taken in with a low neat walL It consists of two structures which are built one upon the other. The lowermost structure is square, each side being one hundred and fifteen paces long, and rises to the height of twelvc fathoms and upwards. Three corners jet out some few paces on each side, which are continu'd up to the top, and altering its square figure make it appear, as it were, multangular. It consists of four Stories, built one upon the other, the uppermost of which growing narrower leaves at the top of that below it an empty space, or walk to to iiiM round. Every Story hath its Cornishes curiously diversify'd, and all the walks, the lowermost only excepted, are taken in with low neat walls adorn'd in each corner with fine columns. The middlemost corner of each Story represents the frontispiece of the Building. lt exceeds the others in beauty and ornaments, especially in a magnificent gable it ends into. The Stair-case is in the middle of it, which leads up to the upper area on which is built the second structure, and consists of seventy four steps, each nine Inches high, and four paces long. The second structure is built on the upper surface of the first, which is square, each side being thirty six paces long.. It stands out in the middle for ornament's sake, and is taken in like the rest, with a low neat wall. It hath a walk five paces broad to go about the second structure. The Staitcase ends into this walk, each side of its entry being adorn'd with columns. The basis, or pedestal of the second structure is octangular, consisting of eight sides of dierent length, those facing South, East, West and North, being eLeven, but the North East, South East, South West, and North West sides, each twelve paces long. It hath its Cornishes much after the manner of the lowermost structure to the height of some fathoms. It then becomes not unlike a Steeple, on whose top stand several short columns at some distances from each other, the spaces between being left empty. These columns support a pile of globes, which run up tapering, their    [033]    diameters decreasing in proportion to the height. The whole ends into a very long Spire, and withal so sharp, that it is very surprizing, how it could hold out for so considerable a space of time against all the Injuries of wind and weather. (Fig. 13 .) Next to this Pyramid are some Temples and Colleges of the Talapoin3, which are taken in with particular neat brick walls. The Temples are of a very curious Structure, cover'd with several roofs, supported by columns. As to the whole, I must refer the Reader to the annex'd figures, which will give him a much better Idea) than could be expected of the most accurate description.

Berklam's

The other remarkable Curiosity is a double square P7ramidl. joining together, and situate not far from the City towards the East; each square contains several Temples, Convents, Chapels, Columns, Pyramids and other Buildings of diferent forms. They are separated by a Canal, and are each enclos'd with a fine wall. To avoid entring into tedious particulars, I have given the Plan of those'Squares, together with some of the chief buildings, at Iarge. (Figs. I4-23.) In the first Square occurs the Temple of Berklam, as it is call'd, mark'd with Lit. A. from which the whole place hath taken its name, and is become particularly Samous. Its Structure in general is exquisitely fine, but particuIarly the Gate at the great Entry is a piece of admirable workmanship compos'd of carven Images and branched work, or foliage. The Architecture resembles that of the TempIe near Pka'thon, the above describ'd famous Pyramid, both which are represented in Figs. I 5, I 6. The middle of the Temple is for ornament's sake cover'd with four roofs, that are bent, and lie one over another. The lowermost of those roofs jets out on each side of the Temple like a wing which is sum ported by eight columns. The inside is like all other Temples pretty dark, there being no windows, so that all the light can come in only through the door and some holes in the wall. The Porch is rais'd above the ground, and cover'd with several roofs, which are supported b) eight Columns with gilt Capitals standing in two rolvs. The outer row of Columns is join'd together by a red Lettice or Grate, before the frontispiece of the Temple, to preserve the precious doors in it. There are three folding pair of doors in this frontispiece, each pair consisting of two valves, which are very nicely and skilfillly carv'd into three Layers of branches twisted together, and adorn'd with leaves and flowers, among which appear several small Images of their Idols of diSerent forms and postures, some of them having four arms and hands holding divers Weapons and Instruments, the whole well proportion'd and adorn'd with gold and different colours. Next to the Temple stands a small open house mark'd with 8 Lit. a, in the midst of which hangs a bell gilt over; of two yards diameter, which they strlke with a hammer in the mornings and evenings to call the Monks to their prayers and devotions which they perform singing in choirs with a trembling voice, as the Monks in Europe sing Psalms. (Fig. 17.)    [034]     

Lit. B. is another temple like the former, only without so many ornaments. The porch of it consists of two open rooms adorn'd with Plaister-work and gilt smalLl Idols. The Floor was cover'd with heaps of large palm-leaves, being the remains of their Pali, or religious Books, which when they grow old and worn out, are here laid aside in this manner, as in a sacred place. In viewing these Temples I took notice, as of something particular, that I met with no images of beasts, and Idols of a monstrous figure, as the Brahmines and Chinese have in theirs, for all their idols within the Temples are represented in human shape, either sitting, or standing, tho' without them, as for instance on the gates, entries, pyramids, particularly in these two squares, we are now speaking of, appear as by way of ornament many monstrous images, with hideous frightful faces.

Lit. C. is a Pyramid in the form of a steepIe, gilt over from the top to half its height, and standing on a pedestal rais'd above the ground, and taken in with a square walk. The uppermost point is surrounded with a Crown of larze extent turn'd upside down, on which hang small gilt BelSs or Cymbals, which being mov'd by the wind give a sound.

Lit. D, is a small wooden House, in which is kept a very heavy Sedan, painted with divers colours.

Lit. E is a vaulted Chapel with a buIky Idol like that of Bacchus, call'd by the Brahmans Viccaswara. It is much beyond the ordinary size of a man, strongly gilt all over turning with his Face smiling towards the Temple last mention'd. Under and above it and on the sides stood several other smaller Idols, as is represented in Fi . I4 Before it were rails, on which appear'd the marks o: wax Candles, that had been burnt there.

Lit. F. is another building vaulted and Iike the former Within on the middle of the wall was engraven a Figure partly colour'd and partly gilt, in some measure resemblLing a foot with four Toes, three Spans long, and one and a half broad, which they hold as something very sacred. (See Fig. I4.) Under it were plac'd divers small Idols.

The Pyramids standing in those Squares are built in honour of certain Gods, to whom they are dedicated alI(i named after them. They are commonly provided with shelves on which the Devotees place their offerings for the benefit of the priests.

In the other Square (See Fig. I4) within its walls were rang'd Flower-pots and Boxes for plants. There stood Topoo Trtel. also within it several Topoo Trees, in the East Indies call'd Rawasith, and Bipel. This is a sort of a Millc afl; Fig Tree, of the size of a beach, with extended branchi X a smooth grey bark, and round but long pointed leaS bearing a round fruit, which is insipid, and nounshmcu y only .for Bats. All the Pagans of these parts hold it to bc holy, and pleasing to the (:ods, for as much as their great Saint Sammana Khodum always    [035]    chose to sit under it, ad for this reason they love to plant it near their templcS if the Soil and Climate will allow it. The like holin iıı Remarkabk ascrib'd to another Milk or Fig Tree, whose brii FigTree- bending towards the ground take root in it, aftcr ~ touch it, and form as many new Stems by which meg extends it self far round about: It hath leaves not unlike those of the Lauro-Cerasus, but larger and bears a fruit like the other, which bats love to eat. The Ceylonese call it also Budhum Gas, that is Budhum's Tree. But it is difficult to plant and not proper to stand near the temples by reason of its spreading so far. This second square contain'd two remarkable Temples, the first of which represented on each door in the porch two Savages with heads of Devils, (See Fig. I4) and at the back door were painted two Portugueze as big as the Life. A great festival is yearly celebrated in this Temple. There stood besides in this second square some other Chapels with Idols in them, as also divers fine pyramids, some of which are gilt over, and others full of monstrous figures. It would be too tedious to describe each of them in particular, and I think it sufficient to have given the figures of the most remarkable ones in Figs. 17-23.

Before I leave this Subject, I must take notice of a Tree of a strange nature, which one meets with going out of the City towards these two squares, over the Dyke made not long ago for shutting up the Southern arm'of the great River. It is of the size of an Apple tree, has narrow leaves, and long spreading branches, at the extremities and smallest Twigs of which hang BirdZs nests, ingeniously twisted together of dry grass and other stufF in the form of a Purse with a long and narrow neck. The openings of these Nests look to the North-west, so that no South wind, nor rain can come in. I told upwards of fifty of them only on this tree, and never met with the like on any other. The Birds were of a dark yellowish colour, not unlike Canary Birds, and chirping almost like Sparrows, of which otherwise there is a great plenty in this Country. Another extraordinary thing in this Tree is, that the trunk and larger branches of it are filll of crabbed excrescencies, or warts of dilTerent figures, which the Inhabitants make use of as a Medicine against certain distempers.

Religion of the Siamites.

The Religion of these People is the Pagan Doctrine of the Brahmans, which ever since many Centuries hath been profess'd amongst all the Nations from the River Indus to the extremity of the East, except that at the Court of the Grand Mogul, and in his great Cities, as also in Summatra, Java, Celebes, and other neighbouring Islandls the Mahometism has gain'd so much ground, that it seems to prevail above it. This general Paganism, (which is to be distinguish'd from the Religion of the old Persians worshlpping the Sun, now almost extinct) tho' branch'd out into several Sects and Opinions, according to the various Customs, Languages and Interpretations, yet is of one and the same    [036]    Orlgine. The Siamites represent the first Teacher of their Paganism in their Temples, in the figure of a Negro sitting, of a prodigious size, his hair curl'd, the skin black, but as it were out of respect gilt over, accompanied on each side by one of his chief Comtpanions, as also before and round about him by the rest ofhis Apostles and Disciples, all of the same colour and most in the same posture. They believe according to the > Brahmans, that the Deity dwelt in him, which he prov'd - by his Doctrine, Way of Life, and Revelation. For Wistnu, by which they mean the Deity, having already many hundred thousands of years before assum'd diferent fiorms, and visited the World eight different times, appear'd the ninth in the person of tEis Negro, whom for this reason they stile Prahpuditsau, that is to say, the Saint of high descent; Sammana Khutama, the Man without Passions: Prah bin Tsjau, the Saint who is the Lord; or plainly Prah, the Saint, or Budha' (or Phutha} in one syllable, according to their guttural pronunciation, like that of the Hottentots). TEe Ceylanese call him Siaka. Budhum, the Chinese and Japanese Sacka, or Siaka, or plainly Fotoge, that is, the Idol, and with an honourable Epithet Si Tsun, the great Saint.

Where born.

About his origine and native Country, I find the account of those Heathens do not agree. The Siamites call the Country of his nativity Lanca, which is the Island r of Ceylon, from whence they say, their Religion s .9 first brought over to them, and afterwards further propagated through the neighbouring Countries as far as China and Japan. Accordingly there are still to be so ij some foot steps of their Religion, as well of that thich il; they exercis'd before, as of the other sprung up in the. room of it, on the top of a high mountain in the Islmd;' of Ceylon, by the Europeans call'd Pico d'Adam, which they look upon as holy, and in their Maps place it in the Centre of the World. The Ceylonese themselves alI!the Country of his nativity Macca desia, meaning by t~ the Kingdom of Siam, for they make use of the Pali,, ai' Bible of the Siamites, which the Peguans caLl M tapasa, in their Khom, or Language of the Khom<-: owning that they had it from the Siamites. The ChiDati X and Japanese pretend that this Saint, and the Doctrine i reveal'd, had their origine in the Country of Mate;Lt, w as the Japanese call it, Tensik Magatta Kokf, that is dl Heavenlandish Magatta, which according to their de tion and opinion is the Continent of India, including Pegu and Siam, adding withal, that Siaka was the Son of.~ King of those Countries, the Inhabitants of which to each other the origin of their Teacher, a Prophet, as it seems, being always the greater for being of a foreign Country. The Benjans and learned Brahmans believe that Budha hat neither Father nor Mother, and consequently own, they knwo nothing of his birth and native Country. They represent him in the figure af a birth and native Country. They represent him in the figure of a man with four arms, and as for the rest have no other Legends concerning his miracles and actions, besides a tradition of his adorabIe    [037]    piety having now for 26430 years been sitting on a Tarate flower, and praising the supreme God ever since 21639 years (reckoning from the present 1690 year of Christ,) when he first appear'd and reveal'd himself to the world. But the Siamites, and other Nations lying further East, have whole Books full of the birth, Life and miracles of this God Prah, or Siaka ];am at a loss how to reconcile these various and opposite pcounts, which I have gather'd in the abovesaid Countes, unless by supposlng, what I really think to be the true opinion, viz. that the Siamites and otner 1o allons lying more Easterly have confounded a younger Teacher with Budha' and mistaken the former for the latter, which confusion of the Gods and their names is very frequent in the Histories of the Greeks and Egyptians; so that Prah or Siaka, is not the same with Budha, much less with Ram, or Rama, as he is call'd by Father Kircher in his Sins Illustrata, the latter having appear'd many hundred thousand years before, but that he was some new Impostor who set up but about five hundred years before Christ's nativity. Besides this, many circumstances make it Q probable, that the Prah, or Siaka, was no Asiatick, or Indian, but some Egyptian Priest of note, probably of Memphis, and a Moor, who with his Brethren being expell'd their native Country, brought the Egyptian Religion into the Indies, and propagated it there, and this for the following Reasons. I. There appears in several material Points a conformity between this Eastern, and the Ancient Egyptian Paganism; for the Egyptians represented their Gods, as ese Heathens now do, in the form of diferent sorts Of i; t Animals and human Monsters; whereas their Neighbour5 't" in Asia, as for example, the Persians, Chaldeans, and other t: Nations professing the same Religion, worship'd rather c:j;X Luminaries of the Heavens, particularly the Sun, and the Fire, as being its Image; and it is probable, that before, the introduction of the present Paganism among the Indians, they had the same sort of worship with the> neighbouring Chaldeans and Persians. For as it cannot; be suppos'd, that these sensible Nations liv'd without any Religion at all, like the brutal Hottentots, it is ig!au probable, that they rever'd the divine Omnipotencc by. worshiping, according to the Custom of the Chaldans, the Sun, and other Luminaries of the Firmament, as sudi. parts of the Creation, which most strike the outrd senses, and fill the understanding with the admiration of their unconceivable proprieties. And there are still to this day among those Heathens some remains of the Chaldeam Religion, consisting in a worship paid to the Sun and the Stars, which however is not taught by their Priests, but only tolerated like some supererogatory worship, just as remain even in Christian Governments, certain antient pagan customs and superstitions, especially the Bachanals. Two Articles in the Egyptian Reli ion, which were most religiousIy maintain'd, were, the lSransmigra tion of Souls,    [038]    and a Veneration for Cows, particularly for the holy Cow at Memphis, call'd Apis, or Serapis, which had divine honours paid her, and was serv'd by Priests. Both these Articles are still observ'd among the Asiatick Heathens, particularly those that inhabit the West-side of the Ganges; for no body there dares to kill the least and most noxlous Insects, as being animated by some trans migrated human Soul; and the Cows, whose Souls they think are by frequent transmigrations, as it were, deified are serv'd and attended with great veneration, their Dung being burnt to ashes is turn'd into holy Salve, their Urine serves for holy Water, the Image of a Cow possesses a peculiar Chapel before their Temples, is every day honour'd .j with fresh flowers, and hath sweet-scented oyl poured ,4t upon her. It is also remarkable, that the nearer those Heathens are to Egypt, the greater Zeal appears among them with relation to these two Articles, and the more remote they are from it, the more-they abate in it, so that t; in Siam and the more Eastern Kingdoms, even the Priests themselves make no scruple of eating Cows Flesh, pro vided they have not given occasion, nor consented to | their killing; nor doth the opinion of the transmigration ' of the Souis prevail there so much, as it does among the ,1 BenJans in Hindostan, for the Inhabitants of the East-side of the Ganges grant no quarters to Fleas or Flies, that {t;; attack their Skin. I shall barely mention, that among these Asiatick Heathens we meet not only with the greater >. Deltles of the Egyptians, but also with the lesser, tho' - they are disguisee by other names, and fabulous circumstances, which however might be easily clear'd up and reconcil'd.

2. It is observable, that twenty three Centuries ago, or according to the most exact computation in the five hundred and thirty sixth year before Christ's nativitv, Cambyses, the Persian Tyrant, subverted the Religion of the Egyptians, kill'd their Apis, or holy Cow, the Palladium of their Worship, and murder'd, or exil'd their Priests. Now if one considers that the Siamites, reckon ing their Soncarad, or Ecclesiastical Epocha from the death of their great Saint, their 2233-4th year falls in with our present 16goth year after Christ's nativity, it will appear, that the said Epocha agreed with that time, and that it may be concluded from thence, that then a notable Priest of Memphis, to whom they gave the name of Budha, Siaka, or the great Saint, fled with his Brethren into India, where he publish'd his Doctrine, which was so well receiv'd, that it spread to the extremity of the Orient.

3. This Saint being represented with curled Hairs, like a Negro, there is room to conclude, that he was no native of India, but was born under the hot Climate of Africa, considering that the Air in India produces on its blLC.k Inhabitants none of that curl'd Wool, but long and black Hair, quite lank, and very little curl'd: And tho' the Siamites crop theirs, so as to leave it only of the length of a Finger; yet as it stands on end like bristles, it is easily distinguish'd from the woolly    [039]    Curls of a Negro, and conseguently it is more probable, that Budha was of African, than of Siamite extraction.

The Siamites in general are a plain and good natured of Siam. people. Their Ecclesiasticks lead a sedate and austere life; for they aim at a state of perfection in this World, acceptable to Heaven and attended with eternal rewards, by subduing their passions, and mortifying their desires, pursuant to the doctrine and example of their great Master. They never marry, as long as they continue in an Ecclesiastical state, but live together in Convents near the Temples. They go almost naked, having only a cloth, or apron, of a dark yellow colour tied about their waste, and another piece of cloth hanging down from the left shoulder in narrow pleats, which in bad rainy weather they open and spread over their shoulders, and the upper part of the body. Their heads are never cover'd but are shav'd close; in their hands they carry a Fan made of Palmleaves, or shavings of wood. There are diferent ranks and degrees among them. (I) The youngest call themselves Dsiaunces, or Friars and students of divinity, who after having attain'd the twentieth year of their age, and undergone a rigorous Examen, are advanced to the dignity of Dsiaukus, or Fathers, on which occasion there is a great entertainment given. The Peguans call them Talapoi, which name becoming first known to foreigners, they now bestow it indifferently on all the Priests and Ecclesiasticks of the Symbolic Religion in Pegu, Siam, Cambodia, Aracau, Parma, Laos, Tunkin, and Cochintsina. (2) Dsiauku are the common Priests or Fathers, who live together in Societies inhabiting one, or more, buildings like Convents near certain Temples. Each such Convent is governed by (3) a Prior, whom they call Luangwad that is to say, the Head of the Temple, or Sompan, the Noble. A11 the Convents in each province depend on one (4) Prahkhru, like a Bishop, or Metropolitan. These again as well as all the rest of the Clergy in the Kingdom are under the (5) Prah Sankara, as it were the Primate and High Priest. He lives in the Capital, and the King's residence Judia, and his authority is such, that even the King himself is obliged to bow to him. These Ecclesiasticks are not of a particular race, like the Brahmans, but every body, who hath a mind for it, and can obtain it, may turn Monk, and even married men may leave their Wives, and go to live in the Convent. The Ecclesiasticks as such, and as long as they continue in orders, cannot be punish'd by the secular arm for any oSence whatsoever. For this reason they are first degraded, andL stript of their Ecclesiastical habit, before they are deliver'd up to Justice However out of respect to the Character they bore, they are treated with much less Severity, than secular persons. And even sometimes for capital crimes the King will only banish them to an uninhabited Island, call'd Coccatsian, where he also confines his Mandarines and Ministers of state, if they fall in disgrace. There are also Nuns among    [040]    them, whom they call Nanktsij, or Bagins, who wear such pieces of cloth like the Monks, but of a white colour instead of yellow. These Nuns in former times liv'd among the Priests near the Temples, but it having happen'd at a place a league above Judia, where the religious of both sexes liv'd promiscuously together in the same village, that several of the Nuns prov'd with Child, they have since been remov'd from the Temples to particular Houses, the better to keep their Vow of Chastity. The Temple of that Place still bears the Name of Wad Nantsij, or the Temple of Nuns.

The Siamites begin their Soncarad, or Epocha, from the death of their great God Sammona Khutama, otherwise call'd Prah, and Budha'. In the year 1690, when I~was in Siam, they told 2234. They have like the Chinese a Cyclus of sixty years, tho' there be but twelve years that bear particular Names, which being five times repeated make up the whole Cyclus. For the satisfaction of the curious Reader, I will insert the Names of the twelve Years, as also the Names of their Months, and of the Days of the Week, as they were communicated to me in the Country. The Years are, s

I Pije Tsoelat, The Mouse-year.

2. Pije Tsaloe, or Tslu, or Tsialou, The Cow-year.

3. Pije Kaen, The Tyger-year.

4. Pije To, or Tao, The Hare's-year.

5. Pije Marong, or Maroni, The Year of the great Serpent.

6. Pije Maceng, or Maseeng, The Year of the stnall Serpent.

7. Pije Mamia, The Horse-year. :

8. Pije Mame, or Mamij, The Ram's-year.

9. Pije Wock, or Wook, or Woak, The Monkey's year.

10. Pije-erka, The Chicken's-year 1690.

11. PiJe Tso, or Tsjoo, or Tgio, The Dog-year.

12. PiJe koen, The Swine-year.

It appears by this List of the twelve Years, that Pije signifies a Year in general. The Year is divided into twelve lMonths, which are Lunar, of twenty nine, and thirty Days, alternatively. Every third Year they tell thirteen Months, one of the twelve being repeated twice. The general name of the Month is Duan, to which word is added the number, as they follow one another, for the names of particular Months as for instance, I)suan Aey, the first Month, Dsuan Gie, or Dzi, the second Month, and so on, Saem, for the third, Sie, for the fourth, Ha, for the fifth Hook? for the sixth, Tset, or Tsiet for the seventh, Pet, or PelJt, for the eighth, which is told twice every third Year, Cau, or Knau for the ninth, Sieb, or Sib, for the tenth, Siebeet, for the eleventh, and Sieb Song for the twelfth. The first Month is of nine and twenty Days, the second of thirty, the third again of twenty nine, and so they go    [041]    on alternatively, so that the whole year is of 354 days, and every third year of 384. They tell the days of the month from the new-moon to the full moon fifiteen days, then they begin again at one, and so go on to the next new-moon. This is the reason, why some of their months are of thirty, others of twenty nine days. Their week consists of seven days, which put in paralIel with ours are as follows.

Sunday, is by them call'd, Wan Alit, the I)ay of the Sun .

Monday@@@@@@@@@@@ Wan Tsan, the Day of the Moon.

Tuesday@@@@@@@@@@@ Wan Angkaen, theDayofworking

Wednesday@@@@@@@@@ Wan Poeth, the Day of meeting

Thursday@@@@@@@@@@ Wan Prahat, the Hand day.

Friday@@@@@@@@@@@@ Wan Sock, the day of rest.

Saturday@@@@@@@@@@@ Wan Sauw, the attracting day, or day of attraction, because it attracts a new week.

The Siamites celebrate the first and fifteenth day of . every month, being the days of the new and full moon. Some also go to the Pagods every first day of the quarter, which in some measure answers to our Sunday. They have besides several yearly solemn festivals, as for instance, one at the beginning of the year, call'd Sonkraen, another call'd Kitimbac, or Ktimbac, that is to say, the procession by Land, on which, as I have been inform'd, the King goes to make his offering at a famous Temple at Napathat, in a Siamish Coach, drawn by men; another call'd Ktinam when the King attended with a magnificent train goes by water to make his devotions and offerings at a stately temple call'd Banihin, situated belLow Judia, and according to the opinion of the common people to cut the waters, which about the time of this solemnity are highest, alld to . command them to withdraw. Two others of the yearly festivals of the Siamites are known by the name of Sahut sioian, which is as much as to say, the festival of the washing of the Elephants, the Heads of these animais being on these two days wash'd with great Ceremonies.The beginning of the festival days in general is byoche Siamites call'd Kaupasa, and the end thereof Oppasa.

It remains that I should say something of the current money of the Kingdom of Siam. Tsiani, by foreigners w call'd Katti, is understood of Silver, being two pound and a a half, or twenty Thails, or fifty Rixdollars, that is, double the value of a Katti, as it is current at Batavia and in Japan. The Thail is by the Siamites call'd Tamluni - though there are none coin'd in the Kingdom. It is worth four Tikals. A Tikal by the Siamites call'd Baat is worth four Maas, or thirty Dutch Stievers. Every Maas, or as the Siamites call it Slini, or Sling, hath two Fuangs. Every Fuang, (the Siamites pronounce it Phuani, or Pujang? hath two Siampais. A Siampai, or Sapai, hath two Pulninis. A    [042]    Pynini contains an uncertain number of Bijas, by us call'd Cowers, being a small white, or yellowish Shell of the Concht Veneris kind, which I have describ'd in its proper place. The Cowers difer very much in value; One may buy for a Phuang from 500 to 800. They are imported in great quantities from the Maldive Islands. All the Silver money of Siam is coin'd of D utch Crowns, which are for this purpose coin'd in Holland, and imported by the D utch East India Company at seven shillings the Crown.

 

[73]

Chap. lll. The Author's departure from Judia, down the River Meitlam to the harbour, and from thence to Japan.

ON the fourth of July 1690 towards Evening, I went with the Captain of the Ship and others of the Company in a boat, in order to fall down the River Meinam to the Ship, which lay at anchor two days Journey from hence, and four Leagues from the mouth of the River. Having made two Leagues we arriv'd at the famous temple BanihiJn, by Foreigners caU'd the Golden Pagod. Every BanihiCn a year, when the water is highest, the King goes thither with Pagod great pomp and a numerous attendance to perform his devotion, and to make his oSerings to the Priests. The common people call this Solemnity Ktinam, that is to say, the Cutting of the water, from an erroneous tradition they have, that the King on that occasion cuts the Water with a knife in order to make it fall. It may be, that this custom obtain'd in ancient times, but at present there is nothing extraordinary in this Ceremony, besides the magnitlcence of the procession, which is made by water.

On the fifth of July we proceeded but slowly by reason of the contrary wind, which gave me frequent opportunitles of going on shore and gathering simples r found there.

On the sixth of July we arriv'd at Bankok in the Bankok morning, having advanced but little all night, by reason of the difficulties we had to struggle with. We found the old Fort, which lies on an Island, in good condition; but the new Fort, that had been built by the French on the East shore, was quite demolish'd. lSefore evening we reach'd the Dutch Habitation and Store-house called Amsterdam, which is but two Leagues distant from the Sea. It is built according to the fashion of the Countrey on piles of Bambous. Stores of Deer and Buffle skins, were kept in lofts, but tlle red Wood for dying, call'd Faang, or as the Japonese name it Tsiampan, lies in an open place, till Ships come to take it in, which happens every year, and the greater part of it is    [043]    carried to Japan. It comes from the Land of Coy, or Kui, belonging to the fq King of Siam, and some also from Bambilisoi, situate on the Coasts of Cambodia, and from Bimen, as the Dutch + X call it, which lies between Bali and Timor. This ~rood rubb'd with some lime and water yields the finest violet colour, one could wish to see. This mixture is said to 0 cure some eruptions on the skin. The Governor of this; place was a Corporal, a Swede by Birth, and Core lDy namcb I found him under some grief, for having lost a tame Sun ~' Cat, which he found again to day, but in the belly of a; snake he had kill'd, and which, as he complain'd had robb'd X him before of many of his Hens, having l~een alwa~st lurking in Corners, under the Houses. We had 3n , accident with another sort of a thief, who at night had G under the House, where seven of us Fellow TravellersEy together. He had laid hold of the Corner of a wastecoat, hanging through a crevice of the Floor, which was made of split Bamboous, and was pulling it through with such a force, that one of us awaked, who suspecting a thief seiz'd it, and called to his sleeping Companions for help. While ] they were thus pulling and hawling, who should havc it, Core, who from former experience immediately suspectod;^: Tyger, fired a Gun, and frightened him away.

MeNam, or Meinam in the Siamite Language signiScs

Mother of humidities, which name hath been given to is River by reason of the abundance of its water, which renders the whole Country fruitful. For it is the only River in it, very deep, rapid, fuH of water, and broader than the Elbe; but below Judia, down to the Sea, it divides it self into several branches. The account, which the Natives give of its source, differs from what is represented in our maps; for they say, that it takes its rise like the Ganges of Bengale in the high mountains of Imaas, where it spreads it self into several arms, which run through Cambodia, Siam, and Pegu into the Sea; and they pretend, that these arms are again joyn'd by several smaller branches, not only with each other, but also with the Ganges it self, if they are not rather to be look'd upon altogether, as so many branches deriving from that very River. If it was not fior the vast pains it would require to trace out its several Channels, through the Forests and Desarts, and to open a navigation, it might perhaps be made possible for Vessels to go from hence into Bengale. I will not stand to the truth of this account; but as for what relates to the description of the River from Judia to the Sea, and the draught I have given of it, this wants no support; forasmuch as I have had sufficient opportunity, and leisure, to observe it myself in sailing up and down. In the Draught, which I here present to the Reader, (Fig. 24) I have mark'd the natural course of it, with its several turnings measured with a large Compass its several branches, both where they separate and joyn again, the situation of its banks, and adjoyning forests, vlllages,    [044]    temples, and the new Forts lately rais'd in order to prevent the escape of the French General and his Soldiers.

Several remarkable particulars are to be observ'd in this River. I. It overflows its branches like the Nile in Egypt, tho' at contrary times, and by setting the Country under water, renders it fruitful. This overflowing begins with the Month of September or sooner, when the Sun entring the Tropick of Cancer, by its approach dissolves the Snow on the high Mountains to the North. To this also contributes not a little the rainy Season, which faLls in with that time, and is observ'd in all Coulltries situate between the two Tropicks, when the Sun passes over the Heads of their Inhabitants. A most remarkable Instance of the Wisdom and Goodness of the Omnipotent Creator. In December the Waters begin to fall by degrees, and at last confine themselves to their former Channel.

2. Tho' the Water in the Earth appears upon digging the Ground to be regularly level with the River-water, yet it is observ'd to rise sooner, and to flow over the Surface of the Land, even before the River begins to swell, or can let any Water run over the Banks into the flat Country.

3. All the Water that appears upon digging the Ground hath a nitrous, not a salt, taste all over the Country, and is consequently not fit for drinking, whereas the Riverwater, tho' muddy, yet is always sweet, fit for drinking and i wholesome.

4. Whereas all Waters naturally run towards the Sea, as lying lowest, with respect to the Land, yet it is observ'd, that this Inundation does not so much aSect the Country near the Sea-shore, as it does the upper and middle Partse of the Kingdom. .;

5. The Waters by overflowing the Fields that are sozvn, make the Rice grow so quickly, that the Stalks grow as ist as the Water rlses, and the Ears keep above the SurfnxJ 2 which when ripe, are cut off by the Reapers in BoatsX X and gather'd, but the Straw, which often is of an incredibIe length, is left in the Water. S

6. When the Waters fall and return to their former: Channel, which happens about the beginning of the North Season, as it is call'd, when the Northerly Winds drive •be; Water down, and forward its running of, they are appre~~ hensive, that a great mortality will ensue among Men and- i Cattle, to avert which Calamity a solemn Festival is kept F throughout the whole Country, in order to appease tSc destroying Spirits, which remain after the Water is run i of. The Ceremonies are lighting paper Lanthorns near ,0 the chief Temples, in the King's Palace, and the Houscs of Persons of Distinction and the Priests singing ~~;jl!

Offices or Prayers in their Convents. Our Europeans have observed, that if the Northerly Winds, which commonly blow very strong at that time, are not high enough to push the Water forward, and that consequentl) it goes off but slowly, there appears a slime left on    [045]    the ground, the putrefaction and ill smell of which is not unlike to be the occasion of the said mortality.

The banks of this river are low, and for the greater part marshy, yet reckoning from Judia to Bankok, which makes at least three parts in four of the way to the Seashore, they are pretty well inhabited. Along them appear many villages, the houses of which are rais'd on piles, but buill of poor slight stuS, and sometimes fine Temples and Habitations of the priests, with abundance of Trees some bearing fruit, some not. But from Bankok to the Harboul there is nothing but Forests, Desarts and Morasses; anc every where there is plenty of Bambous, and Gabbe Gabbe (a Shrub with leaves like those of the Palm Tree' furnishing the Inhabitants with materials to make Houses Hedges and Roofs.

Three sorts of animals afford much diversion to Travellers sailing on this River. First are to incredible numbers of Monkey's of a blackish Colour some of which are of a very large size, and some less oi the common sort, and a grey colour, which walk abou tame, and as it were for pleasure sake along the shore, ol climb up the Trees, but towards evening perch themselve upon the highest Trees on the shore in great numbers lilct Crows. The she ones hold their young so fast on theu breasts, that they would not let them go, even when theJ were shot down. They are fond of this part of thl Country on accounttof finding their food there on large Milk Trees, call'd Tjaak, growing there in great plenq with light green leaves of an oval shape, and a fruit no unlike our AppIes as to their bigness and form, excepl that they seem compress'd, and are of a very harsh taste.

The Glowworms (Cicindel~~) represent another shew, which settle on some Trees, like a fiery cloud, with this surprizing circumstance, that a whole swarm of these Insects, having1690. taken possession of one Tree, and spread themselves over its branches, sometimes hide their Light aM at once, and a moment after make it appear again with the utmost reguIarity and exactness, as if they were in a perpetual Systole and Diastole. What is remarkable in the third place, are the common Gnats, or Flies, which in the day Gnat ~~ry time appear but sparingly upon the water, but at night in troublelome to such swarms like Bees, that it is diflicult to guard against Trnatllorf. them. There is a sort like these in Russia, with which Travellors are pester'd, but they are smaller, have a less sting, and consequently do not hurt so much. This Vermin renders this Journey by water, which would be otherwise pleasant enough, very troublesome and disagreeable.

On the Seventh of JuIy, being Friday, at break of day we left the River and the Land, and with a favourable North-wind arriv'd at eight of the clock on board our Ship, which Iay at anchor four Leagues from the mouth of the River in six fathom of water. This harbour, or road is the end of a bay between the Countries of Cambodia and Siam:    [046]    It hath a soft c}ay at the bottom, and its depth iS about five or Six fathoms more or less. Yonks and Ships unladen may by the help of the tide come up as far as Bankok. There lay several Yonks, or Chinese Merchantships near the mouth of the River, where several marks were set up to avoid the shallows. Besides these there were several Fisher-boats, the Fisher-men catching thereabouts great numbers of Fish, particularIy Rays, of whose skin the Japonese make the finest sort of work. The Fisher-men use also to fix pales in shallow grounds, where the fresh water mixes with the salt, or Sea-water, which they take away again the next day, when it ebbs, with so many shelJs sticking to it, as fifty peopIe are abIe to eat. Being come on board we found the Ships Company, Ofiicers as well as common Sailors, very much divided with mutual jealousies, which disorder increas'd by their excessive drinking of Lau, a sort of Brandy made in the Country. The Captain, a civil and good natur'd Man, (a Character, which is very rare amonc the Dutch Seamen,) forthwith took care to set them to rights, by laying some of them in irons, and prepar'd to set~ saiJ the next day.

On the 8th of July, when we were busy with lading the last part of our Cargo of Hides, there came tlso Officers of the Dutch Factory at Judia on board to review our Ships Company according to Custom. The wind blowing at South West from Shore, they left us on the I Ith, and return'd to the Shore in their boat, being saluted by us, with a treble discharge of five Guns. With the said Wind we steer'd South East, in order to get upon the Main, and to make use there of the Southern Tradewind, with which we were to steer North North-Esst along the Coasts of Cambodia, Cotsijnsina, and China towards the Harbours of Japan. The Reader will obsers e that in these Eastern Parts from Malacca to Tapan, therc are Winds constantly blowing South and South West for four months together, which time is call'd the South or West Season, or Monsoon, then again North and North East for four other months, which is call'd the North or 0 East Season, or Monsoon. Between these two Seasons there are two months, during which the wind is alwayS variable, shifting from one of the said quarters, till atr; Iength it settles in that, which is opposite. It happens 0 however in some years, that, to the great disappointment of sea-faring people, these trade-winds fix sooner or later t than ordinary, by some weeks. These Seasons obtainl} t also in other parts of the Indies, with this diference only, that according to the situation of the Countries, the Shores and the Seas, the winds blow more or less constant from i East or West, for which reason those months are calI'd the East or West Monsoons. By these Monsoons alI f navigation in the Indies and Asia must be directed. At this time the South West Season held on, under favour f of which we reckon'd to steer our course, as soon as we F should have got out of this Gulf or- Bay. And so we weigh'd both our    [047]    anchors full of good hopes, in which however we soon found ourselves disappointed, the vFind coming about South, and contrary to our course, so that wlth tacking about, lying still, weighing and casting anchor, the weather being variable, and sometimes very rough, we lost many days, advancing but little all the while. I shall avoid tiring the Reader with a tedious account of the diferent winds and weather, and other minute particulars of our navigation, as I set them down in my Journal and Map; and therefore I wiLI give only the main substance in as few words as possible

On the 23rd of July, being Sunday, we left the coasts DrSatttgrt of Siam, and the mountains of Kui, and sail'd over this from SiamGulf, steering South East. Qn the 26th we saw a lon and Iow Island Pulipanjang, bearing E. N. E. at some few Pulipaninng. leagues distance, along which we steer'd our course. Qn the 27th we made the IsIand Puli ubi, which appear'd to Pgli #bi. be compos'd of high mountains, and several small Islands. We lett it on our Larboard-side about four Leagues of. On the 28th of July we saw the large IsIand Puli Condor Pali-~~orMor. a-head. It belongs, as welI as the former, to the King of Cambodia, and is uninhabited, but provided with a good harbour and fresh water. We sail'd by it, leaving it on our Starboard-side, about three Leagues ofF, and soon after discover'd a-head us to the Larboard two Rocks, between which we steer'd North East, the wind continuing till then at South West. The 2gth in the morning we perceiv'd that the current from the River of Cambodia had carried us too far out of sight of Land, which endeavouring to regain, by keeping to the North, we found to be Tsiampa. We bore away so violently with Tliampa the current towards N. N. E. that considering the uncertainty of depths in those parts, tho' it brought us very much forward, we resolv'd to drop, and accordingIy came to an anchor, as soon as we found ground, and lay there that night. On the 3ISt~~ we had at two or three Leagues on one side, a very high and formidabIe wall, which on the first and second of August became a little lower, [082-084] and at noon near a famous Sandbank, along which the Ships coming from China and Japan sail towards Batavia. We met here a great number of Chinese fisher-boats and the men fishing, and at a farther distance I counted thirt) four sail of them. A little before we were boarded by a Prawe, sent from a Chinese Yonk, which ofFer'd us a parcel of Tobacco to sell. This evening we alter'd our

course to avoid South Lamos, which we guess'd to be near, being two or three low Rocks mark'd in the Maps at 23o. IOt. On the 13th of August, being Sunday we discover'd the said Rocks, at a small Leagues distance from us to the lar-board, and steer'd by with the help of the current, Sea and Air being calm. In the evening we saw other such Rocks on the same side, which xve weather'd in the like manner, and then steer'd N. E. by E. r mention those Islands and Rocks, in order to make the Reader sensible of the danger of our Voyage, particuldy in the night time, and in storms, and that our slow progress, and the changing of our course so often proceeded only from caution. On the I4th of August, four fishermen came contrary to what they use to do, with Hayes and Beggers on board of us: The goods they had tonSer us, being of no value, we bought none but dismiss'd them, after having given each a glass of Brandy for their trouble. This civility invited others to us, of whom we took some of their Fish, for which they refils'd to take Rice, or Linnen, and rather took Brandy and Pepper, which made us conclude, that they are not necessitous. They carried Watermelons with them against thirst. Their dress was, Straw-hats, and dark brown Gowns coming down to the knees, and tied with a sash. They play'd strange gambols, and made a noisy chattering Iike the Malabarians. The altitude was this day 23o. 58'. in a place marked in the Maps at 24o. IOt. We steer'd N. E. and N. by E. under favour of the current, the weather being almost calm. The Coasts were Iow with a few Hills. This evening we found our selves over against the River Ksiansio. On the 15th of August things continu'dL the same, and the Coasts a pear'd like the daybefore. Before Sun-set a Chinese Istand appear'd in view, which the following morning being the 16th of August we had left behind us, and so we bicl farewell to the Coasts of China, and steer'd with the same weather and course through the main towards Japan. About sloon we were at the height of 25o. 56'. on the 17th at 27o. 131. On the 18th, 28o. 15/. This Day after morning prayers the wind ceas'd entirely, but a little after we had a small breeze from N. by E. and N. N. E. The following days to the 25th of August, the weather varied continually, there being sometimes high, sometimes but little wind, sometimes it was calm, and all for the greatest part .~on trary to our Voyage, so that it seem'd the North East Monsoon was setting in earIier than usual. So we were oblig'd to tack about with great trouble, and such loss of time, that what we gain'd one day, we almost Iost again another, as wi11 appear by the diferent heights we took then, which were on the Igth of August 28o. 2'. on the 20th 28o. 42'. on the alst 28o. 52'. on the 22d 29o. It. On the 23d. 29o. a3t. on the 24th none, on the 2sth, ago. 34'. During those days nothing remarkabIe occurred, except that about the 27th degree I observ'd a yellowish green substance floating on the surface of the Greea Sub Sea, which appear'd for two days, the depth being fifty ItanrcJqoating fathoms, and the ground being a sandy clay with Sea- on thtSea. weed. There came also for several days some Birds of a StrargcSirdl. black colour, which perch'd on divers parts of the Ship, and suffer'd themselves to be taken with the hand. One day a Woodcock was found among them. This day we had a dead calm and excessive hot weather. Towards evening a violent contrary Wind rose out of E. N. E. which oblig'd us to steer Southward, and pass a very troublesome night. On the 26th of August the storm RtmarkabSe increas'd with thunder and lightning. Having met with StoZm. shallows at thirty two fathom, we took to the other side to S. E. and S. E. by E. On the a7th of August being Sunday, the storm continu'd out of N. E. by E. We [086-082] representing a bare, unfruitfill and rough aspect, which drew off sometimes to the N. E. sometimes to the N. We pursu'd our course adong it, having no soundinfJ, with a gentle wind and fair weather, in the evening lse Cambir found our selves a little beyond the Islands Puli Cambir Xrra-de Terrs, at the end of the Country of Tsiampa, and at the side of the Kingdom of Cotsin Tsina, which we coasted along. On the fourth of August we came in taon.sight of the Island Cantaon, which we left behind us in the afternoon. On the fifth we steer'd N. N. E. with a S. and E. S. E. wind, to cross the Bay of Tunquin. On the sixth of August, the weather being calm, our Ships Company took that opportunity of fishing, in which they met with good success. One with his hook, on which there was Sut a glittering piece of tin instead of a bait, 1tt observa- catch'd two Sharks, (Hayes, or Tuberones) of a midling i s madc ott size, and soon after one another, which by the help of z: 4,tl.line    [048]    tied about their bodies were pull'd into the Ship. This sort of Fish is very frequent in all the Seas of the; Indies: Its full length is ten or twelve foot, and its flesh hard, and unpleasant of taste. It is reckon'd the fiercest of all Sea animals, and a great enemy to mankind,"against which sailors are oblig'd to be very much upon thei r guard, when they go a bathing. This is the reason, why; Athenzus calls it Anthropophagos, or the Man-eater. He hath a wide mouth, not in the foremost part of the head, but a little lower, for which reason he is obliged; to turn upon the back, when he takes in food Som above. Three things appear'd to me remarkable in them.

I. A strange small Fish sticking to one's side, and hold-: ing the desh so fast with its mouth, that it required sorne strength to pull it off; this little Fish the Seamen calI Sucker. 2. There was in one's belly six young ones alive, each one span and half long. It is said, that thesc young ones creep in andL out of the old one's belly, before they grow bigger. I was not able to examine into the possibility and truth of this assertion, the sailors cutting and mangling it too s3uickly, and hurrying it to the kitchen. 3. In the back part of the head of those two Fishes next to the head there lay a good quantity of a white substance Iike Crabs-eyes wrapt up in a thin membrane, which they carefillly preserv'd, as an approv'd remedy against the stone and hard labour in women.

Soon after was catch'd by another, a very fine Sea-star with nine rays, which being not unlike that we catch' upon the coasts of Malacca, in our voyage from Batavia to Siam, and which I have given an account of in my Journal of that voyage, I need not repeat the description here.

But I must not forget to take notice in this place, that this and the preceeding days we met with great numbers of certain Sea-animals, which we might justly calI Icthyo thuria, or fishy Quaims, because they are something like fish, and also serve for food for men. The Dutch call them Sea Cats, after the name which is given them in the Sta {atl. Country Language, which implies as much The fore part resembles a Polypus marinus, provided as it were with snouts, about nine in number of diferent Iength. The belly 1S quite empty, open above, and may be blown up; the flesh is transparent without bones or nerves. If I remember right, Bontius gives the figure and descrip t on of them, to which I refer, adding only, that between the jaws the mouth is cover'd with a membrane, under which are two black, thick and crooked teeth, one above the other, strong enough to break the hardest object.

August 7th, Having hitherto sail'd to the North East with a South, and South West gale, without seeing any Land, we began to take the height of the pole, as often as we were not hinder'd by the cIouds, which on the eighth of August we found to be Igo, 2rt, on the tenth 2I X 4. On the rIth, 22o, 131. When we had taken this latter height we discovered a-head of us some of the mountalns of Fokien, a    [049]    Province of China. On the 12th Fokitn of August in the morning we found our selves two leagues of the coasts of China, where the said mountains end, [084-86]

found thirty six fathom depth, and steer'd to the other side to E. S. E. We took the height of the Sun at noon and by it found our selves at 29o. 50'. This evening at nine of the clock, a Chinese Jonk, with all her sails crowded and fuH before the wind, rush'd by our board to put into some harbour. The Seamen on this coast have certain marks, by which they foresee an impending storm, and retire in time to the nearest harbour they can make. On the 28th of August the storm increas'd with such vehemence that before evening we were necessitated to tie our rudder fast, to bring to the main sheet and mizzen, and to let the ship drive. Some Caian, (Indian Vetches) and Rice boil'd in Water were set down upon deck for our dinner, but the tossings of the Ship were so violent, that only two of the Sailors, who held the porringer, were able to snatch and swallow some of it, but the rest had enough to do, to creep of on all four to save our bodies. This evening we found fifty six fathom depth. On the 2gth; of August, the wind having turn'd that night to a perfec t and filrious storm, the tossing became intolerable, so that there was no standing any more upon one's legs. ~~YVc endeavour'd to make use of the rudder, but night 0 approaching soon oblig'd us to tie it fast again; but we were not much the better for it, the bulky waves beating with such force against the Ship, that even before day break we were fain to take our sails in again, which began~~ to be tore in pieces, to keep the rudder tied up, and to leave our Ship to the mercy of the two raging Elementsw:; The sails were contrary to expectation brought in, taking a Iucky opportunity for it. But the storm and impetuosity of the waves still increas'd more and more, so tbat every thing was like to be broke to    [051]    pieces. The Cramp~~ Irons, and ropes with which the Chests were fastensd, breaking, the goods were thrown from one side of the Ship to the other. It was resolved to bring to the mizzen,^> but when the sailors were about it, the wind laid hold of t it, and tore it to pieces. What made our condition the more lamentable was the darkness of the air, which besides

[087]

was fuIl of water, which to me seem'd to proceed from some other cause, than only the rain, and the breaking of the waves, which the wind mix'd with the air. Bre could not see each other at half the Ships length, and the confused noise of the wind, the Sea, and the Ship made it impossibIe to understand one another. The waves cover'd us like so many mountains, they beat the Doors open without intermission, and the water run over Decl; into the Cabin in such quantity, that all was fill'd with it; besides the Ship began to be leaky, so that we were obliged to throw the water out with pails, and to add to the pump, which was continually playing, a second one. Durmg this noise we heard a continual thumping at the stern of the Ship, as if aL was to be stav'd to pieces: We had no opportunity to find out the cause of it till in the afternoon, when the storm shifted to the East, and then we saw, that the hinges of the Rudder were broke) the Cramp Iron pull'd out, and the Rudder draggling after. This misfortune augmented the danger we were in, and though we endeavour'd, as well as we were able, to fasten the Rudder to its Chains, yet the thumping continued with such force, that we had reason to apprehend, that in a few hours the Ship would be broke to pieces and sunk. All the while we were driving back to the S. W. and W. S. W. towards the fatal Islands of China, a new formidabIe appearance of danger, which was still heigthen'd by the great confusion of our Men, who would not hearken to the command of their Officers, who were as much disorder'd by strong Liquors as they themselves; For as no drinking water could be got out of the hold, and all their food was but some boil'd rice, they were obliged to keep up their spirits with Arrack and Brandy, which at last so disorder'd them, that any sober man would tremble at the complication of so many dangers. To compleat all, dreadfuz night came on, which however seem'd to be so far more comfortable than the day-light, as it was to hide from our Eyes the Horrours of our impending destruction. The most important point

[088]    was to save the Ship from the terrible blows she receiv'cl by the Rudder, every time it was lifted up by a swelling wave, in order to which either the Rudder was to be disengaged and taken in> or some other method to be tried; accordingly the Ship's Carpenter with his assistants went into the Cabin, provided with leavers, hatches, ropes, and other tools. They loosen'd tables and seats, broke through the hatches in the floor into the room under it, and being-tied with ropes were let out through the Cabin windows. But all their pains for mending the Rudder were in vain, it was    [052]    impossible for them to resist the force : of the many raging waves, and they were necessitated to desist, and to save themselves, being throughly soak'd.; Upon deck they were in the mean time busy with hoisting < another mizzen which they had been mending and preparing all day long, and this they were obliged to venture, or to lose all their masts in the night time by the encreasing shocks. The Captain, having watch'd a proper opportunity, gave a Signal, and it was hoisted with good success almost in a moment. It was already three hours t, after Sunset, and all that could be done that nigli., was to pump on and hope the best. On the 30th of August : early in the morning the storm began to abate and the ; waves to subside, whereupon immediately the sprit-sail : 0 was brought to serve instead of a Rudder, with the help of which we sail'd Southward before the wind, and consequently without being much toss'd, which put our Carpenters in a condition of repairing the Rudder, the 0 master Carpenter being let down on a Rope fix'd a new beam to the Rudder, and in short the whole business was 0 finish'd about noon, when the sky clearing up, the Cook was able to make a fire, and the sailors took the height and found it 28o 3Ir so we hoisted sail again, and with a fair wind steer'd N. E.

On the thirty first of August, having thus escap'd this danger, we were comforted at break of day, by the bright appearance of the Sun, though the wind still continued to blow very hard, and being after five days fasting ver~~r; hungry, and quite dispirited by the great fatigue, we were in expectation of refreshing ourselves with a hearty meal and good drink, but our sottish steward, who seldom was sober when on shore, and always drunk when on board, had drank all our wine to the last drop, a fat Hog and all our poultry had died of the bad weather, and the Cook had nothing to give us, but boil'd rice, Cajan, or Pigeon pease, and old Bacon, on which we feasted for want of better dainties in expectation of catching some fresh fish in the next c;alm. The first and most laborious of this days work was to strain the shrewds, which were so slacken'd by the continual tossing in the late storm, that they were not able to hold up the masts; mean time others were busy to find out the leaks of the ship, though without discovering any as yet. Some Bales of silk, and hides, that had been wetted, were brought upon Deck to dry, as were also our cloaths and bedding, which business took up the two following days. Our Course was to the N. E. and N. N. E. the wind being East, and East by North. The height at 29o 20' and the depth in the evening 43 fathom. On the first of September a leak was discover'd under the kitchen, to stop which the Ship was for some hours leaned on one side. There were still more leaks, which obliged us still to pump every Hour, but we could not find them out and judged that they were above water. I W1~~ not detain the Reader with a long account of the winds, but only tell in general, that they continued all along    [053]    varsable, for the greater part contrary, sometimes a little favourable, which oblig'd us to sail very much by the wind, (as the Sea term is) and tack about. At noon we found 30o. 9'. of altitude, and in the evening a3 fathom depth. On the second of September we had 30o. aot. of altitude, depth go fathom. On the third of September being Sunday, the altitude was 3 10. I 6'. depth 26 fathom. On the fourth of September, the weather being stormy, no altitude could be taken. We had from 25 to 32 fathom depth, the ground yielding all day long a white sand. On the fifth of September at noon, the

[090]    altitude was 3I. 15/. the depth in the evening 26 fathom. This evening several Sea-devils, or Rays, pass'd by our Ship, being flat Fishes two or three fathom long of an ugly figure.

On the sixth of September, the altitude was 310. 30t. This afternoon we unexpectedly met with the most eminent danger of a nature quite different from what we m. had experienc'd in the late storm. We were steering Southward with a gentle gale blowing from E. S. E. when behind us in the North we observ'd some lightning, and soon after huge hollow waves tumbling over each other, like so many clouds, and with great rapidity rolling towards our Ship, which thereby was brought into so disorderly and confilsed a motion, that we almost lost our senses, not knowing what to do or resolve on. For the waves of the Southerly Monsoon standing against our course, and not permitting the Ship to run swiftly, the wind being besides but gentle, and coming so obliquely, the immense force of the opposite huge waves must necessarily fall upon the stern of the Ship. Two hours after Sun-set two of those waves almost at the~~aame moment, came from behind like mountains, and overwhelm'd the whole Ship with such force, that they bore her down deep under water, with all the persons standing upon quarter deck, of whom I was one, all thinking we were going down to the bottom of the Sea. This shock was attended with such a terrible cracking and noise, that it seem'd as if the whole stern was tore ofF and broke to pieces. Our Captain and his Mate, who were both above sixty years of age, as well as others, who from their first youth had serv'd at Sea, own'd that they never met with the like all their life-time. They look'd immediately after the Rudder, which they found entire on its hinges, except a few planks and other things broke ofF. lhe pump was also set to work, but no leak appear'd. But in the Cabin almost every thing was destroy'd and soak'd with salt water, and our drunken Steward almost drown'd in his bed, tho' he lay under deck in one of the safest places. The deck was cover'd with water knee deep, and the tackling floated about. And tho' the holes were immediately open'd to let the salt water run out, yet it had already penetrated into the inmost parts of several things, as I found to my great grief it had done into my Papers and written Memoirs. We had stood the shock of some more waves, when a    [054]    brisk Gale arising out of the North, attended with Rain and Storm, quicken'd the course of our Ship towards South and East, and thereby shelter'd her against the fury of those monstrous waves, tho' with terrYlble tossing, which continu'd the whole night following, and all the next day, being the seventh of September, tho' without storm, and by tolerable weather, so that this danger was also over. It was remarkable, that this day the wind shifted round all the points of the Compass, and contrary to the course of the Sun. We found no altitude this day, but had from 30 to 40 fathom decpth. On the eighth of September at noon we had 3I . II/. of altitude, and in the evening 42 fathom depth. The Sea was still very rough, and occasion d great tossing, and a troublesome night. On the ninth of September, the altitude was 310. 5', depth from 42o to 48 . fathom.

On the tenth of September being Sunday the altitude was 30o. 20'. but no bottom to be found. This afternoon we were again toss'd by a violent storm out of the Thirdltors. North. We were oblig'd to turn about, to bring to the lower sails, to tie up the Rudder, and so let the Ship drive where she could, trusting for the rest upon providence. On the eleventh of September towards evening, the storm after having lasted twenty four hours abated, so we hoisted the main sheet again, and made use of the Rudder. At noon we found 29o. 55'. of altitude, and in the evening 60 fathom depth; and so we had met with three diferent storms between China and Japan, during which many of the goods had been damag'd by the tossing and tumbling about. There appear'd an unwillingness and discontent among the Ship's Company) on account of this troublesome Voyage, the rather because there was but little hopes of reaching Japan, the North Season, which is contrary to our course, seeming now to be full} settled and fixed; for this reason it was resolv'd on the twelfth of September to let the Ship drive more before the wind, consequently with more ease back to S. W. b} W. This day at noon we had 29o. 3o'. of altitude, and in the evening 6a fathom depth. On the 13th of September early in the morning, when they were careening the Ship, it was observ'd, that the clamps which are like the ribs and braces of this floating Body, were grown loose in the accident that befel us on the sixth of September. This put both Officers and common Sailors out of heart, and made them quite tired with tacking about any longer. It was thought most adviseable to make for some harbour in China, in order to take in fresh water, of which we had not enough for one month more, and then to return to Batavia. Some Passengers, and whoever else had any credit with the Ship's council, endeavouring to make them come into the proposal, the same would in all probability have been approv'd of, had not the Mate oSer'd some objections against it. As for my self, having in my custody a Journal of a Voyage to Japan, which I had receiv'd from a very good hand, I look'd into it, and found, that some years    [055]    before a Dutch Ship was safely arriv'd in Japan the latter end of September. So I went privately to the Captain, and first left to his consideration~~ that the wet hides would hardly keep in the hot air of Batavia, without being spoiled, and he afterwards be made accountable for that damage, as occasion'd by his Faintheartedness and precipitate return I afterwards shew'd him the said passage in the Journal at which he was startled, and having read it thrice over immediately, alteKd his resolution without making any further objection. On the fourteenth of September the Elevation was 29o 36', and in the evening we had from 4I to 46. fathom of depth. On the fifteenth of September we found the altitude 29o 57', depth 36 fathom. On the sixteenth of September the altitude was 30o 13/, depth q8 fathom. On the 17th of September being Sunday we found no elevation, the depth was 47 fathom. On the eighteenth of September, the weather being stormy, we could take no elevation, the depth was 34 fathom. On the nineteenth of September the altitude was 30o 3It, the depth in the evening 45 fathom On the twentieth of September the altitude was 30o 36', the depth in the evening 58, at night 70 fathom. This morning we kill'd a Dolphin, or Dorado, with a Javelin. Its colour was of a yellowish blue, and its length six spans, the flesh of it was very delicious and acceptable to our sick stomachs. On the twenty first of September we attained 310 30' of elevation, which according to the common maps is the Latitude of the rocky Island Matsima situate in the Japonese Ocean, which like a Hermes is Iook'd out for by sea-faring peopIe sailing to or from Japan. We saw it two Hours after we had taken the elevation at nine or ten leagues distance, bearing N. E. whence we concIuded, that it lies in effect a little more Northerly and near 32o degrees of latitude. A little before Sunset this so long wished for Hermes appeared at five leagues distance to the Northward. Six hours after, the Moon shining very bright, and the IsIand lying before us a league ofF on our larboard, we observed that it consisted of about seven pointed Rocks, being rough and bare, lying near each other, daubed over in most places with the dung of birds, so that they appear only inhabited by Sea-mews, which we saw there in great numbers. We made the same observation two years after, when we sailed by it in our return fFom Japan. We had the good luck to catch another Dorado, and in the evening we found 78 fathom depth, the ground being a sandy Mud. On the twenty second of September early in the morning we saw Matsima lying W. S. W. at a great distance, so that we could hardly distinguish it. Some time after we observ'd a Chinese Jonk fFom Nankin, and next two more, which by the building we judged Iikewise to be Chinese, all coming from Japan. On our larboard we saw the Japonese Islands Gotho inhabited by husband-men, and' before it was noon came into our view the high moun-W tainous Country before Nagasaki, the long expected Har bour, which at Sunset we had at six or seven leagues distance before us,    [056]    bearing N. E. by N. We sail'd with# a North West breeze and a few sails towards it, and on0; the twenty third of September at midnight arriv'd at the^; entry of the Bay in 50 fathom water. But the said entry being fulI of rocks and Islands, which we were unac quainted withal, and which it is impossible to sail through at night, we tack'd about till morning came on, when we found 43 fathom of water on a sandy ground, and steer'd towards the Harbour. But being all of a sudden becalmed, we could not proceed, and therefore notified our arrival with firing five Guns, which were heard in the Dutch place of residence two leagues off. Accordingly in the afternoon four vessels came out to us, with the . factors sent by our Superiors there, and accompanied by 0 swarms of Japonese officers, clerks, soldiers, and a chief interprefer, who came to receive us, and to demand the writings, and letters, we had on board. After a short stay they left us, being saluted by us with seven Guns, and we follow'd them, though very slowly, the wind being vari able, as far as the mountain call'd Papenberg, from: whence we tow'd our Ship off by the help of casting '! anchor, till we brought her within half a league of the City of Nagasaki, and so after having return'd thanks to the Almighty for his protection in our Voyage, we cast anchor at ten at night.

We had had neither sick, nor dead; during our whole Voyage, excepting only the abovementioned steward, who >6eing denied any more Arrack, or Brandy, was the day before seiz'd with an Apoplectick fit, which soon t i render'd him senseless and speechless, and threw him into '! convulsions, which a few hours after made an end of his life. He was otherwise an able man, the son of a noted ; divine at the Hague, but by indulgence early fell into debauches and a dissolute life. We were no sooner come to an anchor, but we had two iaponese Guardships put on both sides of us, which all night long went the round with great diligence. All the Chinese Jonks that put to Sea this day, were each of them attended with a Guardship, till they got out of the Harbour into the open Sea. Not far from our Ship we saw a fleet of 40 pleasure boats coming to an anchor, being the usual pompous train Of a great Man, who had been on a voyage. They were built much after the manner of the Strubes in Russia, which are a sort of boats used on the Wolga in going from Mosco to Casan. This little fleet made a fine shew with its many lights at night, and in the morning, when it sailed, with its sails, half of which were white, and the other half black, which they hoisted all at once.

On the twenty fourth of September in the morning we mov'd with a small breeze half of our way, and afterwards twenty Japonese rowing boats fasten'd to a rope towed us the other half as far as 200 paces within the City and our habitation. This Harbour is enclos'd with high moun- tains, Islands, and rocks, and guarded by nature against the rage of the Sea, and the fury of stormy winds. On the tops of    [057]    the neighbouring Mountains stand Guardhouses with Guards in them,who with their spying Glasses are observing whatever happens at Sea, of which they give immediate Information to the Government at Nagasaki, and by this method they had notice of our arrival already two days before, being the 22d in the morning. A:long the shore, which is form'd by the foot of those Mountains, which encompass the Harbour, there stand divers round Bastions, on which I observ'd only Rails, or Palisadoes, painted red, as it were for Ornament's sake, but saw no Cannon. Besides these, there are on both sides of the City, not far from the shore, on two Eminences, as many imperial head Guards, which are hung about with cloth for Ornament, as well as to hinder people from seeing the number of Cannon and Men, that are in them. When we pass'd by them, we saluted every Guard with twelve great Guns, and after being arriv'd at the place assign'd to us, we dropt anchor at about three hundred paces from the City, and as far from Desima, which is the habitation of the Dutch on a separate Island form'd purposely near the shore without the City. Then came to us, two Buggioses, or Gentlemen of the Governors, sent by them with their Commission, with many subordinate Clerks, Interpreters and Soldiers, who called all those that were newly arriv'd, and made them pass in review before them one after the other, according to the List given them, viewing every one from top to toe, and writing his name, age and business, with a pencil on paper. Besides this, about six persons more were examin'd every one in particular, concerning our Voyage, viz. from whence we came, when we set out, how long we had been on the way, whether we did not land somewhere, &c. and the several answers were carefully written down. Many questions were ask'd upon the deceased Steward's account, and the answers also taken down, his Breast and the rest of his Skin were narrowly viewed, whether there was any cross, or other mark d the Popish Religion upon it. We obtain'd so much by our repeated Instances, that the Corpse was fetch'd away the same day, but none of us could get leave to attend it, and to see where it was interrsd. This review being over, Soldiers and Clerks were put into every corner, and the whole Ship with al1 her cargo taken, as it were, in possession by the Japonese. The boat and skiS was left to our Men, only for this day, in order to look to their anchors. But pistols, cutlasses, and other arms were by them demanded, and taken into custody, which were follow'd the next morning by the gun-powder packt in barrels. In short, had I not been before hand acquainted wlth their usual proceedings,IcouId not have help'd thinking we were got into a hostile Country, or had been taken for Spies. I must also remember here, that in our Voyage, as soon as we discover'd this Land, every one was oblig~~d pursuant to an order from above, and ancient custom, to give his Prayer-book, and other Books of Divinity, as also atl    [058]    European Money he had about him, to the Cap tain, who, after having taken a memorandum of every one's name for it, pack'd all up in an old cask, and hid it from the Japonese tiII our return. This evening they sent us from the Dutch Factory divers sorts of Refreshments, viz. Fowls, Eggs, Shell-fish, and other Fish, Radishes with their Leaves, Turneps, Onions, fresh Ginger, Pompkins, Water-melons, white Bread, and a barrel of Sacki, or Japonese Rice-beer.

On the 25th of September, early in the morning, came from Desima on board our Ship both Residents, or Directors of the Dutch Trade, one M. Sweras, who was to be reliev'd by the other M. Butenheim his Successor but newly arriv'd from Batavia, with three Ships laden with Merchandize. AIt the Ships's Company having been call'd together, they read to us the orders both of the Dutch East-India Company, and of the Governors of Nangasaki, chiefly to this purpose, that every one of us, ought to behave soberly and discreetly with respect to the Natives, and the Laws and Customs of the Country. A Paper containing these Orders, having been read publickly, was according to the Custom of5Japan, put up on board the Ship for every Body to read. In the afternoon I went on shore to Desima, on which occasion one is oblig'd to take out a Passport from the Japonese Shiw Guard to those on shore, and on the return another from the Land-Guard to that on board. Finding that the use of the raw Garden Fruit, that was sent us yesterday, had occasion'd to me great pain, r was oblig'd to hasten back to our Ship, from whence I went on the 26th of September with my things, to live in the Habitation assign'd to me at Desima.

 

 

[098]

Chap. IV. Of the Empire of Japan in general, as to its situation, and the largeness of its several Istands.

This Empire is by the Europeans call'd Japan. The Natives give it several names and characters. The most common, and most frequently us'd in their writings and conversation,is Nipon,which is sometimes in a more elegant manner, and particular to this Nation, pronounc'd Nifon, and by the Inhabitants of Nankin, and the southern parts of China, Sijppon. It signifies, the foundation of the Sun, being deriv'd from fi, Fire, and in a more sublime Sense, the Sun, and Pon, the ground, or foundation of a thing.    [059]     

There are still some other names and epithets, which are seldom mention'd in conversation, but occur more frequently in their writings. Such‑are for instance. I. +i Tenka, that is, the Subcelestial Empire, as if it were the only one existing under Heaven. Hence the Emperorq is call'd Tenkasama, the Subcelestial Monarch. In former times this Name was peculiar to the Empire of Japan; alone, but since commerce hath made known to them several other Countries, they now condescend to honour ~~them also with the same epithet, particularly such, whosc Inhabitants are admitted and tolerated among thems Thus they call the Empire of China, To Sin Tenka, the united Provinces of the Netherlands, known to them by the name of Holland, Hollanda Tenka. 2. Fino Motto, is much the same with Nipon, and signifies, pro~~ perly speaking, the Root of the Sun, Fi being the Sun, and Motto, a Root; No, is only a particle, by whicb these two words are combin'd together. 3. Awadsissima, | is the original name of this Country, and is as much as to 0 say, a Terrestrial Scum Island, Awa, signifying Sc~~; 098

Dsi, the Earth, and Ssima an Island. This Name is grounded upon the following fabulous tradition, recorded ln their Histories, of the origin and first creation of the several Islands, which compose this mighty EmpireX which in former times, for want of communication with other Countries, was looked upon by the Natives, as the only inhabited part of the Globe. In the beginning of the Creation, the supreme of the seven first celestiaW Spirits, (of which more in the seventh Chapter of this Book) stirr'd the then Chaos, or confuse Mass of the Earth with a StaS, which as he took out, there dropt from it a muddy Scum, which running together form'd the Japonese IsIands, one of which, of the fourth magnitude, still retains this Name, being particuIarly calI'd Awadsissima. 4. d Sin Kokf, or CaMino Kuni, the Country, or Habitation of the Gods. For by Sin, and Cami, are denoted the Gods, which were particularly and originally worship'd in Japan ; and both Kokf and Kuni signify a Country. 5 Akitsima, or according to the common pronounciation; AkiTsussima, is another name given to this Country of old, and frequently to be met with in their Chronicles and Legends. 6. Tontsio, the true Morning. 7. Sio, all viz. all the several Islands subject to the Emperor of Japan. 8. Tamatto, which name is also given to one of iltS Provinces. Several others, as Asijwara, Asijwara Kokf, Qua, or Wa, and some more, I forbear mentioning to avoid being too tedious on so trifling a Subject

The Empire of Japan lieth between 3 I and 42 degrees lts vitvation of Northern Latitude. The Jesuits in a late Map of Ch i na, made and corrected by th ei r Astronom ical Ob servations, place it between 1570. and 1750. 30t of Longitude. It extends to N. E. and E. N. E. being irreguIarly broad, tho' in the main, pretty narrow in comparison to its length, which from one end of the Province Fisen, to the extremity of the Province Osiu, is suppos'd to be two hundred German    [060]    Miles in a streight Line, all the filrther distant Coasts and Islands, tho' subiect to the Japonese Emperor, not reckon'd.

Dsi, the Earth, and Ssima an Island. This Name is grounded upon the following fabulous tradition, recorded in their Histories, of the origin and first creation of the several Islands, which compose this mighty Empire, which in former times, for want of communication with other Countries, was looked upon by the Natives, as the only inhabited part of the Globe. In the beginning of the Creation, the supreme of the seven first celestiaX Spirits, (of which more in the seventh Chapter of this Book) stirr'd the then Chaos, or confuse Mass of the Earth with a Staff, which as he took out, there dropt from it a muddy Scum, which running together form'd the Japonese Islands, one of which, of the fourth magnitude, still retains this Name, being particularly call'd Awadsissima. 4. d Sin Kokf, or CaMino Kuni, the Country, or Habita­tion of the Gods. For by Sin, and Cami, are denoted the Gods, which were particularly and originally worship'd in Japan; and both Kokf and Kuni signify a Country. 5. Akitsima, or according to the common pronounciation, AkiTsussima, another name given to this Country of old, and frequently to be met with in their Chronicles and Legends. 6. Tontsio, the true Morning. 7. Sio, all viz. all the several IsIands subject to the Emperor of Japan. 8. Jamatto, which name is also given to one of its Provinces. Several others, as Asijwara, Asijwara Kokf, Qua, or Wa, and some more, I forbear mentioning to avoid being too tedious on so trifling a Subject.

The Empire of Japan lieth between 31 and 42 degrees Its ritttatiett. Of Northern Latitude. The Jesuits in a late Map of China, made and corrected by their Astronomical Obser­vations, place it between t570. and 1750. 30t of Longi­tude. It extends to N. E. and E. N. E. being irregularly broad, tho' in the main, pretty narrow in comparison to its length, which from one end of the Province Fisen, to the extremity of the Province Osiu, is suppos'd to be two hundred German Miles in a streight Line, all the further distant Coasts and Islands, tho' subject to the Japonese Emperor, not reckon'd.

[100]

unlike It may in different respects be compar'd to the K;ngrttvin- doms of Great Britain and Ireland, being much after the same manner, tho' in a more eminent degree, divided and broke through by corners and forelands, arms of the Sea, great bays and inlets running deep into the Country, and gorming several Islands, Peninsula' s, Gulphs and Harbours. Besides, as the King of Great Britain is Sovereign of three Kingdoms, England, Scotiand and Ireland, so isiom. likewise the Japonese Emperor hath the supreme Jurisdiction of three separate large Islands. The first and largest, is call'd Nipon, from the name of the whole Empire. It runs length ways from East to West in the form of a Jaw-bone, whose crooked part is turn'd to the North. A narrow Channel or Streight, full of Rocks and Islands, some inhabited, some uninhabited, parts it from the second, which is next to it in largeness, and which from its situation, lJnng to the South-west of Nipon, is 6call'd SaiKokf, that is, the Western Country. It is also caSl'd Kiusiu, or the Country of Nine, being divided into nine large Provinces. It hath t48-German Miles in circumference, and according to the Japonese it hath I40 of their own Miles in length, and between 40 and 50 in breadth. The third Island lies between the first and second. It is near of a square figure, and being divided xsinto four Provinces, the Japonese call it SiKokf, that is the Country of four, viz. Provinces. These three large ; Islands are encompass'd with an almost unconceivable number of others, some of which are small, rocky and barren, others large, rich and fruitful enough to be govern'd by petty Princes, as will appear more fully by the next Chapter, wherein I propose to lay down a more accurate geographical description of this Empire.

vsltdAl1 these several Islands and Dominions composing the t Tratt mighty Empire of Japan, have been by the ecclesiastical ndhereditary Monarch, Siusiun, divided into Gokisitzido, as they are call'd by the Japanese, or seven large Tracts of Land in the year of Christ 590. Many years after in the year of Christ 681. Ten Mu, divided the seven chief Tracts into 66 Provinces, appointing so many Lords of his Court to command and govern them, as Princes, or his Lieutenants. Two more Islands Iki and Tsussima formerly belonging to the Kingdom of Corea, having been conquer'd in the last Century, and added to the Empire of Japan, there are now in all 68 Provinces. Both these sixey eight divisions of the Japanese Empire, tho' they subsist till Provinres. now, yet through the misery of time its 68 Provinces have been since their first constitution torn into 604 lesser six hundred districts. In the first and happiest Ages of the Japanese ardfoer Monarchy, every Prince enjoy'd the Government of the distri~~tl. Province, which he was entrusted with by the Emperor, in peace and tranquiIity. The miseries of ensuing times, the frequent quarrels and contentions, which arose among the chief branches of the Imperial Family about    [061]    the succession to the throne, by degrees involv'd the whole LEmpire into blood and confusion. Its Princes espous'd diSerent parties, and no sooner were arms introduced among them, as the most powerfill and surest means to make up their dissensions, but every one endeavour'd thereby to magintain himself in the possession of those lands, whose government he was owing entirely to the Imperial bounty: Such as had not been provided for by the Emperor, took care to provide for themselves. The Princes divided their Hereditary dominions among their Sons, who, though possess'd of but one portion of their Father's estate, would not be behind them in grandeur and magnificence. What wonder then if the number of princedoms and dominions went on perpetually increasing. The Emperors of the now reigning Family, usurpers themselves of the throne, of which they are possess'd, think this great division of the Provinces of the Empire no ways detrimental to their Government, but rather conducive, to make them the better acquainted with the true state of their riches, and revenues; therefore far from reducing them to the former standard, they still tear and divide them more and more, as they please, or as their Interest requtres, of which there are some late instances.

The Province of Tsikusen was not long ago divided into two Governments Janagawa and Kurume and the Prince of Tsikungo had orders from Court to surrender part of his dominions to the Prince of the two Islands above mention'd Iki and Tsussima, who till then had nothing in possession upon the continent of Japan.

The borders of this Empire are its rocky, mountainous Coasts, and a tempestuous Sea, which by reason of its shallowness admits none, but smalLl vessels, and even those not without eminent danger, the depth of most of its Gulfs and Harbours being not yet known, and others, which the pilots of the Country are better acquainted withal, unfit for harbouring of Ships of any considerable bulk. Indeed it seems Nature purposely design'd these Islands to be a sort of a little world, separate and inde pendent of the rest, by making them of so difficuIt an access, and by endowing them plentifully, with whatever is requisite to make the lives of their Inhabitants both delightfiul and pleasant, and to enable them to subsist without a commerce with foreign Nations.

Besides the several Islands and Provinces already mention'd, there are some further distant Countries, which do not properly speaking belong to the Empire of Japan, but either acknowledge the supremacy of the Emperor; or lisc under his protection. Of these I think it necessary to give some preliminary account, before I proceed to a more particular description of the Japanese Empire it self. They are I. The Islands of Riuku, or Liquejo, the 1: Inhabitants of which stile themselves subjects, not of the Emperor of Japan, but of the Prince of Satsuma, by whom they were subdued and conquer'd. 2. Tsiosin, is the third    [062]    and lowest part of the Peninsula of Corea, which is; govern'd, in the name of his Imperial Majesty, by the Prince of Iki and Tsussima. 3. The Island Jeso, which is govern'd for the Emperor by the Prince of Matsumai, whose own dominions make part of the great Prourince Osju.

I. The Liquejo Islands, as they are set down in our Maps, or the Islands of Riuku, as they are call'd by the Inhabitants, must not be contounded with the Insult Leuconi;e or the Philippine Islands. They lie to the Southwest of the Province Satzuma, which is situate upon the continent of SaiKokf, and the neighbouring Island Tana or Tanagasima, and according to our Maps reach down almost to the 26o. of Northern latitude. If we believe the Japanese, they are so fruitful, as to yield the iEtice harvest twice a year. The Inhabitants, which are for the most part either husbandmen or fishermen, are a good natured merry sort of people, leading an agreeable contented life, diverting themselves, after their work is done, with a glass of rlce beer, and playing upon their musical Instruments, which they for this purpose carry out with them into the fields. They appear by their language to be of Chinese extraction. In the late great revolution in China, when the Tartars invaded and possess'd themselves of that mighty Empire, the Natives retired in great numbers, and were dispers'd all over the East-Indies. Not a few fled to these Islands, where they applied themselves chiefly to trade, being well skill'd in navigation, and well acquainted with those Seas. Accordingly they still carry on a commerce with Satzuma, and go there once a year. Some centuries ago these Islands were invaded and conquer'd by the Prince of Satzuma, whose successors still keep them in awe by their Bugios, or Lieutenants and strong Garrisons, though otherwise by reason of their remoteness from Satzuma the Inhabitants are treated with much regard and kindness; for they are oblig'd to give their Sovereign only one fifth part of the produce of their Country, whilst his own natural Subjects, the Satzumese are tax'd at tWQ thirds. But besides what they pay to the Prince of Satsuma, they raise a contribution among themselves, to be sent by way of a present, once a year, to the Tartarian Monarch of China in token of loyalty and submission. They have like the Tunquinese and Japanese a Dairi of their own, or an Ecclesiastical Hereditary Monarch, to whom they pay great respect, supposing him to be lineally descended from the Gods of their Country. He resides at JaXama, one of the chief of these Islands, situate not far from the Island Osima, which is of the second magnitude.

t. II. Corey, or Cor:ea, is a Peninsula, which stands out from Tartary, runing towards Japan, opposite to the coasts of China. It hath been, as the Japanese relate, divided of old into three Provinces. That which is lowest, and nearest to Japan, is by the Japanese call'd Tsiosijn, the    [063]    second, which makes up the middle part of the whole Peninsula, Corey, and the third and uppermost, which confines upon Tartary, Fakkusai. Sometimes the name of either of these Provinces is given to the whole Peninsula. The natives according to the account of the Japanese are of Chinese extraction. They served often and under different Masters. Their neighbours the Tartars sometimes enter'd into alliances with them, at other times they invaded and subdued them. Mikaddo Tsiuu Ai, Emperor of Japan, prosecuted them with war, but he dying before he could put an end to this enterprize, Dsin Gu his Relict, a Princess of great parts and personal bravery, pursued it with the utmost vigour, wearing the arms of the deceas'd Emperor her Husband, till at last she made them tributary to Japan about the year of Christ t 201. Sometime after they enter'd into fresh alliances with their neighbours the Tartars, and so continued unmolested by the Japanese, till Taiko possess'd himsclf of the Secular throne of Japan. This valiant Princc, reading the histories of his Empire, found it recorded, that the Coreans had been subdued by one of his prv decessors and made tributary to Japan: As in the mem time he was but lately come to the throne, he doubted not, but that he shouId get time fuSly to settle and to; secure himself in the possession thereof, if he couId send some of the most powerful Princes of the Empirc ! abroad upon some such military expedition, and by X means remove them from Court and Country. He thero fore gladly seiz'd this opportunity, and resolv'd to renew and support his pretensions to the Kingdom of Corea, and through this kingdom, as he gave out his main design was, to open to himself a way to the conquest of the great Empire of China it self. Accordingly he sent over some Ambassador's to Corey, to desire the Natives to acknow ledge the supremacy of the Japanese Emperor, and to give tokens of their loyalty and submission. But the Coreans, instead of an answer, killing the Emperor's Ambassador, by this hostile act gave him just reasons to prosecute them with war. Accordingly a numerous army was sent over, without further delay, under the command of such of the Princes of the Empire, whose presence he had the most reason to be apprehensive of. This war lasted seven years, during which time his Generals with much a do broke at last through the strong opposition made by the natives, and their allies the Tartars, and after a brave defence made the Country again tributary to Japan. Taiko dying about that time, and the army returnings Ijejas his successor order'd, that they should once in three years send an embassy to Court, to acknowledge his sovereignty. Since that time they relapsed by degrees under the domination of the Tartars, and drove the Garrisons Ieft by the Japanese, down to the very coasts of the Province Tsiosijn, the only thing they have now remaining of all their conquests in Corea. As things now stand, the Emperor of Japan seems to be satisfied, for the security of his own dominions, to be master of the Coasts,    [064]    the care and Government whereof he committed to the Prince of the Islands Iki and Tsusim-a, who keeps there a Garrison only of fifty Men under the command of a Cap tain, or Bugjo, as they are here call'd. And the Inhabi tants are order'd to send an embassy to Court, and to take the oath of allegiance and supremacy only once at the begInning of every new Emperor's Reign. The Coasts of Corea are about forty eight Japanese Water Leagues, or sixteen German MiIes, distant from the IsIand of Tsussima, and this as much from the continent of Japan. Numbers of Rocks and small Islands lie between them, which tho' they be for the most part uninhabited, yet the Tapanese keep strong Garrisons in some of the chief, to watch what Ships sail by, and to oblige them to shew what commodities they have on board, as claiming the sovereignty of those Seas. The Commodities brought from Tsiosijn are the best Cod, and other Fish, pickled, Wallnuts, sarce medicinal Plants, Flowers and Roots, particularly the Ninseng, so famous for its exce)lent Virtues, which grows in great plenty in the Provinces of Corea and Fakusai, as also in Siamsai, a Province of the neighbouring Tartary; this Plant, tho' it be found elsewhere, yet that growing in the Provinces abovesaid, is believ'd far to excel others in Goodness and Virtues. The Natives have also some few Manufactures. Among the rest, a certain sort of earthen Pots, made in Japij and Niuke, two Tartarian Provinces, were brought over from thence by the Coreans, which were much esteem'd by the Japanese, and bought very dear. But of late it was order'd by the Emperor, that there should be noj more imported for the future. The Boats made use of 12y the Tsioneese are very bad indiferent Structures, which one scarce would venture further then Tsussima.

III. Jeso, or Jesogasima, that is the IsIand of teso, is the most Northern Island, the Jawpanese have in posseF sion out of their own Empire. It was invaded and conquer'd, as I was inform'd in Japan, by Joritomo, the first Cubo, or Secular Monarch, who left it to the Prince of Matsumai, (a neighbouring Island belonging to the great Province Osiu) to be by him govern'd and taken care of. Same time after, the Inhabitants weary of a foreign Government, fell upon the Garrison, the Prince of Matsumai left there, and kill'd them all to a Man. This act of hostility no sooner reach'd that Prince's ears, but he sent over a good Army with three hundred Horse, to demand, and ln case of refusal, to take ample satisEactiona and to chastise the Rebels. But the Prince of Jeso, to prevent further mischievous consequences, sent over an Embassy to Matsumai, and to take off alLl suspicion of his having had any intelligence or hand in the asair, he deliver'd up twenty of the ring-leaders, which were executed, and their heads impaled, upon the coasts of Jeso. this act of submission entirely reconcil'd him to his superiors, but the natives being ever since look'd upon as a stubborn and tumultuous people, strong garrisons are constantly kept upon the    [065]    Southern coasts of this Island, to put it out of their power ever to attempt the like; and the Prince is oblig'd to send once a year, an Embassy to Matsumai, with presents to the value of one Mangokf. This IsIand lies in 42o degrees of Northern Latitude, to the N. N. E. right opposite to the great Province OOsiu, where its two promontories Sugaar and Taajasaki running out very far into the Sea, form a large Gulph, which directly faces it. The passage over to this Island is said to be of one day, and it is not to be made at all times, by reason of the currents, which run strongly, sometimes to the East and sometimes to the West, tho' otherwise it be but forty Japanese water Leagues, and in some places not above five or six German Miles distant from the Coasts of Japan. It is said to be as large as the Island Kiusiu, but so thoroughly filll of Woods and Forests, that it pro duces nothing, which might be of use to the Japanese, besides some pelts and furs, which even the Inhabitants of the Southern parts of Japan have no occasion for. Nor do the Jesoans bring over any thing else but that, and the famous Fish Karasaki, which is catch'd in great plenty about the Island, and which the Japanese reckon a great dainty, boiling and eating it like Cod. As to its figure, I could not gather any thing positive, neither from the accounts I had from the Japanese, nor from the Maps, I met with in the Country, they difering much from each other. Some represent it very near round, others make it of a very irregular figure, with large Promontories, Gulphs and Bays, the Sea running in several places so far up into the Country, that one might be easily induc'd to believe it compos'd of several diferent Islands. I am apt to believe) that the Country discover'd by de Vries, to the North of Japan, was part of this IsIand. I took notice that in some of the Japanese Maps, the South west and larger part is call'd Matsuki, but it was generally speaking so indiferently drawn, that I should be at a loss to determine, whether it be an Island by it self, or join'd to the rest. According to the account the Japanese give of the Inhabitants, they are a strong, but savage, People, wearing long Hair and Beards, well skill'd in the management of Bows and Arrows, as also in fishing, the greatest part living almost wholly on Fish. They descrlbe them filrther, as very dirty and nasty, but the truth of this accusation is not so strictly to be relied on, since they, the Japanese themselves, are so extreamly nice and superstitious in frequently washing and cleaning their Bodies, as to have found the very same fault with the Dutch. The Language of Jedso is said to have some thing of that, which is spoke in Corea.

renz ofBehind this Island, to the North, lies the Continent of JClo.OkuJeso, as it is call'd by the Japanese, that is, upper or high Jeso. That there 1S such a Country is not in the least question'd among Geographers, but they have not as yet been able to determine, whether it confines on Tartary, or America, consequently, where they are to place the    [066]    streight of Anian, or the so long wish'd for passage out of the North Sea into the great Indian Ocean, suw pos'd that there be such a one, or whether it is closely join'd either to Tartary, or America, without any inter mediate streight, or passage at all. I made it my business, both in my travels through Muscovy and Persia, tgthor'l and during my stay in Japan, to enquire with all the 1Yta irJto diligence, I was capable of, into the true State of those *,,fiefNorthern Countries, tho' in the main to very little gt1purpose, having hardly met with any thing worth the notice of the publick. At Moscow, and at Astrakan, I spoke to several people, which either in their travels through Siberia and Kataya into China, or during their stay in Siberia, whither they had been banish'd by the Czar, and liv'd many years, pick'd up what few and uncertain informations they could, but couId learn nothing farther, but that the great Tartary is by an Isthmus, or Neck of Land, join'd to a neighbouring Continent, which they suppos'd to be America, and from thence concluded that in aX probability there is no such thing as a communication between the icy Sea and the Indian Ocean. In a Map of Siberia, which was made and cut upon wood, by one who was banish'd thither, and the names of the places mark'd in Sclavonian Characters, there were several considerable promontories, which from the eastern Coasts stood out into the Sea, one of which, too great to be brought upon the table, was cut ofF at the edge. He that shew'd me this Map, told me at the same time, that according to the accounts which could be procur'd from the Tartars living in those parts, this very promontory is nothing but an Isthmus, which runs towards a neighbouring large Continent on which it confines, but that it is compos'd of high, rough, and almost inaccessible mountains, and that in his opinion, if ever there hath been a passage there, for the first Inhabitants of the World to get over into America, and to people that Continent, such another undertaking would be at present utterly impossible. This Map of Siberia, such as it was, that is extream ill done, and without any scale of distances, or degrees of Longitude or Latitude, was yet the first, which could give the Czar of Muscovy, some, tho' very imperfect, notions of the great extent of his Tartarian Dominions to the North. And 'tis from the same, my particular Friend, the ingenious Mr. Winius, who was by the Czar appointed Inspector General over the Apothecaries and Druggists Shops in Muscovy, made the first rude sketch of his Map of Russia and Tartary, which he afterwards considerably corrected and augmented by several accounts procur'd from diferent parts, and withal reduc'd to the necessary degrees of Longitude and Latitude. He was not a little assisted in this undertaking by Mr. Spitshary, Greek and Latin Interpreter at the Court at Muscovy. This tearned and industrious Man was, by the then reigning Monarch of Russia, sent his Ambassador to the Emperor of China, with secret Orders and Instructions to spare neither trouble nor expences, to get    [067]    himself acquainted with the true State, Situation and Extent of the Czar's Dominions. Accordingly he went to Pekin through the Northern parts of Russia and Tartary, and having dispatch'd his business at the Court of China, return'd through the Southern provinces, and came back to Moscow about the year 1680. During my stay at the Court of Moscow it so happen'd, that he was to be our Interpreter, which brought me much acquainted with him, and fed me with no small hopes of learning somewhat new and more particular, than was hitherto known, about the state of those Countries, but I found him too distrustful and secret, and very unwilling to communicate, what observations he made upon his Jourrivolas ney. The late Illustrious Nicolaus Witsen L.L.D. 2nd Burghermaster at Amsterdam, a person to whom the publick is greatly indebted, met with much better success in his own Enquiries, for in his last Embassy to the Court of Muscovy he did, by his extraordinary good conduct, great learning and aSability, insinuate himself so far into the favour ot the Czar, and the Grandees of his Court, that whatever accounts they had procured from all p~~ of Russia, were without reserve communicated to him, > which enabled him to compose that excellent and accurate map of all the Russian Empire, and the great Tartary with its Mountains, Rivers, Lakes, Cities and Provinc", for the most part till then unknown, a work which by reason of its great usefulness could not but highly obligc: the curious. But however accurate this map of Doctor Witsen's was which afterwards prov'd very useful to Mr*; Isbrand Ides, in his Journey by land to China, where hc went Ambassador, yet the full extent of the Eastern Coasts of Siberia, and the great Tartary, remains as yet undetermined, and we are still in the dark, as to what relation they bear to the neighbouring Continent, whidh; is probably that of Oku Jeso. The Japanese on their side are as IittIe acquainted with Stroxatl the state and extent of that Country, which lies behind fthith tht . the Island Jeso Gasima, and which is by them call'd Oku Jeso. They say only that lt lS 300 Japanese miles long. But what authority they have to support this assertion, I cannot tell. A Ship having some years ago been accidentally cast upon the Coasts of that Continent, they met among the rude and savage Inhabitants some persons clad in fine Chinese Silk, by which may be very probably conjectured some communication the Natives have with the neighbouring Daats, or Tartary, at least that these Countries are not very remote from each other. A Jonk, which was sent thither on purpose upon discovery, about the year 1684~~ returned after having been three months upon her voyage, and brought the very same account. An experienc'd Japanese Pilot, who was well acquainted with the Seas about Japan, as having been every where round this Empire, upon my enquiry couId give me no other satisfactory answer, but that between Japan and Jesogasima the Currents run aRternatively, sometimes East, sometimes West, and that behind Jesogasima,    [068]    there is only one, which runs constantly, and directly, North, whence he concluded, that near Daats, so they call Tartary, there must be some communication with another Sea to the North. A few years ago another Imperial Jonk was sent out in quest of those Countries. They sail'd from the Eastern Coasts of Japan, and after many troubles and incommodities enduPd between 4o and 50 degrees of Northern Latitude, they discover'd a very large Continent, suppos'd to be America, where having met with a good harbour, they staid there durinZ the Winter, and so return'd the next year, without any the Ieast account of that Country, or its Inhabitants, excepting only, that it run filrther to the North-west. Since that time it was resolv'd at the Court of Japan to be at no further pain, or expence, about the discovery of those Countries. I was littIe the better for consulting the-Japanese M3ps of those Seas, tho' r saw several of them in different places, as at Jedo, in the palace of Tsussima no Cami, Governor of Nagasaki, in the Temple of Symmios near Osacca, and in several other Temples. They all represent a large Continent, which stands out from the great Tartary, and extends it self behind the Island Jeso gasima, reaching about 15 degrees of Longitude further East, than the Eastern Coasts of Japan. A large space is left empty between it, and the neighbouring America. The Country itself is divided into the follow ing Provinces, mark'd with their common writing Characters, Kabersari, Orankai, Sitsij, Ferosan and Amarisi. Between the two last Provinces is mark7d a considerable River, which loses it self into the Sea, behind the Island Jeso to the South-east. But as all their Maps ; are very indifferently done, without any scale of distances or degrees, and as besides the Names of the Provinces ab ovementio n' d are only in their Canna, or common Writing, and not, as other more authentick Records, in their Slsi, or significant Characters, I shall leave to the Reader's own Judgment to determine, how much there is to be depended upon them. And this is all I could learn in Japan about the State of those Countries, which lie to the North of this Empire.|

Before I leave off this general Geographical Descriw tion of the Japanese Empire, I must not forget to mention rdtwo other Islands, which lie filrther of to the East, or rlan~~. E. N. E. of the Coasts of Osiu, at least at 150 Miles distance, but as the Japanese pretend, belong to their Empire. They have given them very high sounded Names, the smaller, more Northern, and more remote from Japan, being call'd Ginsima, the Silver Island, the larger, and nearer Kinsima, the Gold Island. They keep their state and situation very secret from all Foreigners, chiefly the Europeans, for as much as their rich Names have already tempted them to go in quest thereof. The King of Spain having been inform'd that they lie West wards of America, in that part of the World, which by the Pope's division was assign'd to him, as all those Lands, which should be discover'd from the East, were to the King of Portugal, sent    [069]    out a very expert Pilot to look for them about the year 1620. But this voyage prov'd unsuccessful. The Dutch attempted the same at diferent times with no better success. They fitted out one ship for that purpose at Batavia in 1639, and two others in 1643) which had orders to go further, and to attempt the discovery of the Coasts of Tartary and America. The voyage of these two ships, one of which was call'd Bresken, the other the Castrecoom, prov'd very unfortunate. For besides that they suSePd much by Storms, the Captain of the Bresken having hazarded himself on shore, with some of his ship's company, in a port of Japan lying under the 40 Degree of Northern Latitude, they were all seiz'd upon, put in Irons, carried Prisoners to Jedo, and so barbarously treated, as if their intention had been to betray or to invade the Empire.

About the year 1675, the Japanese accidentally discover'd a very large Island, one of their Barks having NcwI lagd been forc'd there ln a Storm from the Island Fatsisio, from which they computed it to be 300 Miles distant towards the East. They met with no Inhabitants, but found it to be a very pleasant and fruitful Country, well supplied wsth fresh water, and furnished with plenty of plants and trees, particularly the ArrackTree, which however might give room to conjecture, that the Island laZ rather to the South of Japan, than to the East, these trees growing only in hot Countries. They call'd it Bunesima, or the Island Bune, and because they found no Inhabitants upon it, they mark'd it with the character of an uninhabited Island. On the shores they found an incredible quantity of Fish and Crabs, some of which were from tour to six foot long.

Fatsisio, I just now had occasion to mention, or Fatsisio Isza;nd Gasima, which is as much as to say, the Eighty Fathom Fatli io. Island, lS the most remote Isiand the Japanese have in possession Southward. It lies under the same Meridian with Jedo, and is re>*on'd to be about So Japanese Water- leagues distant from the Continent of Japan, being the furthermost of a long row of small Islands, almost contiguous to each other. It is the chief Ishnd, where the great Men of the Emperor's Court, when out of favour, are usually confined, pursuant to a very ancient custom, and kept prisoners on a rocky Coast, from the extraordinary height of which the whole Island hath borrosvid its name. As long as they continue on this Island, they must work for their livelyhood. Their chief amusement is weavings and some of the silk stuffs wrought by them, as they are generallxv Men of ingenuity and good understanding, are so inimitably fine, that the Emperor hath forbid under severe penalties, to export, or to sell them to foreigners. This Island, besides it being wash'd by a rough tempestuous Sea, is so well guarded by nature itself, that when there is some provision of the common necessaries of life, or some new Prisoners to be brought in, or the guard to be reliev'd, the whole Boat, with all the lading, must    [070]    be drawn up, and again Iet down by a crane, the coasts being so steep and rocky, as to admit of no other access.

 

 

Chap. V. The Division and Subdivision of the Empire of Japan into its several Provinces; as also of; its Revenue and Government.

FN the general Geographical Description of Japan, which I have laid down in the preceding Chapter, I took notice that this Empire hath been divided into seven great Tracts of Land, which were again sub-divided into 68 considerable Provinces, and these into 604 smaller Districts, or Counties, as one might caH them. I pro ceed now more particularly to consider the largeness, L extent? fertility, produce, and revenues of each Province, as I found them in a Japanese description of this Empire, publish'd in Japan, by the title of Sitzi Jossu.

But before I proceed to a particular consideration of the seven large Tracts of Land, which the Empire of Japan hath been divided into, and of their several Provinces, I shall take notice of the Gokinai, or Gokinai goka Kokf, that is the five Provinces of the Imperial revenues, so call'd, because all the revenue, of these five provinces is particularly appropriated for the support and maintenance of the Imperial Court. They amount to 148 Man, and 1200 Kokf of Rice. The Reader is desir'd to observe in general, that all the revenues in this Country are reduc'd to these two measures in Rice. A Man contains 10000 Kokf, and a Kokf 3000 bales or bags of Rice. These five Imperial Provinces are I. Jamasijro, otherwise Jamasijro: It is a large and fruitlil Country. Its Iength from South to North is a hundred Japanese Miles; and there are several good towns and other places of note within its compass. It is divided into 8 districts, Otokuni, Kadono Okongi, Kij, Udsi, Kusse, Sakanaka, and Tsukugi. 2. Jamatto, or WOsju, is likewise a very good Country, and much of the same length with the former going from South to North. It had formerly several places of note within its compass, which are at present reduced to a very small number. It is divided into 15 districts, Soono Cami, Soonosimo, Feguri, Firole, Katzu-Dsiau, Katsunge, Okuno Umi, Utz, Josino, Uda, SIki no Simo, SIki no Cami, Takaiidz, Tooidz and Jammanobe. 3. Kawatzij, Or Kasiu, a tolerable good Country, about two days Journeys in length, and divided into 15 districts. Nistori Isikawa, Fukaitz, Jaskabe, Ookake, Tukajatz, Kawatz, Sarara, Umbarada, Katanno, Wakaje, Sibukaja, Sick,    [071]    Tanbokf, and Tannan. 4. Idsumi, or Sensju, is a very large Country, but indiferently fruitful. Its length is an hundred Japanese miles from South to West. It is border'd on one side by the Sea, on the other by a ridge of high Mountains. It is plentifillly supplied with Fish by the neighbouring Sea: It produces also some buck-wheat, rice, pease and beans, though but few, and not of the best sort. It hath but 3 smaller districts, Ootori, Idsume, and Fine. 5. Sitzu, otherwise Tsinokuni, and Sisju. It hath two days Journey and a half in circum ference. It is the furthermost Country Brestwards on a large GuIph. The Southern parts of it are very warm, but the Northern colder, and abound more in what they call GoKokf, which are the five chief sorts of pease eat in this Country. It aSords also some fish, and salt, and is in the main a very good Country. It is divided into 13 districts, Sij Jos, or Symmios, Kutatz, Fingassinai, Nisijnari, Jatsan, Simasimo, Simakami, Tesijma, Kawa nobe, Muko, Awara, Arima, and Nosje.

I proceed now to the Vll. Iarge tracts of Land, which tofLand. the Japanese Empire hath been divided into by the Emperor Siusiun.

I. The first is Tookaido, that is, the South Eastern Tract. I have observed above, that the said seven large tracts have been by the Emperor Tenmu further divided into 68 Provinces, the five Provinces above mention'd in cluded, to which some hundred years after two more were added. The Tookaido consists of 15 of these 68 Provinces, which are I. Iga, otherwise Isju, which is limited on the South and East by the Sea. To the North it is separated from the neighbouring Provinces by a ridge of high mountains. It is a hot Country, but indifferently fruitful, producing some PIants, Trees and Bambous. It is divided into four districts, Aije, Namanda, Iga and Nabari. 2. Isie, otherwise Sesju, is three day's Journeys long, going from South to North. It is almost wholly q encompass'd by the Sea, but extreamly fruitful, with an | agreeable variety of hills and plains. It is divided into 15 districts, 'Quana, Asaki, Susuka, Itsisi, Aanki, Taato, NisIkissima, Gosasuma, Inabe, Mije, Ano, Itaka,Watakei, Ino, and Taki. 3. Ssima or, Sisio, is but a small Pro-V vince, which one may travel a-cross in half a day's time. It is a very barren Country, but the neighbouring Sea : supplies it pIentifully with fish, oysters, shells and the like. It hath but three districts, Toosij, Ako, and Kamesima. 4. Owari, otherwise Bisiu, is an inland Countra, entirely separate from the Sea, but one of the most fruitful Provinces of the whole Empire, and richly stock'd with Inhabitants. It is three day's Journeys long, going from South to North, and divided into nine districts Amabe, Nakassima, Kaquuri, Nirva, Kassungale, Jamada, Aitsi, Tsitta, and toosijnossima. 5. Mikawa, Otherwise Misiu, is a very barren and poor Country, with too many shallow Rivers and Ponds, which are very prejudicial to the growth of the GoKokf. It is one day's Journey and a haS long, going from East to West, and    [072]    divided into eight districts, Awoumi, Kamo, Nukada, Batz, Fori, Jana, Tsitarra, and Akumi. 6. Tootomi, otherwise Jensju, a very good and fruitful Country, and one of the pleasantest Provinces for a curious variety of Hills, Rivers, fertile Plains, Towns and Villages. Its length is suppos'd to be two days Journey and a half, going fFom East to West, and it is divided into I4 distrlcts, Fammana, Futz, Fuusa, Aratama, Nangakami, Nagassimo, Sutz, Jammana, Kikoo, Faifara, Tojota, Jamaka, Sanno, and Jwata. 7. Surunga, or Siusju, deserves likewise to be commended for the variety of its Towns, Vilfages, HitIs and fruitful Plains. It is of the same length with Tootomi, going from East to West, and divided into seven districts, Tsta, Masiasu, Udo, Itabe, Rofarra, Fusij and Suringa. 8. Kai, otherwise Kaisiu, and Ksjoohu. is a flat Country, and abounds in Rice, Fields and Pasturage, Plants and Trees. It breeds also some Cattle, chiefly Horses. It is two days Journeys long from South to North, and divided into four districts, Jamanassiro, Jaatzsiro, Coma and Tsur. 9. Idsu, or ToOsju, a long Peninsula, being almost surrounded by the Sea It affords a Iarge quantity of salt, and all sorts of fish, and is reckon'd in the main a tolerable good Country. It is pretty mountainous, with some flat ground, and some few rice fields. It hath but 3 districts upon the Continent of Nipon, Takato, Naka, and Camo, whereto are added two neighbouring Islands, OOsima, and Firaka- sima. 10. Sangami or SOOsiu, is three days Journe>-s long, a flat and barren Country, which affords hardly any thing for the sustenance of human life, but Tortesses, Fish and Crabs from the Sea, besides a good quantity of timber out of its large woods. It is divided into 8 districts Asikaranno Cami, Asikaranno Simu, Oosimi, Juringi, Ajikoo Takangi, Camakura, Mijura, and gesima. 11 Musasi, or Busiu, a very large Province having five days Journeys, and a half, in circumference. It is a flat Country, without woods and mountains, but very fruitful, abounding in Rice, GoKokf, Garden fruits, and Plants. It is divided into 21 districts, which are Kuraggi, Tsukuki, Tama, Tatsinbana, Kaikura, Iruma, Tosma, Fijki, Jokomi, Saitama, Kodama, Tsibu Sima, Fabara, Fasisawa, Naka, Kami, Adats, Tsitsubu, Jebara, Totesima, and Oosato. 12. Awa, otherwise FOOsiu, a middling good Country with mountains, hills, rivers, and plains, affording both rice and corn; It is tolerably well inhabited and plentifully supplied by the neighbouring Sea with fish and oysters, whose shells the inhabitants make use of to manure their ground. It is one day's Journey and a half long from South to North and divided into four districts, Fekuri, Awa, Asaima, and Nakaba. 13. Kadsusa, otherwise KoOsju is 3 days Xourneys long, going from South to North, a tolerable good Countr~~r, t-hough not without high rough mountains, great numbers of the Inhabitants get their livelyhood by weaving of Cannib, or Hempstuffs, which they understand very well. It is divided into ll districts, Ssussu, Amafa, Itsuwara, Umingami, Foiko, Mooki, Issimi, Farinib, Nagawa, Jammanobe, and    [073]    Mussa. 14. Simoosa, otherwise SeOsju, is said to be three day's journeys long going from South to North, a mountainous Country, indiferently fruitfill, but abounding in Fowis and Cattle. It is divided into 12 districts, Kaddosilmaw Tsibba, Imba, Sooma, Sasjuma, Iuuki Tooda, Koosa, Unagami, Katori, Fannibu, and Okanda. 15. Fitats, or Sjoo, a very large Province; my Author makes it almost square, and says that it is three day's Journeys long on each side. It is but a middling Country, as to its fruitfulness, but produces a great qualltity of Silkworms and Silk, of which there are several Manufactures establish'd there, as there are also of some other Things, the inhabitants being a very industrious people. They likewise carry on a trade with Cattle. It hath I I districts, Nijbari, Makaije, Tsukkumba, Kawaats, Ssida, Umbaraki, Namingata, Naka, Kussi, Taka, and Iengoko. Iengoko signifies a distant Country, by which is probably meant some neighbouring Island. The revenues of these 15 Provinces of the first large Tract call'd Tookaido, amount in all to 494 ManKokf.

ll . Toosando, that is, the Eastern mountainous Tract, hath 8 large Provinces within its compass, which are I . Oomi, an extraordinary good and fruitful Country, with variety of mountains, hills, rivers and fruitfill fields, producing both rice and corn, and affording to the Labourer a thousand-fold reward, (according to my Japanese Author's way of expressing the fruitfillness of; this Country). It hath three day's Journeys and a half in circumference, and is divided into 13 districts, Singa, Karimotto, Ius, Cammoo, Kansaki, Inungami, Sakatta, Jetz, the upper and lower Assai, Imito, Takassima, Kooka and Joositzumi. 2. Mino, or DiOsiu, is not inferior to the former, neither in an agreeable variety of hills and plains, nor in fertility, producing plenty of Rice, Corn, and GoKokf, and other necessaries of Iife. It is three day's Journeys long from South to North, and divided into 18 districts, Isijntsu, Fufa, Awadsi, Ikenda, Oono, Mottos, Mussijroda, Katakata, Atsumi, Kakumi, Iamangata, Muggi, Guundsjo, Camo, Cako, Tokki, Jenna, and Taki. 3. Fida, otherwise Fisju, falls far short of the two former, both in largeness, and fertility. Its utmost extent from South to North doth not exceed two days travelling. It abounds in woods and forests, and yields a great quantity of Firewood, and Timber for buildings. It hath but four districts, Ofarra, Masijnda, Ammano, and Araki.

4. Sinano, otherwise Sinsju, a very cold Country. ~~1t and fish are very scarce here, because of its great remote ness from the Sea; and it is not well provided with Cattle, by reason of its few pastures It is otherwise tolerably fruitful, and produces a good quantity of Mulberry trees, Silk, and Cannib, of which there are several good manufactures establish'd there. It is said to be five day's Journeys long from South to North, and is divided into I I districts, Midsutz, Takaij, Fannissina, Tsisagatta, Sacku, Ina, Ssuwa, Tsikumma, Atsumi, Sara and Sijna. 5. Koodsuke, otherwise DsiOsju, is    [074]    four day's Journeys long, going from East to West, a warm and tolerable good Country, producing plenty of Mulberry-trees, though the Silk, they yield, is not of the best sort, and the Stuffs brought from thence but coarse. It is divided into I4 districts, Ussui,Aassa, Ssikanne, Ssetta,Sai, Nitta, Kattaoka, Soora, Gumma, Kanva, Tago, Midorino, Naba, and Jammada. 6. Simoodsuke, or Jasiu, is three day's Journeys and a half, long, going from East to West, a tolerable good Country, not very mountainous, but rather flat, with abundance of Pasture-ground and Rice-fields, which plentifully supply it with Grass, Rice, Corn, and the GoKokf. It hath g districts, Askara, Janada, Aso, Tsuga, Taka, Sawingawa, Suwooja, Nasu, and Mukabe. 7. Mutsu, or OOsju, is by much the Iargest Province in Japan, being full 16 day's Journeys long from South to North. It is an extraordinary good and Eruitful Country, and wants nothing for the support of human life. This whole Province was formerIy subject to one Prince, together with the neighbouring Province Dewa, of which more hereafter. It is divided into 54 (and according to others 55) districts, Sijrakawa, Kurokawa, Juwasi, Mijaki, Aitz, Nama, Oda, ASaka, Adatz, Sibatta, Karida, Tooda, Natori, Sinnobu, Kikkunda, Sibanne, Assonusa, Namin gata~~ Iwadewaga, Kawatz, Fitzungi, Takano, Wattari, Tamadsukuri, Oonat-o, Kami, Ssida, Kuriwara, Jesan, Jeki, Misawa, Nagaooka, Tojone, Monowara, Oosika, Gunki, Kaddono, Fasikani, Tsungaru, Uda, Iku, Motojes, Isbara, Taidsi, Sikamma, Inaga, Siwa, Ivasaki, Kimbara, Kadsinda, Datte, Socka, Fei, and Kisen. 8 Dewa, otherwise Usju, is five day's Xourneys long, a very good Country, abounding in good pasture-ground, plants, and trees. It is said to have the Spring 15 days earlier than other Provinces. It belong'd fHormerly to Osju, but lS now a separate Province, divided into I 2 districts Akumi, Kawanobe, Murajama, Oitama, Ookatz, Firaka, Tangaira, Diwa, Akinda tauri, Senboku, Mogumi, and Jamamottu. Ale the revenues of these 8 Provinces amount to 563 Mangokf, according to the old Rentals, but at present they are considerably improv'd

lll. Foku Rokkudo, that is, the Northern Tract, hath 7 Provinces within its compass. I. Wackasa otherwise SiakusJu, is one day's Journey, and a half, long, going from South to North. It is limited to the North by the Sea, which pIentifully supplies it with Fish, Crabs, Tortoises and the like. It hath some Iron-mines, and is divided into three districts, Oonibu, Ooi, and Micatta. 2* Jetsissen, otherwise Jeetsju. Its Iength from South to North is of three days travelling. It is very mountainous towards the South, but more flat and fruitfill to the North, with abundance of good Pasture-ground, where the Inhabitants breed plenty of Cattle. It produces also Cannib, Mulberry-trees, and Silk, and the GoKokf very pRentifully. It is divided into 12 districts, Tsuruga, Nibu, Imadats, Asijba, Oono, Sakai, Kuroda, Ikingami, Takakida, Joosdsida, Sakagita, and Naandsjo. 3. Kaga, otherwise    [075]    Kasju, is two day's Journeys, and a half, long, going from East to West, a tolerabIe good Country, yielding as much of the GoKokf as is necessary for the sustenance of the Inhabitants. Some Silk manufactures are carried on here, and it aSords the best vinegar Sacki, and Soja, which are exported into other Provinces. It hath 4 districts, Jenne, Nomi, Isikawa, and Kanga, to which some add Kaboku. 4. Noto, otherwise SeOsju, is a sort of a Peninsula, almost wholly encompass'd by the Sea, and on this account plentifitlly supplied with fish and [122-124]

warm, Tract, is compos'd of eight Provinces, which are. I. Farima, otherwise Bansju, hath three days Journey's and a half in circumference, a very fruitful Country, producing in plenty all manner of necessaries. It hath several manufactures of Silk-stuSs, Paper and Cloth. It is divided into fourteen districts, Akas, Kata, Kamo, Inami, Sikama, Iwo, Akato, Saijo, Sitz, Kansaki, Taka, Mitzubo, Issai, and Itto. 2. MimaSaka, otherwise Sakusju, is three day's Xourneys long, going from East to West, a middling good Country,afording as much Fruits, Plants, Victuals, and Cloth as is necessary for the support of its Inhabitants. It is observ'd, as somewhat remarkable, that this Province is less subject to Winds, than any other in the Empire. It is divided into seven districts, Aida, Katzunda, Tomanisi, Tomafigasi, Khume, Ooba, and Masuma. 3. Bidsen, or Bisju, hath three day's Journeys in circumference, a middling good Country, producing plenty of Silk. Its Soil is pretty warm, and the produce of the fields and gardens are observ'd to ripen earlier, than in other Provinces. It is divided into ll districts Kosuma, Waki, Iwanasi, Ooku, AkoSaka, Kandatz, Minne, Ooas, Tsitaka, TsingOsima, and KamOsima 4. Bitsju, otherwise Fisin, is one day's Journey, and a half, long, going from East to West, a very good Coun -try, plentifulRy supply'd with all the necessaries of life. The GoKokf and Cannib in particular are extreamly cheap here. It is divided into 9 districts, Utz, Kaboja, Kaija, Simomitz, Assanguts,    [077]    Oda, Sitzuki, Teta and Fanga, to which are added two Islands SaburOsima, and Jorisima. 5. Bingo, otherwise Fisju, is somewhat more than two day's Journeys long, going from South to North, a middling good Country, plentifully supplied with Rice and GoKokf, which are likewise observ'd to ripen here: much earlier, than they do elsewhere. It is divided into I4 districts, Abe, Futsitz, Kamijsi, Asuka, Numasinıi, Bonitz, Asijda, Kooni, Mikami, Camidami, Mitsuki, Jesso, Sirra, and Mijwara. 6. Aki, otherwise Gesju, is two day's lourneys, and a half, long, going from South to North, a mountainous and barren Country. Upon thel690 Coasts they make Salt. Corn, Rice, and GoKokf will hardly grow here, but it abounds with woods and forests, which aford plenty of mushrooms. It is divided into 8. districts, Numada, Takatta, Tojoda, Sada, Cammo, Sabaku, Aki, Takamija, and IkuKussima, which last is the name of a place particularly famous in this Province. 7. Suwo or SeOsju, is three day's Journeys long, going from East to West, a middling good Country, abounding chiefly in pIants and good pasture ground. The Coasts aSord as much fish, Crabs, shells and other submarine substances as any other Province whatever. It is divided into six districts OOsimaX Kuka, Kunlade, Tsino, Sawa, and Jooski. 8. Nagata, otherwise TsiOsju, is two day's Journeys, and a half, long, from East to West, a middling good Country limited to the South and West by the Sea, to the North by a ridge of mountains. It produces GoKokf, Fish, Crabs, and other necessaries twice as much as there is requisite for the maintenance of the Inhabitants. It is divided into six districts, Atsa, Tojora, Mine, Ootz, Amu, and Misijma. The whole yearly revenue of these eight provinces amounts to a70. Mangokf.

Alt the several tracts of Land, Provinces antl districts, hitherto mention'd, belong to the great Island Nipon. I proceed now to the second Island, which is next to Nipon in Iargeness, and which is by the Japanese call'd Kiusju, the Western Country, and SaiKokf the Country of nine. This-oSers to our view the

VI. great tract of Land call'd, Saikaido, that is, the Western Coast Tract. It is compos'd of nine large Provinces. I. Tsikudsen, otherwise Tsikusiu, is from South to North four day's Journeys long, a middIing good Country, producing both Corn and Rice. It hath several Chinaware manufactures, and is divided into 2^$ districts, Sima, Kama, Jassijka, NOsima, Mikasa, Monagatta, Onka, Musiroda, Fonami, Sara, Naka, Cassija, Siaka, Musima, Ito, Musijro, Vutz, Kurande, NokOsima, Sinotz, Kasakura, Kamitzkasakura, Kokuf, and TAssai. 2. Tsikungo, [126-122]

crabs. It hath several Iron-mines, but not much good ground, and the GoKokf ripen considerably later, than in other Provinces. It is two day's Journeys, and a half, Iong, going from East to West, and is divided into four districts Bagui, Noto, Fukeesund, and Ssus. 5. Jeetsju, otherwise Jaessju, hath three day's Journeys in circumference, a tolerable good Country, pretty well supplied with GoKokf. A particular sort of earthen pots is made here. It affords also some wood, which is made use of particularlLy for bridges. It is divided into four districts, Tonami, Imidsu, Mebu, and Nijkawa. 6. Jetsingo, otherwise Jeesju, a large Province, having six day's Jour neys in circumference. It is very mountainous to the South, otherwise tolerably fruitful, producing Silk, Cannib, and the GoKokf, though not of the best sort. It is divided into seven districts, KabIki, Kof, Missima, Iwoodsi, Cambara, Nutari, and Iwafilne. 7. Sado, or Sasju, a pretty large Island of three day's Journeys and a half in circumference, situate to the North of Japan, just over against the two Provinces Jeetsju and Jetsingo. It is a very fruitful Island, plentifully supplied with Corn, Rice, and GoKokf. It hath also some Woods and good Pasture-ground. The Sea affords Fish, and Crabs. It is divided into three districts, Umo, Soota, and Camo. The yearly revenue of these seven Provinces amounts to 243 Mangokf.

IV. Sanindo, that is, the Northern mountainous, or .cold Tract, consists of eight Provinces. 1. Tanba, other wise Tansju, is two day's Journeys long, a middling good Country, producing plenty of Rice, besides several sorts of Pease and Pulse. It affords also some Fire-wood, and is divided into six districts, Kuwada, Funaji, Taki, Amada, Fingami, and Ikarunga. 2. Tango, otherwise Tansju, is one day's Journey and a half broad, going from South to North, likewise a middling good Country, where Silk and Cannib may be had at a very easy rate. It is plentifully supplied by the Sea with fish, crabs and the like. It is divided into five districts, Kaki, Joki, ;Tango, Katano, and Kumano. 3. Tasima, otherwise Tansju, is two day's Journeys long, going from East to West, a middling good Country, much like the two former, and divided into eight districts, Asami, Jabu, Idsu, Ketta, Kinnosaki, Flangaka, Sitzumi, and Mikummi. 4. Imaba, otherwise Insju, is much of the same length and degree of fruitfuiness with Tasima. It is limited to the North by the Sea, and on the South by a ridge of Moun- . tains. It hath several Manufactures of coarse Silk Stus, and is    [076]    divided into seven Provinces, Togomi, Jagami, Tsidsu, Oomi, Takaguso, Ketta, and Konno. 5. Fooki, otherwise Fakusju, is two day's Journeys, and a half, tong, going from South to North, a middling good Country, producing plenty of GoKokf, Cannib, and Silk, of which last there are several good Manufactures carried on here. It is divided into six districts, Kawamura, Kume, Jawata, Aneri, Oomi and Fino. 6. Idsumo, Otherwise Unsju, is two day's Journeys, and a half, broad, going from East to West, almost wholly encompass'd by the Corean Sea, after the manner of a Peninsula. It is a very fruitful Country, producing variety of Trees, Grass, and Plants. It hath also some Manufactures of coarse silk stuSs. It is divided into ten districts, IJu, Nomi, Semane, Akisika, Tattenni, Jadsumo, Kanto, Ijis, Ninda and Oofara. 7. Iwami, otherwise Sekisju, is two day's Journeys long going from South to North, a middling good Country, producing plenty of Cannib, and aSording some Salt. The Inhabitants give twice as much a year to their Prince, as they do in other Provinces. It is divided into five districts, Tsikama, Naka, Oots, Mino and Canoab. 8. Oki otherwise Insju, an Island erected into a Province, and situate in the Corean Sea, opposite to the Coasts of that Peninsula. It is a very barren Country, producing a few GoKokf. It hath two day's Journeys in circumf~erence, and is divided into five districts. All the yearly Revenues of these eight Provinces amount to Mangokf.

V. Sanjodo, that is, the Southern mountainous, or warm, Tract, is compos'd of eight Provinces, which are. I. Farima, otherwise Bansju, hath three days Journey's and a half in circumference, a very fruitful Country, producing in plenty all manner of necessaries. It hath several manufactures of Silk-stuSs, Paper and Cloth. It is divided into fourteen districts, Akas, Kata, Kamo, Inami, Sikama, Iwo, Akato, Saijo, Sitz, Kansaki, Taka, Mitzubo, Issai, and Itto. 2. MimaSaka, otherwise Sakusju, is three day's Xourneys long, going from East to West, a middling good Country,afording as much Fruits, Plants, Victuals, and Cloth as is necessary for the support of its Inhabitants. It is observ'd, as somewhat remark able, that this Province is less subject to Winds, than any other in the Empire. It is divided into seven districts, Aida, Katzunda, Tomanisi, Tomafigasi, Khume, Ooba, and Masuma. 3. Bidsen, or Bisju, hath three day's Journeys in circumference, a middling good Country, producing plenty of Silk. Its Soil is pretty warm, and the produce of the fields and gardens are observ'd to ripen earlier, than in other Provinces. It is divided into ll districts Kosuma, Waki, Iwanasi, Ooku, AkoSaka, Kan datz, Minne, Ooas, Tsitaka, TsingOsima, and KamOsima 4. Bitsju, otherwise Fisin, is one day's Journey, and a half, long, going from East to West, a very good Coun -try, plentifulRy supply'd with all the necessaries of life. The GoKokf and Cannib in particlllar are extreamly cheap here. It is divided into 9 districts, Utz, Kaboja,; Kaija, Simomitz, Assanguts,    [077]    Oda, Sitzuki, Teta and Fanga, to which are added two Islands SaburOsima, and Jorisima. 5. Bingo, otherwise Fisju, is somewhat more than two day's Journeys long, going from South to North, a middling good Country, plentifully supplied with Rice and GoKokf, which are likewise observ'd to ripen here: much earlier, than they do elsewhere. It is divided into districts, Abe, Futsitz, Kamijsi, Asuka, Numasimi,; Bonitz, Asijda, Kooni, Mikami, Camidami, Mitsuki, Jesso, Sirra, and Mijwara. 6. Aki, otherwise Gesju, is two day's lourneys, and a half, long, going from South ;

[125]    to North, a mountainous and barren Country. Upon the Coasts they make Salt. Corn, Rice, and GoKokf will hardly grow here, but it abounds with woods and forests, which aford plenty of mushrooms. It is divided into 8. districts, Numada, Takatta, Tojoda, Sada, Cammo, Sabaku, Aki, Takamija, and IkuKussima, which last is the name of a place particularly famous in this Province. 7. Suwo or SeOsju, is three day's Journeys long, going from East to West, a middling good Country, abounding chiefly in pIants and good pasture ground. The Coasts aSord as much fish, Crabs, shells and other submarine substances as any other Province whatever. It is divided into six districts OOsimaX Kuka, Kunlade, Tsino, Sawa, and Jooski. 8. Nagata, otherwise TsiOsju, is two day's Journeys, and a half, long, from East to West, a middling good Country limited to the South and West by the Sea, to the North by a ridge of mountains. It produces GoKokf, Fish, Crabs, and other necessaries twice as much as there is requisite for the maintenance of the Inhabitants. It is divided into six districts, Atsa, Tojora, Mine, Ootz, Amu, and Misijma. The whole yearly revenue of these eight provinces amounts to a70. Mangokf.

Alt the several tracts of Land, Provinces antl districts, hitherto mention'd, belong to the great Island Nipon. I proceed now to the second Island, which is next to Nipon in Iargeness, and which is by the Japanese call'd Kiusju, the Western Country, and SaiKokf the Country of nine. This-oSers to our view the

VI. great tract of Land call'd, Saikaido, that is, the Western Coast Tract. It is compos'd of nine large Provinces. Tsikudsen, otherwise Tsikusiu, is from South to North four day's Journeys long, a middIing good Country, producing both Corn and Rice. It hath several Chinaware manufactures, and is divided into 2^$ districts, Sima, Kama, Jassijka, NOsima, Mikasa, Monagatta, Onka, Musiroda, Fonami, Sara, Naka, Cassija, Siaka, Musima, Ito, Musijro, Vutz, Kurande, NokOsima, Sinotz, Kasakura, Kamitzka sakura, Kokuf, and TAssai. ~~. Tsikungo, otherwise Tsikusju, is from South to Morth five day's Journeys long, a tolerable good Country producing corn, rice and pease in great plenty; The Coasts aflTord fish, crabs and shelis. A great deal of sweetmeat is made here and exported into other Provinces. It is divided into IO districts, Mijwara, Mij, Ikwa, Mi, Mike, Kandsima, SimodLsima, Jammacando, Jammaseta, and Takeno. 3. Budsen, or FoOsju, is four day's Journeys long    [078]    from South to North, a tolerable good Country, particularly famous for producing extraordinary good medicinal plants. Great numbers of Silk manufactures are carried on in this Province, some of which the Prince takes in part of payment for his Revenue. It is divided into 8 districts, Tanpwa, Sakku, Mijako, Nakatz, TsuIki, Kamitzki, Simotzkl, and Usa'. 4. Bungo, otherwise FoOsju, is three day's Journeys long middling fruitil. It affords silk from its Mulberry-trees, cloth, hemp, GoKokf, and some scarce medicinal plants. It is divided into 8. districts, Fita, Kees, Nawori, Oono, Amabe, Ookata, Faijami and Kunisaki. 5. Fidsen, otherwise Fisju, is from South to North full five day's Journeys long, a good, and middling fruitful, Country, besides the produce of corn and rice, pIentifully stored with fish and fowls. It hath also some Cloth manufactures, and is divided into 11. districts, Kickij, Jabu, Mine, Ooki, Kansoki, Saaga, Maatsura, Kissima, Fusitz, Kadsuraki and Takaku. 6. Figo otherwise Fisju hath about five day's Journeys in circumference, a middling fruitful Country, aSording pIenty of firewood, and wood for building, as also corn, pease, fish, crabs, and other necessaries, as much as will supply the want of the Inhabitants. It is divided into fourteen districts, Tamana, Jamaga, Jamamatto, Kikutz, Aso, Takuma, Kuma, Aida MasIki, Udo, Jaadsiro, Koos, Amakusa, and Asskita. 7. Fiugo, otherwise NisJu, is about three day's Journeys long, a poor Country, mountainous, and producing hardly what corn, rice, and fruits are necessary for the sustenance of its Inhabitants; some few Mulberry trees grow there. It is divided into five districts, Uski, Koiju, Saka, MijaSaka, and Morokata. 8. Oosumi, otherwise GusJu, is from East to West two day's Journeys long, a smal0, but fruitful province, plentifully supplied with all the necessaries of life, partlcuIarIy such as the Sea aSords. There is a great quantity of Paper made here, and some few silk stuITs. It divided into eight districts, Oosumi, FiSingari, Kuwabara, Soo, Sijra Kimodsuki, Komadsij, and Kumagge, to which is added the neighbouring Island Tanegasima. 9. Satzuma, or Satsju, is much of the same length with the former, middling fruitful, producing chiefly MuIberrytrees and hemp. It hath a I^ew cloth manufactures, but the cloth is very good. It can filrnish other Provinces with Hemp. It is divided into fourteen districts, Idsumi Takaki, Satzuma, Feki, Isa, Ala, Kawanobe, Jene, Juumaki, Fire, Fani, Jamma, OkinokOsima, and Kosskisima. The yearly revenue of these nine Provinces amounts to 344 Mangokf.

An Island of the third magnitude, which lies between the two former, and is by the Japanese call'd SiKokf, that 1S, the Country of four, viz. Provinces, together with the neighbouring Island Awadsi, situate to the N. E. of SiKokf, and the great Province Kijnokuni, which stands out from the Continent of Nipon, make up the seventh large Tract of Land, which is by the Japanese call'd    [079]     

Vll. Nankaido, that is, the Tract of the Southern Coasts. It is compos'd of the six following Provinces. 1. Kijnokuni, otherwise Kisju, is four day's Journeys, and a half, long, going from South to lforth, a flat and barren Country, wash'd by the Sea, on three sides and producing neither corn and rice, nor pease and pulse. It is divided into seven districts, Ito, Naka, Nagusa, Amabe, Arida, Fitaka, and Muro. 2. Awadsi, an Island of about a day's Journey in length, in the main very barren, aSording however cloth, fish, and salt, as much as there is necessary for the maintenance of the Inhabitants. It hath but two districts, Tsina and Mijwara, to which are added two of the chief neighbouring Islands Mussima and Jesima. q. Awa? otherwise Asju, is two day's Journeys long, a

[128]    middling good Country, somewhat mountainous, and plentifully stor'd with cattle, fowl, fish, crabs and shells. It is divided into nine districts, Miosi, Ojen, Nafingasi, Nanisi, Katsura, Naka, Itano, Awa, and Mima. 4. Sanuki, otherwise Jamasijro, is three day's Journeys Iong, going from East to West, a middling good and fruitffil Country, with variety of rivers, mountains and fields, producing rice, corn, pease and pulse. The Sea affords plenty of fish and crabs. This Province is famous for having given birth to several great and eminent Men. It is divided into eleven districts, Owutsi, Samin awa, MIki, Mino, Jamada, Kanda, Ano, Utari, Naka, Tado, and Kako. 5. Ijo, otherwise JOsju, is two day's Journeys long, a middling good Country, mountainous in some parts, flat in others, some of the fields being sandy, others producing rice, hemp, mulberrytrees, grass and plants. Some salt is made upon the Coasts. It is divided into fourteen districts, Nij Sucli, Kuwamira, Ootz, Kasafaja, Nooma, Tsike, Otsumi, Kume, Fuke, Jio, Kita, Uwa, and Uma. 6. Tosa, otherwise TOsju, is two day's Journeys long going from East to West, a middling good Country, supplied with plenq of pease and pulse, wood, fruits, and several other necessaries of Life. It is divided into seven Provinces, Tosa, Agawa, Taka, Oka, Fata, Nanaoka, Katasima and Kami. The yearly Revenue of these six Provinces amounts to I40 Mangokf.

There remain still two other Islands not hitherto mention'd, which were conquer'd, and annex'd to the Empire of Japan, in the late War with the Inhabitants of Corea. They are call'd IkiTsussima, both their names being put together, and have now a Prince of their own, having been {ormerly subject to the Prince, or petty King, of Satzuma. The first of these two Islands is Iki, otherwise Isju; it is a day's Journey long, and hath two districts, Iki, and Isijda. The second Island is Tsussima, otherwise Taisju; this is somewhat larger than the former, and likewise divided into two districts, Akata, and Simoakata, that is, upper and lower Akata. The fruitfulness >of these Islands is said not to be very considerabIe, but they say, that some foreign Curiosites are to be seen there    [080]    and the number of Idols worship'd by the Inhabitants is much talk'd of. The yearly revenue of these two Islands amounts to 3 Man, and 5000 Kokf

The whole Revenue of all the Islands and Provinces belonging to the great Empire of Japan, makes up in all a yearly Sum of Man, and 6200 Kokf, according to the account above given. My Japanese Author however puts it only at Mangokf.

Tho' it be not a proper pIace here to enter into particuIars concerning the Government of the Japanese Empire, its provinces, and districts, yet for the better understanding of my History it seems necessary, that before I proceed any filrther, somewhat should be said on this Head. The whole Empire, in general, is govern'd by the Emperor, with an absolute and monarchical Power and so is every Province in particular, by the Prince who under the Emperor enjoys the government thereof. The present Kubo, or secular Monarch, is Tsinajos, fourth Successor, and Great Grandson of Jejassama, first Emperor of the now reigning Family, who usurp'd the Throneupon the lawful Heir, and reign'd about the beginnin of the t6th Century. Tsinajos hath the character of a severe, but just and prudent Monarch. He inherited from his ancestors along with the Crown, an absolute and unlimited Power over all his Subjects, fFom the meanest extraction up to the highest rank. Even the greatest Princes, and Lords of the Empire, are so far his vassals that he can disgrace, exile and deprive them of their lives and dominions, as he pleases, or as he thinks, the peace and welfare of the Empire requires, or their crimes deserve.

ParticuIar Provinces are govern'd by hereditary Princes, call'd Daimio, which signifies High-named, that is, Princesand Lords of the highest rank. Some of these have found means by force of Arms to enlarge their dominions Thus the Prince of Satzuma made himself master of ttie two neighbouring Provinces, Oosumi and FEugo, and the Prince of Canga of the neighbouring Province Noto, on which account these two Princes are said to be the most powerfill in the E:mpire.

The Lords of smaller districts are call'd Siomio, well named, Lords of an inferior rank. Their dominions whether they be Islands, as Goto, Firando, Amakusav Matsaki, and several others, or situate upon the continent of the three chief Islands, composing the Empire of Japan, are mention'd in the list of the 66 great Provinces, each under that Province whereto they belong, or in which they lie A11 the Siomio are so far subject to the Emperor, that they are allow'd but six Months stay in their hereditary dominions. The other half year they must spend in the Imperial Capital Jedo, where their wives and families are kept all the year round, as Hostages of their Fidelity.    [081]     

Some of these smaller districts are Imperial demesns, or Crown Lands, either, because they have been appropriated of old for the support of the Gown, or because in success of time, as occasion ofFer'd, they were taken from their hereditary possessors by way of punishment, and annexed thereunto, it having been always one of the chief political maxims follow'd by the Emperors of Japan, to maintain themselves in peaceable possession of the Throne, by splitting large dominions into several small ones, and by endeavouring, by all possible means, to weaken the power and authority of the Princes of the Empire. The largest of these Crown Lands are govern'd by what they call, Bugios, acting in the nature of Lieutenants, the smaller ones by Daiquans, as they are call'd, or Stewards. All the revenues must be brought into the Emperor's Excheouer.

 

Chap. VI. The Author's opinion of the true Origin and Descent of the Japanese.

IT hath been the constant opinion of most European Geographers, that the Japanese are originally of Chinese Extraction, descended from the Inhabitants of that mighty Empire. This opinion isgroundedupon the following two Stories, which were brought out of the East by European travellers. The first is: It once happen'd in China, that several Families conspired against the Emperor. Upon discovery of the Plot, it was order~~d, that all those, who had any hand in it, should be put to death without mercy. But the number of accomplices being so extensive, that at Iast the Executioners themselves grew weary of shedding so much bIood, the aSairwas againlaid before the Emperor who thereupon resolv'd, that their sentence of death should be converted into transportation and banishment into the neighbouring, then rude and uninhabited, Islands of Japan, which they peopled, and thereby became the Progenitors of that numerous and powerfilI Nation, they are now inhabited by. The second Story hath been reported as follows. One of the Emperors of China unwilIing to part with his Empire, and all that grandeur and Power he was possess'd of, within the short term human tife is limited to, endeavour'd to find out, if possibIe, some universal Medicine, which couId make him immortal; on this account he sent expert and able Men into all parts of the World. Among the rest, one of his chief Physicians persuaded him, that the proper Ingredients for such a Mediane were, to his knowledge to be met with in the    [082]    neighbouring IsIands of Japan, but that they were of so tender and singuIar a Structure, that they wouId wither, and lose their Virtues, if touch'd by any other, but chast and pure, hands. And the better to execute this design, he propos'd that 300 young Men, and so many young Women, all of a strong and healthful constitution, shou'd be carried over thither, which accordingly he did himself, though far from having any real intention to satisfy his Sovereign, but rather out of a desire to escape his Tyranny, to settle in happier climes, and to people these then uninhabited Islands. As to the first of these two Stories, Linschoot is the author of it; but he not acquainting his Reader what authority he had for it, or how he came by it, and there being not the least mention made, neither in Chinese, nor Japanese Histories, of any such Conspiracy, it deserves no credit, but ought to be entirely rejected, as forged and fabulous.- But as to the second, the coming over of a Chinese Physician with so many young FeMen, and young NVomen, the same is not at all denied by the Japanese; nay, far from it, they still shew a place upon Khumano (So they call the Southern Coasts of the Pro vinces) Kiinokuni, and some neighbouring Provinces, where he landed, and afterwards settled with his gallant Collony, and the remains of a temple, which was there erected to his memory, for having brought over to them from China good manners, and useful arts and sciences. As to the occasion of his coming over, it is recorded in Japanese Histories, that there was great search made after an universal Medicine, during the reign of the Emperor Si, or Sikwo, or as the vulgar pronounce it, Sino Sikwo. This Emperor was one of the three Chinese Nero's, Sinosko, Ketzuwo, and Thuwo, whose memory will be for ever abhor'd. He not only govern'd his Empire with unpanllel'd Tyranny, but liv'd with the greatest pride, and most profuse magnificence imaginable, of which there are several remarkable instances mentioned in the History of his Life. He caus'd once a large Spot of Ground to be dug up for a Lake, and having order'd it to be fill'd with Chinese Beer, he sail'd over it in stately Barges. He caused a stately Palace, nam'd Kojaku, to be built for his residence, the floors whereof were pav'd with Gold and Silver, and the whole Building of such an extent, that the Emperor Kooll, who usurp'd the throne upon his Grandson whom he put to death,with all the Imperial Family, having set it on fire, it burnt in the ashes for the space of three Months, which memorable event gave birth to a Proverb wherebytheJapanese express the sudden changes,andshort duration, human grandeur and happiness are liable to. 'Twas this Emperor, who out of a strong desire for ever to enjoy the Empire, order'd that great search should be made after a Medicine, which could render him immortal. If it be therefore under his Reign, the abovesaid Physician went over into Japan with his Colony, it must be granted to the Japanese, that they came by much too late to be the    [083]    Progenitors of their Nation, which was then already govern'd by Koken, their eighth Monarch; for the arrival of the Chinese was in the 7th year of the reign of Koken, 453 years after Synmu, first Emperor of Japan, and before the birth of our Saviour, the very same year in which Sinosikwo died in the 50th year of his age. Since therefore these two Stories are by no means a sufficient proof, that the Japanese Nation is descended from the Chinese, it will not be amiss to enquire, whether it be not possible to assign it another more probable origin.

It is unquestionably true, that languages, and their proprieties, are as sure and certain marks, as perhaps it is possible to produce, whereby to discern, and trace out, not only the true origin of a Nation, but likewise to find out, how in success of time it increased, by being, as it were, incorporated with other Nations. Of this most Buropean Nations afford us evident proofs. Thus, for Instance, we may easily find by the language alone, that the Polanders, Bohemians and Muscovites are of Slavonian extraction; that the Italians, French and Spaniards descend from the Romans; that the Germans, low Dutch, Danes and Swedes, are the ospring of the ancient Goths. Nay, we may go still filrther, and assert, that the languages alone of several nations, and proper considerations thereupon, will qualify and enable us to form probable conjectures, what revolutions happen'd among them, whether, and what neighbouring nations they were conquer'd by, as also, whether, and how from time to time they increas'd b) fresh supplies and colonies from foreign parts: For it may be laid down as a constant rule, that in proportion to the number of strangers, who come to settle and live in a Country, words of the tongue spoke by them will be brought into the language of that Country, and by degrees, as it were, naturaliz'd, and become so familiar to the Natives, as if they had been of their own growth. The number of German, French, and Danish words, in the English language, doth it not evidently prove, that England was successively conquer'd by the Danes, lower Saxons and French. Not even the Latin Tonzue was abIe to preserve its purity, but Greek words were Seely, and in great number, adopted into it, after the Romans became Master of that Country, then the seat of learning and politeness. The language now spoke in Transilvania hath a considerable mixture both of the Latin and neighbouring Hungarian. The language of the Inhabitants of Semigallia, (a small Country near Russia) is compos'd of the Lettish,Slavonian andLatin. The same observation holds true in other parts of the World, as well as in Europe. John de Barros in his Decades, and Flaccourt in his History of Madagascar assure us, that the language spoke by the Inhabitants of that large African Island, is filll of Javan and Malagan words, as remaining-proofs of the trade and commerce, which these two Nations, about aooo years ago the richest and most powerful of Asia, had    [084]    carried on with Madagascar, where they settled in great numbers. The language spoke in the Peninsula Crimea, or Taurica Chersonesus, in Asia, still retains many German words, brought thither, as is suppos'd by a colony of Goths, who went to settle there about 850 years after the Deluge. The late Mr. Busbeq, who had been Imperial Ambassador at the Ottoman Port, collected and publish'd a great number of these words in his fourth letter; and in my own travels through that Country I took notice of many more. If we were better acquainted with the languages of the Javans, Ceylonese, Malabarians, Siamites, and other Indian Nations, they would doubtless enable us, to trace out their origin, mixture with their neighbours and the revolutio1ls that happen'd among them. But to apply, what hath been said, nearer to our purpose, I may venture to affirm, that if the Japanese language was to be throughly, and most rigorously examin d into, we would find it entirely pure, and free from all mixture with the languages of their neighbours, at least to such a degree, as would give room to conjecture an original descent from them. By their neighbours I mean chiefly the Chinese, who inhabit the gu gtEastern maritime provinces of that Empire, and carry on a commerce to Japan. They speak three diferent languages, according to the three chief Provinces they belong to, which are Nanking, Tsiaktsju, and Foktsju. Now a native of Japan doth not understand one word of either of these languages, excepting the names of a few things, which were brought by the Chinese into Japan along with the things themselves, and which conclude no more for an originaldescent of the Japanese from China, than some few Portuguese words, as Pan, palma, botan, Cappa, frasco, bidou, tante, and a few more, still left there, would be allow'd a sufficient proof, of the Japanese being originally descended from the Portuguese. Nor was the number of Chinese, who came from time to time to settIe in Japan, ever considerable enough to occasion any remarkable alteration in the Mother-tongue of the Japanese, tho' they could, and actually did communicate and introduce among them the arts and sciences, which had long before flourished in China, nay even the knowIedge of the learned and significant Character language of that Country, which 1S likewise receiv'd in Corea, Tunquin and other neighbouring Kingdoms, much after the same manner as the Latin is in most European Countries. But besides, there are two other essential proprieties of a language, I mean the construction and pronunciation, in the 3apanese language so entirely difFerent from that of the Chinese, that there is no room left to think that these two Nations gave birth to each other. And first as to the construction and way of writing, the Chinese set their characters one below another in a row, without any intermediate particles to connect them: The Japanese indeed do the same, but the genius of their language requires besides, that the words and characters shoul~~ be sometimes transpos'd, sometimes joined together by    [085]    other words and particles, particularly invented for this purpose, and which are so absolutely necessary, that even in reprinting the books of the Chinese, they must be added, to enable their people to read and to understand them. And as to the pronunciation, that also is vastly different in both languages, whether we consider it in generat, or with regard to particular letterss and this diference is so remarkable, that it seems the very instruments of voice are diferently form'd in the Japanese, than they are in the Chinese. The pronunciation of the Japanese language, s in general, is pure, articulate and distinct, there being seldom more than two or three letters (according to our Alphabet) combin'd together in one syllable; that of the Chinese on the contrary, is nothing but a confilsed noise of many consonants pronounc'd with a sort of a singing accent, very disagreeable to the Ear. The same diference appears with regard to particular letters. Thus the Chinese pronounce our letter H. very distinctly, but the Japanese can give it no other sound, but that of an F. Again the Japanese pronounce the letters R and D, very distinctly, of which the Chinese, particularly those of Nanking, always make an L, even such as are otherwise well t skUl'd in the European languages. I could give several other instances of this kind, anj further shew, that, what hath been observ'd of the diference between the Chinese and Japanese languages, holds equally true with regard to the languages spoken in Corea and Jedso, compared with that ot the Natives of Japan, but it is needless to give the Reader, and myself, so much trouble, the rather since no body ever pretended to draw the original descent of the Japanese from either of these two Nations.

Another argument against the descent of the Japanese from the Chinese, I could draw from the difference Of the Religion of both Nations. If the Japanese were a Colony of the Chinese, they would have doubtless brought over from thence, into the uninhabited Islands of Japan, the Religion and Worship of their ancestors, and propagated the same upon their posterity. But this appears qulte otherwise. The old, and probab1y, original Religion of the Japanese, which is by them call'd Sintos, and the Gods and Idols, worship'd by its adherents, Sin, and Came, is peculiar only to this Empire, nor hath it ever been admitted of, nor their Gods acknowledged and worship'd, nor the religious way of life of the Japanese followed by the Chinese, or indeed any other heathen Nation. It was besides the only one establish'd in Japan during a succession of many ages. For the foreign pagan doctrine of Siaka, which the Japanese now call Bupo, or Budsdo, and the Gods which it commands to worship, Buds and Fotoge, tho' ever since its early beginnings it met with uncommon success, and speedily spread over the best part of Asia, yet it was not introduc'd into Japan till sixty six years afzter our Saviour's nativity under the reign of the Emperor Synnin, when it was brought over from Corea. And although    [086]    afterwards, through the connivance of the Japanese monarchs, it was successfully propagated by several missionaries, who came over from China, and the neighbouring Kingdoms, and speedily spread all over the Empire, yet it never could prevail so far, as to banish the respect and veneration for the old religion of their ancestors out of the minds of a constant and stedfast Nation. On the contrary, the more the Bupo doctrine got ground, the more pains were taken for the preservation of the Sintos worship, by embellishing the same with new Gods, Temples, festivals and fables.

What hath been infer'd from the diference of religion against the original descent of the Japanese from China, could be filrther supported by the wide diference there isbetween the Characters anciently used by both Nations, I mean the gross and rude Common Characters, as they call them, of the Japanese, and the simple and plain Images of the Chinese. But this being an argument of less moment, I will not insist upon it, and only mention in a few words two other remarkable diferences.

And first I could plainly shew, that the Japanese greatly difFer from the Chinese, in their civil customs and way of life, as to eating, drinking, sleeping, dressing, shaving of the head, saluting, sitting, and many more. Secondly the very inclinations of the mind are remarkably different in both Nations. The Chinese are peaceable, modest, great lovers of a sedate, speculative and philosophical way oflife, but wlthal very much glven to rraud and usury. The Japanese on the contrary are war-like, inclin'd to rebellions and a dissolute life, mistrustful, ambitious, and always bent on high designs.

By what hath been hitherto observ'd, it appears plainly, that the Japanese are an original Nation, at least that they are not descended of the Chinese. The difficulty now remaining to be clear'd up, is' how, and from what parts of the world, to trace out their true original descent. In order to this we must go up higher, and perhaps it is not inconsistent with reason, and the nature of things, to assert, that they are descended of the first Inhabitants of Babylon, and that the Japanese language is one of those, which Sacred Writs mention, that the all-wise Providence hath thought fit, by way of punishment and confusion, to infuse into the minds of the vain builders of the Baby lonian Tower. This at least seems to me the most probable conjecture, whatever way they went into Japan, or whatever time they spent upon this their first peregrination. Nay considering the purity of the Japanese language, I'- may pursue my conjectures, and further affirm, that they cannot have spent much time on their first Journey to Japan, for as much as we cannot suppose, that they made any considerable stay in any one Country, or with any one people then existing, without granting at the same time, that in all probability they would have adopted some words of the language of that nation into their own, of which yet it would be found upon    [087]    examination to be entirely free, contrary to what we find in all European and most Eastern languages, known to us, which seem to have been from their very bevinning so throughly mix'd and confounded, that there is scarce any, but what hath some words of another though never so remote. If then our Japanese Colony did reach that part of the World, which Divine providence assign'd for their future abode, as soon as the Chinese, Tunquinese, and other neighbouring Nations did theirs, it must be suppos'd that they fortunately fell in with such a road, as couId with safety and speed bring them to the Eastern extremities of Asia, from whence there is liut a short W passage over to Japan. In order therefore to trace out what road it is probable they took, we must consider the first Babylonians in the condition, they were in, after that dreadful confusion of Languages, wholly disappointed from going on with their vain design, and brought to the fatal necessity to part with each other, and to be dispers'd all-over the world. And in order to this let us suppose. That among the diferent parties there arose in all likelyhood a strong emulation to chuse for their filture abode such Countries, as were not only fruitfill and delightful, but thought to be less exposed to the invasion of other parties, elther because of their commodious situation towards the Sea, or between large Rivers, and high mountains, or by reason of their great distance. And in this regard it is highly probable, that such Countries, as were very remote, but situate under a temperate CIimate, became not the last inhabited. This seems to be the case of the Empire of Japan, whose remoteness, as well as its fruitfillness, and pleasant situation, between 30 and 40 degrees of Northern latitude, could fully answer all the ex pecta ti o ns of a first Colo ny . B u t seco n dly let us suppose that the chief care of these first colonies, in their search for a Country fit for their habitation, must needs have been to follow such roads, and tracts of land, where [140-142]

whom the great Conqueror Sinchis Cham (a Prince, who well deserved a Plutarch, or Quintus Curtius, to write the History of his Life, Conquests and heroic Actions) sent out upon an expedition into Poland, and who, not meeting with all the expected success, chose rather to stay, and to people the then as yet uninhabited Pontus, than to return without honour and victory. I must silently pass over many other branches of the same race, which fell by degrees under the dominion of some neighbouring, chiefly Northern, Nations, with whom they were in success of time so thoroughly mix'd and incorporated, that even the very foot-steps of their original descent would have been lost, were it not for some few remains of their former Language. I will only add, that the famous Tamerlan was an Usbekian Scythe, and that the Ottoman Emperor, the great Mogul, and the King of Sopra are all of Turco man extraction. Thus much of the Turks and Usbecks. In order now to come nearer to our purpose, I will avoid speaking of those Companies, which went along the River Inike, or from the source of the River Obij down the same towards the Tartarian Ocean, and became the first Progenitors of the Tartarian Nations living in those parts. Nor will I pretend at present to determine, what way the Chinese Colony took in their Journey to China. It is only six months travelling from the coasts of the Caspian Sea to the boarders of China. Jagen Andasen in his voyage to China in I 647, did not stay longer. Two Tartarian Merchants, whom I convers'd with at Astracan, and who had been several times in China, gave me the following account of their Journey thither. They went from Astracan over the Caspian Sea, (which they took to be aoo miles long, and 150 broad) to Seratsijk in t5Sdays, from thence by Land to Urgentz, the Residence of an Usbeskian Prince in 5 days, from thence to Bochau in days, travelling through a wild large desart: From Bochau there are two different ways, whereof Travellers may chuse which they please. The one going over Casger was then infested with Rovers, so they took to the other, which awross a well inhabited Country brought them to Taaskend in days, thence to Oxiend in 7 days, thence to Kaasker the Capital of Turkistaan, and the chief Town between Buchara and Katai, in (this number was omitted in the original) days, thence to Tsutsijk the first frontier Town of Kattai in 30 days, thence to Hamtsijk in 5 days, thence to the great wall of Kattai, Chatai, or China, in 60 days, travelSng through a well-inhabited Country, and lastly from the great wall to Cambalu, or Peking, the Capital of China, and Residence of the Chinese Emperor, in 10 days, compleating the whole Journey within six months time. A Calmuckian Merchant of the retinue of a Calmuckian Prince's Ambassador to the King of Persia, whom I knew at Ispahan, where he otfer'd me to sale the root Taichuun,that is great yellow root,or Rhubarb,which he had brought himselt out of China, gave me the journal of his voyage from Mienkisilaag to the great wall of China thus. He went from MienkisiIaag to Dsiem in 20 days, from thence to Gilgaas, where they cross a large river, in 15 days, from thence to Torkai in a few days, thence to Milantsij in 10 days, thence to Toktan in 10 days, thence to Tsienrehsu in 5 days, thence to Isijel in 10 days, thence to Kalah in 4 days, thence to Balane in 6 days thence to Karbokatai in 10 days, thence to the great vvati of China in 9 days, travelling through a desart and uninhabited Country, where he met only a few Tartarian Shepherds dwelling under black Tents. Mienkisilaag signifies, in the country language, hundred winter-quarters, or resting places. It is an Island situate on the Eastern Coasts of the Caspian Sea, near 45 degrees of Northern Latitude, and the residence of Ajukeh, the Prince of the Calmuckian Tartars living in those parts, who expell'd the Turks, or Turcomans, out of their Country, and forc'd them to depart even Som the Caspian Shores. After all I think it no ways probable, that the first Chinese went into China through such desart and barren Countries, where travellers are oftentimes necessitated to carry the necessary provisions of water and victuals along with them. [144-140] in the mean time, they could be provided with the neces saries of Iife. This intention could scarce be answer'd more eSectually, than by travelling, either along the Sea Coasts, or, and with more probabUity, along great rivers and lakes, where they could be supplied with fish for their own nourishment, with sweet water to quench their thirst, and where thev were like to meet with good pasture ground their Cattle, till at last they alighted at a Country, where they thought they could settle with safety and convenience.

If therefore the dreadful confusion of Tongues at Babylon, brought its Inhabitants, as indeed it must have done, to an lndispensable necessity to part one with another, and to be dispers'd all-over the world, such parties as spoke the same language, keeping together, and settling in what country they best lik'd, we may take it for granted, that not a few went towards the neighbouring Black and Caspian Seas, and that by this means the country of Hircania, tvhich is situate between the Caucasus and Caspian Shores, as the best and most    [088]    delightful spot of Persia, became first inhabited, as did soon after the neighbouring fruitfial Countries, situate between the Black and Caspian Seas. Such as intended, or thought it expedient, to pursue their journey further, met here with two different ways, one up the Rivers Tanais, and Wolga to the North, the other along the Eastern Shores of the Caspian Sea into Asia. It is foreign to my present purpose to shew what became of the former. And as to those that went along the Eastern Caspian Coasts, they must have at last reach'd to the mouth of the great river Oxus, or Dsiehuun, where it discharges it self into the Caspian Sea, and if we suppose that they follow'd that river up to its source, it was then no very difficult matter for them to penetrate into the very midst of India, where they must have soon met with the source of the rivers Indus and G3nges, and going down the difFerent branches of it, got into Indostan, Bengala, Pegu, Siam and other neighbour ing Kingdomss much easier and safer, than if they had been obIig'd to travel over the barren,and still uninhabited, Maharounian mountains, or to cross the large desarts of Siftuun and SaabIestuun. Even to this day, travellers going from Ispahan to Candahar chuse rather to go through Mesihed, a fourney of 375 miles, than to take the shortest road, which is but 250 miles, a-cross these wild and dangerous desarts. But to return to the Caspian Sea, before I carry off our Japanese Colony from thence on their Journey to Japan, I must beg leave to make a short digression in favour of a famous and valiant Nation of the 1 urks, or Turcomans and Usbeks, as they are now call'd, which settled upon its Eastern and North Eastern Coasts. Turk signifies a Shepherd, and Turkestaan, a Shepherd's Country. Jusbeek is as much as to say, Hundred Lords, which seems to imply, that the Country of Usbeck was once govern'd by so many Princes. Both Nations have the same language, the same religion, the same manners and customs, and must therefore be Iook'd upon as originally one, on which we may deservedly bestow the gIorious epithets of being a mother of many Nations, a nurse of illustrious Heroes, and a stem of mighty lMonarchs. They spread from the North Eastern coasts of the Caspian Sea, between 40 and 50 degrees of Northern latitude, as far as the borders of Kitaija. Their way of life answered to their name, for during many Centuries they Iiv'd together in hoords, and small commonwealths, wandering from pIace to pIace with their cattIe wherein their chief riches consisted. Of these Turks, or Turcomans are descended the Dagestaan and Nagajan Tartars, the Tartarian Inhabitants of the Kingdom of Casan, the Boscarian Tartars, the Inhabitants of the Province of Mogestan in Persia, and some other Tartars which dwell in that Kingdom under Tents. The KisiIbacs, or Noblemen, and great FamiIies, in Persia value themselves mightily upon their being of Turcoman extraction. There are likewise descended of them the Crim Tartars, which Iive between the Dniper and Danube, upon the coasts    [089]    of the BIack Sea, as also those Tartars, [142-144]

I am more inclin'd to believe, that their Journey was more to the South, and perhaps along the North-side of the Imaasian Mountains, where the Country is very fruit ful, with rich pastures, and plenty of sweet water, and fish, and other necessaries of life, and where they were like to meet either the source, or else some of the branches of the large river Croceus, which could con veniently and safely bring them into the very heart of China.

But now at last it is high time to make a step backwards, and to fetch the first Japanese Colony from the Caspian Shores, where we left them above, on their Journey to Japan. If we suppose, that for some time they travell'd along the East, and North Eastern, Coasts of the Caspian Sea till they came to the Island Mienkisilaag, and that thence they follow'd up some of the Rivers, which there discharge themselves into the said Sea, we will find, that by this means they got into a large and fruitful Country, extending itself far E:astwards, and very proper, by reason of its happy situation and great fertility, for the leisurely and easily pursuing of their Journey. Considering this it will not appear improbable further to suppose, that having once met with so good and pleasant a Country, where there was no want of provision for them and their cattle, they resolv'd to keep to it, avoiding to enter the hot, desart and barren Provinces, now inhabited by the Turkesteaans, on one, or on the other side to go down the rivers Istisi, Jenesi, Silinga and others, which arise thereabouts, and would have brought them to the less agreeable and cold Northern Countries. Thus moving on insensibly East ward, they perha'ps discover'd in time the Lake of Arguun, whence arises a large river of that name, andL continuing their Journey along the said river, for very near an    [091]    hundred German Miles, they must have necessarily met there another much more considerabIe river, call'd Amuur, which runs E. S. E. and could, in a Journey of about 200 German Miles, bring them to the Eastern coasts of Asia into the then uninhabited Peninsula Corea, where the said River Ioses itself to the Eastern Ocean. Perha s also if our TravelIers went down the river Jenisi fCr about 150 German Miles, to 55 degrees of Northern Latitude? they might have there discover'd a much more commodlous and pieasant way to the River Amuur, which hath been of late very advantageously folElow'd by the Muscovites in their Journeys to China. But as to the whole plan of this Journey, I must refer the Reader to the accurate and excellent map of Russia, and the great Tartary, which the late illustrious Nicholaus Witzen, L. L. D. Burgher-master at Amsterdam, and sometimes the States Ambassador to the Russian Court, publish'd in and thereby so highly oblig'd the curious, that he Justly deserves the honours due to discoverers of unknown worlds. This Map was afterwards corrected in some places, and abridg'd by Mr. Isbrand Ydes, who prefix'd it to the account he imparted to the worId of his Journey through Tartary into China.

Having once brought our Japanese Colony as far asthe PeninsuIa Corea, it will be no difficult matter, considering the nearness of Nagatto, the furthermost province, lying Westwards on the continent of the great Island Nipon, to bring them over thither, and this the rather because of the several Islands, which lie between Corea and Nagatto in an aimost continued row, particularly the two larger ones, Iki, and Tsussima: For it is but 8 reasonable to suppose, that a Colony, which had had courage enough to venture so far upon their first Pere grination, and which had been often necessitated not only to have recourse to lakes and rivers, but frequently to cross the same, had natural curiosity enough left, in still and fair weather, to go out in Canes or Boats, such as then probably they made use of, upon discovery of the state and extent of the Corean Sea, and the neighbouring Islands; and that having by this means discover'd the continent of Nipon, they resolv'd to go over thither, which they might easily do, even in ordinary Fisher-boats, and to chuse that Country for their future abode. Nowif any body knows how to bring them hither thro' the Eastern Tartary and the Coulltry of Jeso, (which way perhaps the American Colonies went) safer and speedIer, I am very willing to submit. Mean while I do not think it probable, that our Japanese Colony made any considerable stay upon these Western Coasts of Nipon. Their innate curiosity and travelling humour, and perhaps also the fearN of being follow'd and disturb'd by other parties, must needs have prompted them to travel up the Country, till they came to its Southern extremities, and particularly into the province Isje, which by reason of its fruitfulness, good air, and remoteness from the Western Coasts, fullv answer'd all the expectations of a    [092]    secure and pleasant abode. I am the more inclined to believe, that they first settled in this Province, since their posterity still look upon it, as the place where their ancestors dwell'd, and as such honour it with fiequent pilgrimages and other acts of devotion. Thus far my conjectures, for as such only I deliver them, concerning the true original descent of the Japanese Nation.

Before I put an end to this Chapter, it will not be amiss to say something of the increase of this first Japanese Colony, after they had once taken the resolution to stay, and to people the Country, where doubtless for several ages, before any considerable improvements were made in - agriculture, and other arts and sciences, they led a simple and indigent life, living on their Cattle, on what the earth produced of plants, roots and fruits, and the Sea aflTorded of fish and crabs. It was unquestionably and chiefly owing to themselves, that in success of time they became so numerous and powerfill a Nation, and the present Inhabi tants of Japan must be look'd upon in general, as descendants of those, who, after the confusion of languages at Babel, came over and settled in these Islands. But on the other hand it cannot be denied, but that from time to time new Colonies were sent over thither, chielRy from China and Corea, and perhaps also from some other neigh bouring Countries. The Japanese themselves make frequent mention in their Histories of learned Chillese, who brought over illtO Japan their books, and the knowledge of usefill arts alld sciences, though not till the latter Ages, when the Japanese Monarchy was already become a powerful Empire. And indeed since so few foreign words have been brought into the Japanese language, that it is hardly visible, that there hath been anv alteration at alI made in it, and since the religion and oid customs subsist tiII now, it appears pIainly, that whatever foreign Colonies did from time to time voluntarily, or by chance, come over into Japan, their number must have been very inconsiderabIe with regard to the bulk of the Japanese Nation.

Considering further, that the Islands of Japan areencompass'd with a dangerous and stormy Sea, it is highly probable, that from time to time Ships coming from foreign Countries stranded upon the Japanese coasts, and that, if any of the Ships company were fortunate enough to save their lives, they chose rather to stay in Japan, and to settle among the Natives, than to trust themselves again to the mercy of the Sea, and to run the hazard of a perillous return Into their own Country. Though navigation by this time be highly improved, yet the like accidents still happen very frequently, and there is hardly a vear, but some Ships are forc'd upon the Coasts of Japan, coming sometimes from Countries either so remote, or so entirely unknown, that scarce any conjectures can be made about them' neither by the Shape, nor the language and customs of the Ships company. Several remarkable instances of such accidents are recorded in Japanese Histories.    [093]    The Japanese having some Centuries ago accidentally discover'dthe Island Genkaisima, situate to the North of Japan found it inhabited, as their Histories relate, by Oni, that is, Black Devils, which they prosecuted with War, and having purg'd the Island from this Vermin, as they call it, they peopled it with a Colony of their own. It is highly probable, that these Blacks had been forc'd upon the coasts of this then uninhabited Island in a storm. It is further observ'd in the History of this war, that they wore long hairs spread over their shoulders, and that they had a strange sort of houshold goods, as among the rest high European Hats. As to the Japanese calling them Devils, we need not in the least wonder at it, considering either eheir black colour, or the natural pride of the Japanese Nation, which so far despises all other Countries, as to call them UmaKokf, that is, the Countries of Devils. Otherwise, what Countrymen these Blacks had been, is not very difficult to conjecture, by their wearing long hairs, by their irniture, and some other circumstances; and I don'tbelieve to impose upon any body, if I assert that they have been Malagans. It is welI known, that the Malagans to this day are extreamly fond of their own halr, and delighted with wearing them of a considerable length, beyond any other of the black nations of Asia. Besides, they had in former times by much the greatest trade in the Indies, and frequented with their merchant-ships not only all the coasts of Asia, but ventur'd over even to the coasts of Africa, particularly to the great Island of Madagascar. The title, which the King of the Malagans assumed to himself, of Lord of the Winds and Seas to the East and to the West, is an evident proof of this, but much more the Malagan language, which spread most all over the East, much after the same manner, as formerly the Latin, and of late the French, did all over Europe. The high Hats, which were found among the Housholdgoods of these Blacks, must have been brought out of Europe, they having never been fabricated any where else. It was an ancient custom of most Eastern Princes (which subsists till now in the Kingdoms of Cambodia, Siam, Pegu, and some others) to present their prime ministers of statey and chief favourites with such hats, as tokens of their particular favour, and they alone had the privilege of wearing them, as singular badges of honour. They were formerly brought out of Europe by Land to Ormus, and from thence exported all over the East by the Malagans, Armenians, and other trading nations; but after the Portuguese had discover'd a new way to the Indies, round the Cape of Good-hope, they exported them from Surope (where they are I1OW out of fashion) directly by Sea. Now whether there was not alllong these black Inhabitants of Genkaisima, some great Man, who receiv'd these hats from his Prince, or whether they fell by some other accident into their hands, is not material to enquire. There 1S also mention made in Japanese Histories of black Inhabstants, who were found in    [094]    some of the Islands lying to the South of Japan, and who in all probability must have been, either Malagan Merchants, or else Inhabitants of some of the Molucca Islands, who having been forced thither in a storm, and finding them uninhabited, resolv'd to stay and to people them. Not long before my arrival, and during my stay in Japan, several Ships stranded UpOll the Coasts coming from remote and unknown Countries In this case all the Ships Company, as well those, that remain alive, as the bodles of such as are drown'd, when thrown on shore, and all the Ship's tackle, and the boat, if any, must be brought up to Nagasaki, as the place appointed for a general inquiry into maritime afFairs. The Governours of this place examine into all the most minute circumstances of the unhappy accident, with that care and Zealous circumspection, which is peculiar only to this Nation, and in order to discover, if possible, what Country the Ship came from and what Language those, that saved their lives, speak, this Examination is sometimes made in presence of the Dutch Resident, who did me the favour upon these occasions, to carry me along with him. It is a duty incumbent on every Prince of the Empire) to take care, ln case any Ships strand upon the Coasts of his Province, that they be sent up, as aSoresaid, to Nagasaki, which ts commonly, out of respect for the Emperor, done with great expence. Not long ago a Jonk coming fiom Manilhas, on board which were some Topassians, a sort of black Christians, was wreck'd upon the Coasts of Satzuma. Most of the Ship's Company were drown'd, some died on shore, and only three were brought up alive to Nagasaki, the last of whom died there in prison, after halring taken some physick, order'd him by a Japanese Physitian. Of another Ship, which stranded upon the same Coasts, only three black Sailors were saved, which could not pronounce one distinct word, besides that of Tobacco; after having lain for sometime in prison, they were deliver'd to us, to be transported on board our Ships. Another Ship was brought to :Nagasaki, which had been forc'd upon the Northern Coasts of Japan, without any body on board. The odd uncommon structure of this vessel, and the remains of three Chinese Characters upon the stern, made the Japanese conjecture, that it came firom the extremities of Jeso. Not long ago another Ship perish'd upon the Coasts of the Island Rluku, and only two of the company were sav'd, which were brought first to Satzuma, and from thence to Nagasaki, with a convoy of eight barges, which must have put the Prince of Satzuma at the expence of some thousand Rixdollars. They were well shap'd comely persons, and had their heads shav'd much after the manner of the Polanders, no beards, and three holes in each Ear. They shew'd by their decent and civil behaviour, and free, but modest, appearance, a tolerable education, and a good clear understanding, by endeavouring to give the Japanese some notions of the number, situation and largeness of the Islands, from whence they came, which they did by    [095]    putting stones of difFerent sizes upon a Table, calling each by its name; among the rest, that Island, where they liv'd themselves, was by them call'd Patan. We had reason to apprehend, that the good understanding and quick apprehension they shew'd, when under examination, would be the occasion of their imprisonment for life at Nangasaki If we believe thet Japanese, there is another unknown nation, and very different from theirs, as to their customs, shape and language, which inhabits the IsIand Kubitesima, one the most Northern Islands belonging to Japan. They describe them as PJrgmies, and from thence call the whole Island the Pygmey-Island. What extraction they be of, and how they came to inhabit this Island, I will leave to themselves to determine. I will only add on this head, that the first European Ship, which came into Japan, was a Portugueze Merchant-ship, forc'd thither accidentally in a storm.

Upon the whole, the wide diflierence which is still observ'd between the Japanese Inhabitants of several Provinces, as to their shape, seems to argue strongly, that from time to time, diferent and new branches were grafted 0 into the original Tree of this Nation. For although the Japanese in the main, particularly the common People of Nlpon, be of a very ugly appearance, short siz'd, strong thick-legg'd, tawny, with flattish noses, and thick eye-lids, (tho' the eyes stand not so deep in the forehead, as in the Chi nese,) ye t the descendan ts of the elde st an d noble st families, of the Princes and Lords of the Empire, have somewhat more majestick in their shape and countenance, being more like the Europeans. The Inhabitants of the Provinces Satzuma, Oosijmi, and Fiuga, are of a middle size, strong, couragious, and manly, otherwise civil and polite. The same is observ'd of the Inhabitants of some of the Northern Provinces in the great Island Nipon, excepting those of the great Province Osju, who are said to be beyond others cruel and unmerciful. The Inhabi tants of some Provinces of SaiKokf, particularly of Fisen, are short, slender, but well shap'd, of a good handsome appearance, and extreamly polite. The InEabitants of the great Island Nipon, parhcularly of its Eastern Provinces are known from others by their big heads, flat noses, and musculous fleshy compIexion.

Now to close this Chapter, and to sum up in a few words, what hath been therein largely dwelt on, it appears; that in the first Ages of the World, not long atter the Deluge, when the confusion of languages at Babel oblig'd the Babylonians to drop their design of building a Tower of uncommon height, and occasion'd their being dispers'd all over the World, when the Greeks, Goths and Slavonians departed for Europe, others for Asia and Africa, others for America, that then the Japanese also set out on their Journey: That in all probability after many years travelling, and many incommodities endur'd, they alighted at this remote part of the World; that, being welI pleas'd with its situation and fruitfulness, they resolv'd to chuse it for the place of their    [096]    abode; that in all likelihood they spent many Centuries in a polyarchical way of Life, such as is led to this day by the Tartars, living in hoords, and wandering with their Cattle and Families up and down the Country; that being insensibly, and by degrees, grown to be a numerous and powerfill Nation, they thought it expedient for the good of the Country, and for their own safety, to deliver up the Government into the hands of one Prince, and chuse for their first Monarch the valiant Dsin Mu Ten Oo; that consequently they are an original Nation, no ways indebted to the Chinese for their descent and existence, and that, tho' they receiv'd Som them several usefill Arts and Sciences, as the Latins did fiom the Greeks, yet they were never made subject, and conquer'd, neither by them, nor by any other neighbouring Nation.

 

 

Chap. Vll. Of the Origine of the Japanese, according to their own fabulous Opinion.

 

The Japanese trave their Origine from their Deitics.

He Japanese fancy themselves highly afronted by the endeavours of some, who busy themselves to draw the original descent of their Nation from the Chinese, or others of their Neighbours. They pretend, that they arose within the compass of their own lS:mpire, tho' not out of the Earth, like Mice and Worms, as the proud Athenians, for that same reason, were upbraided with, by that Cynic Diogenes. They claim a birth much higher and nobler, and esteem themselves no less than OMsprings of their very Deities, whom otherwise they don't look upon as eternal, but suppose, that in the first motion of the Chaos, out of which aK things were form'd, their Gods also were brought forth by its invisible Power. They have tWo I tgo. dilTering Genealogies of their Deities. The first is a succession of Celestial Spirits, of Beings absolutely free firom all manner of mixture with corporeal Substances, who rul'd the Japanese World during an undetermin'd and incomprehensible Series of Centuries. The second is a race of Terrestrial Spirits, or Godmen, who were not possess'd of that pure Being peculiar only to their Predecessors. They govern'd the Japanese Empire by a Iineal succession, each a long, but limited, number of years, till at last they begot tlut third race of Men, which Japan is now inhabited by, and who have nothing left of the purity and perfiections of their divine Progenitors. It will not be amiss, as a filrther proof of what I advance, here to insert the names of these two successions of Deities, taken out of their own Writings. The names of the first succession are purely metaphorical, and the only thing mention'd of it in their Historical Books, for there is no account given, neither of their    [097]    Lives and Actions nor of their Government. They succeeded each other in the following Order.

Ten d Sin Sitzi Dai, that is, the Succession of the seven great Spiritual Gods.

1 Kuni toko Dat sij no Mikotto.

2. Kuni Satsu Tsij no Mikotto.

3. Tojo Kun Nan no Mikotto.

These three Gods had no Wives; but the four following of the same Succession were married, and begot each his Successor by his Wife, tho' in a manner far beyond the reach of human understanding. These were,

4. Utsij Nino Mikotto, and his Wife Sufitsi Nino Mikotto.

5. Oo Tono Tsino Mikotto, Oo Toma fe no Mikotto

6. Oo mo Tarno Mikotto, Oo si Wote no Mikotto.

7. Isanagi no Mikotto, Jsanami no Mikotto.

These seven Gods are by them represented as Beings purely Spiritual, and the Histories of their Lives asid Governments as Dreams. The real existence of such a time, when such spiritual Beings governed the Japanese World, is what they religiously beSeve, tho' at the same time they own, that it is far above their understanding to conceive how it happen'd, and entirely out of their power to determine how long their Government Iasted.

The last of the first succession Isanagi Mikotto, and his Wife Isanami Mikotto, are held in peculiar veneration by the Japanese, as being the progenitors of the second succession of God-men, of whom issued the third race of the now existing Inhabitants of Nipon. tMikotto is an Epithet peculiar only to the first succession of Spiritual Gods, and signifies the incomprehensible bliss and happi ness of these first Monarchs of Japan: Sometimes however they will bestow it on such of the inferior Gods, for whom they have a peculiar veneration.) Those of the Japanese, who turn'd Christians, call'd them their Adam and Eve. They are said to have liv'd in the province Isje, thouch it is not known in what particular part of that Province they were born, liv'd or died. They observe only, that this - preadamitical Adam, (if I may have leave thus to call him) was the first, who, taught by the Example of the 13ird Sekire, or according to the vulgar, Isitataki, lay with his Wife in a carnal manner and begot by her sons and daughters of a nature excellent indeed, and far superior to ours, but greatly below that of the divine Beings, of which they sprung. Isanami's first-born Son, and the first of the second succession of God-men, is supposed by the very law of primogeniture, to have been entitled to a superiority    [098]    over his Brothers and Sisters, upon which, and a lineal descent from him, is grounded the right, the Dairi's or Ecclesiastical Hereditary Emperor's eldest Sons claim to the Crown of Japan, upon their Father's demise. This second Succession is call'd,

Dsi Sin Go Dai; that is, the Succession of five Terrestrial Gods, or God-men, who are

I. Tensio Dai Dsin, in the language of the learned, and Ama Teru Oon Gami in that of the vulear. The characters, whereby this name is express'd, signiry, a great Splrlt streaming out celestial Rays. He is the first-born Son of Isanagi, and the only one that left Children behind him. For 'twas his posterity, Creatures not of a mean extraction, but of an excellent and almost divine nature who inhabited the Country for many millions of years, tili they begot the third race of its present short living Inhabitants. All the Japanese, without exception, look upon themselves as immediate descendants of Tensio Dai Dsin, because they say, that all his younger Brothers left the world without issue. But particularly the Ecclesiastical hereditary Emperor grounds his right to the Empire, (which is of late gone over into SecuSar hands, he himself having preserved nothing but his title, and a shadow of his former power and grandeur) upon a lineal descent from Tensio Dal-Dsin's first-born Son, and so down. Tensio Dai Dsin committed not only during his reign many noble and heroick actions, but e+ren after he left this world, as is recorded in Japanese Histories, he sufficiently prov'd by many miracles, and manifested himself to be the most powerfill of all the Gods of the Country, the very life soul, light, and supreme Monarch of nature. For this reason he is devoutly worship'd by all the faithfill adherents of the old Japanese Religion, as it was of old establish'd in Japan. And the adherents of all other Sects, even their greatest Philosophers, and Atheists, shew a particular regard and veneration for his name and memory, as that of their first Parent. Devout pilgrimages are made yearly, by the Japanese of all ranks and quallties, to the Province where he lived, and where there is a Temple erected to his memory. Nor is there any province, or town, throughout the Empire, but what has at least one TempIe, where TenS10 Dal DS111 1S worshipp'd, and in hopes of obtaining by his power and assistance great temporal blessings, worship'd with much more assiduity and devotion, than any other of their Gods. There is otherwise no mention made in Japanese Histories of his Wife, nor of the Wives of his successors, and their names are entirely lost to Posterity. After some hundred thousands of years Tensio Dai Dsin was succeeded by his eldest Son

2. Oosiwo ni no Mikotto, or with his full title, MAssai Ja su Katz Katz fai ja fi Amani Oosi woni no Mikotto. His successor was    [099]     

3. NinIkino Mikotto, or with his full title, Amatsu fiko fiko Fono ni NinIki no Mikotto. He was succeeded by

4. De mi no Mikotto, or with his full title, Fikofoo foo De mi no Mikotto. He was succeeded by

5. Awase Dsu no Mikotto, or with his full title, Tuki Magisa Take Ugei Jakussa fuki awadsi Dsuno Mikotto. With him ends tliis Second, or Silver-age as one might call it, of the Japanese world. Something more shall ie said on this head in the first Chapter of the second Book. The names of the five terrestrial Gods of this second succession are express'd in Fig. 73.

These are the two Successions of divine and half divine Beings, from whence the Japanese draw the original descent of their nation. The account they give how these Gods were created, and how they begot each other, is no less chimerical and fabulous. The first of the seven great Celestial Spirits, they say, was the very first thing that arose out of the Chaos, being its purest and invisibSe part and power. His Son and Meir went out of him in a manner beyond the reach of human understanding, or as some pretend to explain it, and to make it intelliglble, by - the motion and active power of the Heavens, and sub - celestial Elements. Thus were begot the seven great Celestial Spirits of the first succession. 'Twas the last of them, who, knowing his Wife in a carnal manner, begot the second succession of God-men, of Beings half divine, and half human. These, though they fell far short of the perfection of their progenitors, yet by virtue of those divine qualities, they had still left them, they preserv'd their lives, and continued the succession of their Govern ment upon their Posterity, which they begot in a more comprehensible manner, for an immemorial time, far exceeding the term human life is llO+V limited to. At last all expired in the Person of Awase Dsuno, the last of this second race, who himself became the first parent of the third, the now living Inhabitants of Japan. To those cf this third Race, who descend lineally trom the first-born Son of Awase Dsuno Mikotto, from his first-born, and so down, or their Issue wanting to their next Heirs, is by the Japanese attributed a supernatural, almost divine, Power, and an unlimited authority over their Fellowcreatures. This is in some measure express'd by the great titles and high sounded epithets, they give to this whole Family, but particularly to its Head, and Prince. Such are Oodai, the great generation: Mikaddo, Emperor, (Mikotto beint peculiar only to the first and second succession of Gods and Godmen:) Tenoo heavenly Prince, Tensin, Son of Heaven, Tee, Prince, and Dairi, by which last name is frequently denoted the whole Court of the Ecclesiastical hereditary Emperor. (See Fig. 73.)    [100]     

Thus far the common tradition of the Japanese about the original descent of their nation, which is esteem'd as sacred among them, as the authority of holy Scriptures is among Christians. It were needless to refute it, it being of itself of so weak a nature, that it will not bear the enquiry of even the most common understanding. Some people perhaps will think it not unlikely, that under these two successions of Gods and God-men is allegorically couch'd an obscure account of the Gold and Silver Age of Greek Writers, or of the first ages of the world before and after the Deluge. But then how will they reconcile that infinite time, during which the Japanese pretend, that these two successions of Spiritual Beings govern'd the world, to that short number of years, which pass'd since the Creation, according to the divine account deliver'd to us in holy writs. The Japanese, it seems, would not be behind hand with the Egyptians, Chaldeans, Bramines, and others of their neighbours in the East; who all, pursuant to that pride and vanity, which is natural to Eastern Nations, dated their origin as high as they could, and esteem'd it glorious to shew a lo1lfr series of Monarchs, that ruled over them. But what they seem to have more particularly aim'd at, is to out-do their neighbours the Chinese; for they make Tensio Dai Dsin, the first Progenitor of the Japanese Nation, in their historical writings, many thousand years anterior to the first and fictitious, as they call him, founder of the Chinese Nation, Sinkwosi, or according to the Chinese prononciation Tien Hoamtsij. And lest even this should not be sufficient to clear them of all suspicion of being any ways descended from the Chinese, they prefix the Succession of the first great celestial Spirits, which they derive from the very beginning of the Creation. They are however at a loss, what to answer, when ask'd how it came about, that Awase Dsuno, the last of their terrestrial Gods, a Beillg endow'd with r SO many excellent and supernatural qualities, as they ascribe to him, begot so poor and miserable a race, as that of the present Inhabitants of Japan. They have as little to say concerning the state of their Country, and the history of their Ancestors before the time of Sinmu their first Monarch. For this reason several of their own NVriters have ventur'd to call Japan Atarasikoks, and SinKokf, that is, New Country, as if it had been newly found out and peopled under the reign of their first Emperor. Thus much is true, that the genuine Japanese EIistory begins but with the reign of thls first Monarch, who liv'd about 660 Years before Christ. And herein the Chinese are gone far beyond them, for they begun to write the History of their Country at least 2000 years before, and they can shew, what I believe no other nation can boast of, a succession of Monarchs, with an account of their lives, government, and remarkable actions down to this time, Cor now upwards of 4000 Tears. It must be own'd    [101]    however, that the Japanese Nation must needs have existed, and liv'd in the Country, a considerable time before their first Odai, Mikaddo, or Emperor, since when he was rais'd to the throne, they were then already grown very numerous, and since not long after, as is recorded in their Histories, great \RTars arose among them, and ma1ly thousands perish'd by placue and famine, unless one erould bring them over at onze from another Coulltry, or out of the Earth like Mushrooms, which is either impertinent or improbable. I am more inclined to believe, that from the time of their ancestors coming into the Country, they led for many ages a wandring life, erring from place to place? with their families and cattle, which the very disposihon of the Country, divided by mountains, seas and rlvers, seems to have requir'd, till the happy Ninus Dsin Mu Ten Oo, civiliz'd and brought them into better order and became himself, whether by force or choice, their first Monarch Since that time they have been accurate, and faithfuI, ln writing the History of their Country, and the lives and reigns of their Monarchs. To conclude, as Dadsijno Mikotto is by them believed to have been the greatest of the first succession of Celestial Spirits, and Ten sio Dai Dsin, that of the second of Cod-men, so they look ufpon Sin Mu Ten Oo, as the greatest of the third race o the now living Inhabitants, in whose family the hereditary right to the crown with a more than human authority was continued down to Kinsan Kiwotei, the present It4th Mikaddo, that is 2360 years, computing to the year of Christ, 1700. I say, the hereditary right to the Crown, for the government of the Empire itself is of late gone over into SecuIar hands, as will be shewn more particularly in another place.

 

 

Chap. Vlll. Of the Climate of Japan, and its Produce as to Minerals.

Japan boasts of a happy and healthful Climate. The Air is very inconstant and subject to frequent changes, in the Winter loaded with Snow, and liable to sharp Frosts, in the Summer on the contrary, particularly during the Dog-days, intolerably hot. It rains frequently throughout the whole Year, but with the greatest profusion in the Months of June and July, which are for this reason call'd Sawtsuki, that is, Water-months. However the rainy Season in Japan is far from coming up to that regularity, which is observ'd in other and hotter parts of the East Indies. Thunders and Lightning happen very frequently. The Sea, which encompasses the Islands of Japan, is very rough and stormy, which with the many rocks, clifs and shoaJs, above and under water, make its navigation f very dangerous. It hath two remarkable and dangerous Whirlpools. The one is call'd Faisaki, and lies near Simabara below Amakusa. It is dangerous, chiefly when the Tide turns; for in high water it becomes even with the surface of the Sea, but as soon as the Tide begins to go out, it also after some violent turnings falls in of a sudden, as I was inform'd, to the depth of fifteen fathom, swallowing up with great force, what ships, boats, and other things happen at that fatal juncture to come within its reach, which are dash'd to pieceSs against the rocks at the bottom. The shatter'd pieces sometimes remain under water, sometimes they are thrown out again at some German Miles distance. The other Whirlpool lies near the Coasts of the Province Kijnokuni. It is call'd Narrotto, and from the neighbourhood of the Province Awa, Awano Narrotto, which signifies, the rushing of Aua, because it rushes with a great boistering noise about a small rocky Island, which is by the violence of the motion kept in perpetual trembling. This, tho' of a formidable aspect, is yet esteem'd less dangerous than the other, because its noise being heard at a considerable distance, it may be easily avoided. Japanese Avuthors, especially Poets, frequently allude in their Writings to the wonderful nature and motion of this Narrotto, as do also the Priests in the Pulpit.

Water-spouts also are frequently observ'd to rise in the Japanese Seas, and to turn towards the Coasts. The Japanese fancy, that they are a kind Water Dragons with a long watry Tail, flying up into    [103]    the Air with a swift and violent motion, for which reason they are by them call'd Tatsmaki, that is, spouting Dragons.

The Soil of Japan, in itself, is for the major part mountainous, rocky and barren, but through the indefatigable care and industry of the Natives, it hath been made fruitfill enough to supply them with all manner of necessaries, besides what the neighbouring Sea aSords of fish, crabs and shells. Even the most rocky and uncultivated places yield their plants, firuits and roots, for the sustenance of the Inhabitants, which their indigent Ancestors by experience learnt to dress and to prepare, so as not only to make them fit for food, but likewise pleasing and agreeabIe to the taste. Considering this and the frugal way of living of the Japanese in general, we need not wonder, that this vast and populous Empire is so abundantly provided with all the necessaries of human Life, that as a particular World, which Nature seems purposely to have separated from the rest of the Globe, by encompassing it with a rocky and tempestuous Sea, it easily can subsist of it self without any assistance from foreign Countries, as long as Arts and Agriculture are follow'd and improv'd by the Natives.

The Country besides is plentifully supplied with fresh water, there being very many Fountains, Lakes and Rivers up and down the Empire. Some of the Rivers in particular are so large and rapid, by reason either of the steep high Mountains and Rocks, where they arise, or because of the profuse showers of Rain, which fall frequently, that they are not to be pass'd over without danger, the rather since some are so impetuous as to bear no bridges. Some of the most famous Rivers are, I Ujingava, that is, the River Ujin. It is about a quarter of a German Mile (or an English Mile and a half) broad, and there being no bridge laid over it, it must be forded through. The force and rapidity, with which this River falls down from the Mountains, is such, that even when the water is low, and scarce kneedeep five strong Men, well acquainted with the bed of it, must be employ'd to ford a Horse through, which with the many large Stones lying at the bottom, makes the passage equally diiRicuIt and danger . ^ ous. The people, whose business it is to ford passengers through this and other such like Rivers, lest they should not take due care, are by the laws of the Country made answerable for their lives. This is the reason, why there are but few unlucky accidents happen. 2. The River Oomi, is famous for its surprising beginning; for it is recorded in Japanese Histories, that it sprung up of a sudden in one night in the year before Christ 285. It borrow'd its name from the Province where it arises. 3. The River Askagava is remarkable, for that the depth of its bed alters perpetually, on which account it is frequently alluded to by Japanese Authors, chiefly Poets.    [104]     

Japan is very much subject to Earthquakes, whlch happen so frequently, that the Natives dread them no more, than we Europeans do an ordinary storm of thunder and lightning. They are of opinion, that the cause of Earthquakes is a huge large whale's creeping under ground, and that thq- signify nothing. Sometimes however the shakes are so violent, and last so long, that whole Cities are thereby destroy'd, and many thousand of the Inhabitants buried under the ruins. Such a dreadful accident happen'd, as Father Lewis de Froes relateth (in opere de Rebus Japonicis collecto a Joh. EIayo) in the year 1586, he himself being then in Japan. The like accidents happen'd frequently since that time. In 1704, I had a Ietter from Batavia, from a friend of mine, then Iately arrived from Japan, wherein among other things he gave me an account of such a violent shock, which happen'd there in 1703, whereby, and by a great fire, which broke out at the same time, almost the whole City of Jedo, and the Imperial PaRace itself, were destroy'd and laid in ashes, and upwards of 200,000 Inhabitants buried under the ruins. It 1S remarkable, that some particuIar places in Japan are observd to be free from alI manner of suc- ussions. The Japanese reason variousIy upon this * The effects of this Earthquake were so stupendious and dreadful, that I could not forbear, with the Reader's leave, to insert at length, the account, w. hich F. Lewis de Froes giveg of it in a letter dgated thaet Slmonosekl ln the Province Nagatta October 15. 1586. His words are:

In the year of Christ 1586 Japan was shook by such dreadful Earthqua es, that the like was never known before. From the Province Saca)a as far as Miaco the Earth trembled for forty days successively. n le own of SacaJa sixty Houseswerc thrown down. At Nagasama, a sman Town of about a thousand houses in the Kingdom Oomi the Earth gaped and swallowed up one half of that place, the other,'had been violently lhkek is called Nagasama bythe swallowed up by the Sea, the waters rising so high, that they overflow'd t e Coasts, washed away the houses, and what ever they met with drown d the Inhabitants, and left no foot step of that once rich and populous Town, but the place on which the Castle stood, and even that under water. A strong Castle in the Kingdom of Mino, built at t e top of a high hil1, after several violent shocks sunk down and disappeared of a sudden, the earth gaping, that not the least footstep remained, a lake quickly filling the place, where the foundations of the ast e ad been. Another accident of this kind happened in the Province IkeJa. Many more gaps and openings were observed up and own the Empire, some of which were so wide and deep, that Guns belng fired Into them, the balls could not be heard to reach the other end, and such a stench and smoke issued out of them, that people would not venture to travel that way. Quabacundono (who was afterwards called Taicosama) resided at Sacomot, in the Castle Achec, when these Earthquakes begun, but they growing too thick and violent he retired astily to Osacca. His palaces were strongly shook, but not thrown

[164]    Phaenomenon. Some attribute it to the holiness and sanctity of the place, and to the powerfill protection of its Genius, or tutetar God. Others are of opinion, that these places are not shook, because they immediately repose upon the unmov'd Center of the Earth. The fact itself is not call'd in question, and there are noted for having this singular Privilege, the Islands of Gotho, the small Island Sikubusima, on which stands a most stately Temple of Bonzes, being one of the first that was built in the Country, the Warge mountain Kojasan near Miaco, famous for the number of its Convents, Monasteries and Monks, besides some few others.

The greatest Riches of the Japanese soil, and those, wherein this Empire exceeds most known Countries, consist in all sorts of Minerals and Metals, particularly in gold, silver and copper. The many hot Wells in several parts of the Empire, and the several smoking and burning Mountains, shew what a stock of Sulphur, which is the mother and main ingredient of Mineral and Metallical Bodies, is hid in the bowels of the Earth, besides the vast quantities of this substance dug up in several places. Not fg from Firando, where we had our factories and ware houses, before we remov'd to Nagasaki, lies a small rocky Island, (one of those, which by reason of their great number are call'd by the Japanese Kiukiu Sima, that is, the Ninety-nine Islands,) which, though never so small, and encompass'd by the Sea, hath been burning and trembling for many Centuries. Another small Island opposite to Satzuma, which is by the Japanese call'd Fuogo, which name they borrow'd from the Portuguese, and retain'd ever since, and which is mark'd in our Maps by the name of Vulcanus, hath an ignivomous mountain, which hath been likewise burning, at different intervals, for many ages. At the top of a mountain in the Province Figo is to be seen a large cavern, formerly the mouth of a Vulcano, but the Flame ceas'd of late, probably for wawnt of combustible matter' In the same Province there is another place call'd - Asos famous for a Temple call'd Asa no Gongen, or the Temple of the jealous God of Aso, not far from which there is an almost perpetual flame issuing out of the top of a mountain, and more visible in the night, than it is in the day-time. Another burning Mountain lies in the Province Tsikusen, not far from a Place call'd Kujanosse. It was formerly a Coal-mine, which thro' the carelessness of the Miners accidentally took fire, and continued burning ever since. Sometimes a black stench and smoke is observ'd to issue out of the top of the famous mountain Fest, in the Province Suruga, which in height is surpass'd by only the Pic of TeneriS, but in shape and beauty hath I think, not its equal: The top of it is cover'd with everlasting Snow, whlch, being, as it frequently is, blown up into flocks by the violence of the wind, and dispers'd about, represents, as it were, a smoking hat. The Japanese Histories mention, that formerly the top of it burnt, but that upon a new opening which was made by the violence of the fire at the side of the mountain, the flame ceas'd soon after. Unsen is a deform'd, large, but not very high mountain near Simabara. At all times the top of it is bare, whitish from the colour of the sulphur, and withal resembling a Caput Mortuum, or burnt out Massa. It smokes little, however, I could discern the smoke arising from it at three miles distance. Its soil is burning hot in several places, and besides so loose and spongious, that a few spots of ground excepted, on which stanJ some trees one cannot walk over it without continual fear, for the cracking, hollow noise perceived under foot. Its    [106]    suIphurous smell 1S S0 strong, that for many miles round there is not a Bird to be seen; when it rains, the water bubbles up, and the whole mountain seems then, as it were boiling. Many cold Springs and hot Baths arrise on and about it Among others there is a famous hot Bath, which they believe to be an infallible cure for the Venereal Disease, if the Patient for several days together goes in but a few moments a day and washes himself in it. He must begin the cure with another hot bath, not quite so strong, call'd Obamma, situate a few leagues of, and all the while he uses the Waters, he must keep to a hot warming Diet, and as soon as he comes out of the Bath, go to bed, and covering himself very well, endeavour to sweat. Not far from this hot Bath is a Monastery of the Sect of Tendai. The Monks of this place have given peculiar names to each of the hot Springs arising in the neighbourhood, borrow'd from their quality, from the nature of the froth a-top, or the sediment at bottom, and from the noise they make as they come out of the ground, and they have assign'd them as Purgatories for several sorts of Tradesmen and Handicrafts-men, whose professions seem to bear some relation to any of the qualities above-mention'd. Thus for Instance, they lodge the deceitfi'l Beer and Sackibrewers at the bottom of a deep muddy Spring, the Cooks and Pastry-cook's in another, which is remarkable for its white froth, wranglers and quarrelsom People in another, which rushes out of the ground with a frightfill murmuring noise, and so on. After this manner imposing upon the blind and superstitious Vulgar, they squeeze large Sums of Money out of them, making them believe that by their Prayers and Intercession they may be deliver'd from these places of torment after death. In that dreadful persecution, which was rais'd in Japan against the Christian Religion, and which hath not its equal in History; amongst innumerable other Torments inflicted on the new Converts to make them abandon their newly embrac'd Faith, and return to the Paganism of their Fathers, they were brought hither and tortur'd with the hot Waters of this place. Of other hot Baths in Japan, that call'd Obamma, is one of the most eminent, and most efficacious. It lies to the West of the mountain Usen, about 3 Miles ofX and is said to have extraordinary Vertues in curing several external and internal distempers, as among others, by bathing and sweating, the Pox, which however is observ'd frequently to return, probably because they are not skilful enough to manage this distemper, or by reason of their not understanding the right use of baths in general. The Province Figo hath several hot springs, about which grow, as I was inform'd, Camphire trees of an unconlmoll size, hollow and full of water. The chief and most emillent for its virtues is a hot bath not far from the abovemention'd temple Asano Gongen. There are also several hot Springs in the Province Ltzisen, one for instance in the village Takijo, another in the village Urisino. Both would prove very beneficial in curing several    [107]    distempers, if the Natives did but know how to use them. I observ'd it in all Asiatick Countries which I pass'd through in my travels, that the Natives use the hot baths seldom more than three, or at furthest eight days, by which, probably enough, they will find some benefit and relief, which they are too apt to mistake for an actual cure, and in case of a relapse to lay all the fault on the waters.

Sulphur

The greatest quantity of Sulphur is brought from the Province Satzuma. It is dug up in a small neighbouring Island, which from the great plenty it afforEs of this substance is call'd Iwogasima, or the Sulphur Island. It is not above a hundred years since they first ventur'd thither. It was thought before thawt time to be wholly inaccessible, and by reason of the thick smoke, which was observed continually to arise from it, and of the several spectres, and other frightfill uncommon apparitions, people fancied to see there chiefly in the night, it was believ'd to be a dwelling place of Devils, till at last a resolute and couragious man oflTer'd himself, and obtain'd leave accordingly, to go and to examine the state and situation of it. He chose fifty resolute fellows for this expedition, who upon going on shore found neither Hell nor Devils, but a large flat spot of ground at the top, which was so throughly cover'd with Sulphur, that wherever they walk'd, a thick smoke issued from under their feet. Ever since that time this Island brings in to the Prince of Satzuma about 20 chests of silver per annum, arising only from the Sulphur dug up there, besides what he gets by the trees and timber growing along the shore. The Country of Simabara, particularly about the hot baths abovemention'd, aSords also a fine pure native Sulphur, which however the Inhabitants dare not venture to dig up, for fear of oSending the tutelar genius of the place, they having found upon trial that he was not willing to spare it. I pass over in silence several other places, for want of a thorough information.

Gold

Gold, the richest of all Metals, is dug up in several Provinces of the Japanese Empire. The greatest quantity of it is melted out of its own oar. Some they wash out of Gold sand. Some small quantity also is contain'd in the Copper. The Emperor claims the supreme Jurisdiction of all the gold mines, and indeed all other mines in the Empire, none of which may be open'd, and work'd, without his express leave and consent. Of the produce of all the Mines, which are work'd, he claims two thirds, and one third is left to the Lord of the Province, in which the Mine lies, the latter however' as they reude upon the spot, know how to improve their third parts so as to share pretty equally with the Emperor. The richest Gold Oar and which yields the finest Gold, is dug up in Sado, one of the Northern Provinces in the great Island Nipon. Some of the veins there were formerly so rich, that one Catti of the Oar yielded one, and sometimes two thails of Gold. But of late as I was inform'd the veins there, and in most - other Mines, not only run scarcer, but yield not    [108]    near the quantity of Gold they did formerly, which we were told, was the occasion, amongst other reasons of the late strict orders relating to the trade and commerce with us, and the Chinese. There is also a very rich Gold sand in the same Province, which the Prince causes to be wash'd fonr his own benefit, without so much as giving notice of it, much less part of the profit, to the Court at Jedo. After the Gold Mines of Sado, those of Surunga were always esteem'd the richesCt, for besides that this Province yielded at all times a great quantity of Gold-Oar, there is some Gold contain'd even m the CoFper dug up there. Among the Gold-mines of the Provlnce Satzuma, there was one so rich, that a Catti of the Oar was found upon trial to yield from four to six thails of Gold, for which reason the Emperor hath given strict orders, not to work it, for fear so great a treasure should be exhausted too soon A mountain on the Gulf Ookus, in the district of Omura which had lean'd on one side for a considerable time happen'd some years ago to fall over into the Sea, anl there was found at the bottom of the place where it stood, so rich a Gold sand, that, as I was credibly informad, it yielded one half of pure gold. It lay somewhat deep and was to be fetch'd up by Divers. But this rich harvest lasted not long, for a few years after, in a great storm and extraordinary high tide, the Sea overflow'd all that spot of ground, and cover'd at once these inestimable riches with mud and clay to the depth of some fathom. The poor people in the neighbourhood still busy themselves washing the sand about this mountain, which contains some Gold but in so inconsiderable a quantity, that they can hardlj get a livelyhood by it. There is another Goldmine in the Province Tsikungo, not far from a village call'd Tossino, but so full of water, that they can not go on with working it. However the situation of the mine is such, that by cutting the rock, and making an opening beneath the mouth of the Mine, the water might be easily drawn of. This was attempted accordingly, but as they went to work, there arose of a sudden such a violent Storm of thunder and lightning, that the workmen were obliged to desist and to fly for shelter, which made the superstitious vulgar believe, that the Tutelar God and Protector of the place, unwilling to have the bowels of the earth committed to his trust thus riffled, rais'd this Storm purposely to make them sensible how much he was displeas'd at this undertaking. Nor was there any further attempt made since for fear of provoking his anger and wrath stin more. Such another accident, and which had the same eSect, happen'd at the opening of a Gold-mine in the Island Amakusa, for it was so suddenly fill'd with water, which broke out of the mountain, and destroy'd all the works, that the Miners had scarce time to escape and to save their lives.

Silver.

There are some Silver Mines in the Province Bingo. Others, and these much richer, at a place call'd Kattami, in one of the Northern Provinces: Others in other places, which I forbear mentioning, for want of sufficient informa tion. The two Istands Ginsima and Kinsima, that is, Gold and Silver Islands, which lie to the East of fiapan, and which I had occasion to speak of in the fourth Chapter of this Book, deserve a place here, if it be true, what the Japanese boast, and what their very Names and Characters seem to imply, of their Wealth and Riches.

Copper, is the most common of all Metals dug up in Japan, and the produce of Copper-mines enriches several Provinces of this Empire. It is at present dug up chiefly in the Provinces of Suruga, Atsingo and Kijnokuni. That of Kijnokuni is the finest, most malleable and fittest for work of any in the World. That of Atsingo is course, and seventy Catti's of it must be mix'd with thirty Catti's of the Kijnese to make it malleable and fit for use. That of Suruga is not only exceedingly fine and without faults, but charg'd with a considerable quantity of Gold, which the Japanese at present separate and refine, much better than they did formerly, which occasions great complaints among the Refiners and Brahmines upon the Coasts of Cormandel There are also some Copper-mines in the Pro vince of Satzuma,which the Emperorvery lately gave leave to work. All the Copper is brought to Saccai, one of the five Imperial Towns, where it is refin'd and cast into small Cylinders, about a span and a half long, and a finger thick. As many of these Cylinders, as amount to one pickel, or • 125 1. weight, are pack'd up into square wooden boxes, and sold to the Dutch from twelve to thirteen Maas the pickel It is one of the chiefest Commodities the Dutch buy in Japan, and they carry on a great Trade with it. There is besides a sort of courser Copper, which is cast into large flat roundish lumps, or cakes, and is bought a great deal cheaper than the other, as it is also much inferior in goodness and beauty. Brass is very scarce in Japan, and much dearer than Copper, the Calaminestone being imported from Tunquin in flat cakes, and sold at a very good price.

The Province of Bungo aSords a small quantity of Till, which is so exceedingly fine and white, that it almost comes up to Silver. There is but little use made of this Metal in the Country.

Iron is dug up only upon the confines of the three Provinces MimaSaka, Bitsju and Bisen. But it is found there in very large quantitles. It is refin'd upon the spot, and cast into Staffs or Cylinders, two spans long. Japanese Merchants buy it at the place, and export it all over the Empire. It is much of a price with Copper, Iron tools being full as dear, or rather dearer than those of Copper and Brass. Such Houshold-goods, Hooks, Cramp-irons in Buildings and Ships, and other Instruments, as are in other Countries made of Iron, are made in    [110]    Japan of Copper or Brass. They do not dress their Victuals in brass pans, but have a particular sort of kettles or pans which are made of a composition of Iron, and are pretty thin. The old ones of this sort are very much esteem'd, and bought at a great rate, they having somewhat particular in their shape and make, which at present they have lost the art to imitate.

They have no want of Coals in Japan, they being dug up in great quantity in the Province Tsikusen about Kujanisse, and in most Northern Provinces.

Salt is made of Sea-water in several maritime Provinces. They make it thus. They close in a spot of Ground, and fill it with fine loose Sand, then they pour the Sea-water upon it, and let it dry. This they repeat several times, till they think the Sand is sufficiently saturated with Salt. Then they take it out and put it into a large Trough, with holes at the bottom, and putting fresh Sea-water upon it, let it filtrate through the Sand. The Lye is boil'd to a good consistence, and the Salt thus obtain'd is calcin'd in earthen Pots, till it becomes white, and fit for use and sale.

Agats, of several sorts, some extraordinary fine, of a bluish colour not unlike Saphires, as also some Cornelians and Jaspers, are brought from the mountain TSugaar, upon the Northern extremities of the great Province Osju, opposite to the Country of Jedo.

Pearls

Pearls, by the Japanese call'd Kainotamma, which is as much as to say, Shell Jewels, or Jewels taken out of Shells, are found almost every where about SaiKokf in Oysters and several other Sea-shells. Every body is at liberty to fish them. Formerly the Natives had little or no value for them, till they were apprizsd of it by the Chinese, who would pay good prices Gor them, the Chinese Women being very proud of wearing Necklaces, and other Ornaments of Pearls. The largest and finest Pearls are found in a small sort of Oyster, call'd Akoia, which is not unlike the Persian Pearl-shell, much oft the same shape, both valves shutting close, about a hand broad, exceeding thin and brittle, black, smooth and shining on the out slde, within pretty rough and unequal, of a whitish colour and glitter inz like Mother of Pearl. These Pearl-shells are found only in the Seas about Satzuma, and in the Gulf of Omura. Some of the Pearls weigh from four to five Condonins, and these are sold for a hundred Colans a piece. The Inhabitants of the Riuku Islands buy most of those, which are found about Satzuma, they trading to that Province. Those on the contrary which are found in the Gulf of Omura, are sold chiefly to the Chinese and Tunquinese, and it is computed that they buy for about 3000 Thails a year. This great profit occasion'd the strict orders, which were made not long ago by the Princes both of Satzuma ' and Omura, importing, that for the future there should be no more of these Oysters sold in the Market with other Oysters, as had been done formerly.    [111]    I procurnd some in private from Omura, not without great difficulty. I was told a very extraordinary thing of this sort of Pearls, and strongly assurJd of the truth or the fact, which is, that they have somevrhat of a prolifick quality, by virtue of which, when some of the largest are put into a box full of a peculiar Japanese cheek varnish, made of another shell call'd Takaragai (which I shall describe in another place) one or two young Pearls will grow on the sides, and who come to maturity, which they do in about three years time, drop of. These Pearls, by reason of their scarcity, are kept in private Families, and the possessors seldom part with them, unless upon urgent necessity. All this however I deliver only upon hearsay, having my self seen none of this sort of PearI. There is another Shell, which sometimes yields PearIs, found plentifillly upon all the Japanese Coasts, and call'd by the Natives Awabi. It is an Univalve, in shape almost oval, pretty deep, open on one side, where it sticks to the Rocks and to the bottom of the Sea, with a row of holes, which grow bigger, the nearer they come to the circumference of the Shelt, rough and limy on its outward surface, frequently with Corals Sea-plants and other ShelIs sticking to it, on the inside of an exquisite Mother of Pearl's glimmering, sometimes rais'd into whitish pearly excrescencies, which are likewise observ'd in the common Persian Pearl-shell. A great lump of flesh fills the cavity of this ShelI, for which sole reason they are look'd for by Fishermen, being a very good commodity for the market. They have an Instrument made on purpose to pull them ofF from the sides of the Rocks, to which they stick close. Another Shell, the name of which I could not learn, yields a very large Pearl, which sometimes weighs from five to six Condonins, but they are of a dirty'yellow colour, ilI shap'd, and worth but little. A pretty good sort of Pearl, is sometimes observ'd to grow in the very Flesh of a Shell, which is calI'd by the Natives Tairaggi, and is found in the Gulf of Arima, between Janagava and Isafaje. It is a flat sort of a ShelI oblong, almost trianguIar, a little crooked on each side, about a span and a half long, and a span broad, where broadest, thin, transparent, smooth, and polish'd like Horn, but very brittle.

Naphta, of a reddish colour, by the Japanese calI'd Tsutsono Abra, which signifies red Earth, is found in a River of the Province Jetsingo. It is taken up in such

[174]     places, where the water hath little or no run, and the Natives burn it in Lamps, instead of Oyl.

Ambergreese

Some Ambergreese is found upon the Coasts of Satzuma, and of the Riuku Islands. A much greater quantity comes from the Coasts of Khumano, as they call them, whereby must be understood the Southern Coasts of Kiinokuni, Isje, and some neighbouring Provinces. It is ftound chiefly in the Intestins of a Whale, which is caught frequently upon the Japanese Coasts, and is by the Natives call'd Fiakfiro, that is, the hundred fathom Fish, because of the length of its Intestins, which is suppos'd to equal that number of fathoms. it is found, as i observ'd, in the intestins of this whale, particullarly in the lower guts, mix'd with chalky limy excrements, almost as hard as stone, and 'tis from the hardness of these excrements, they conjecture upon dissecting, whether or no they are like to meet with ambergreese. the natives have given a very despicable name to this precious com modity, a name however becoming the meanness of its origine, for they call it kusurano fu, that is, the excrement of whales. the ambergreese, as it is tore olf by the waves from the bottom of the sea, and thrown upon the coasts, before it is swallow'd by the whales is a deform'd, flat, slimy substance, not unlike a cow-turd, and withal of a very disagreeable ungratefull smell. people that find it thus floating on the surface of the water, or lying upon the coasts, take several small pieces, squeeze and press them close together, into the form of a round ball, which as it grows dry, becomes also more solid and weighty. others mix and knead it with meal, or flower of ricehusks, by which means they not only encrease the quantity, but heighten and better the colour. however, the ambergreese thus adulterated is easity known, for if you take any quantity and burn it, there will remain a coal, proportionable to the quantity of the stuff mix'd with it. it is observ'd besides that the worms get quickly into this spurious sort of ambergreese. others adulterate it, by mixing it with a certain powder'd rosin of a very agreeable scent, but this cheat also is easily discover'd, for upon burning a piece of it, the mixture of Rosin will evidently appear by the very colour, smell and quality of the smoke. The Chlnese have another way of trying whether it be genuine, they scrape some of it very fine upon hot boiling Tea-water, if genuine, it will dissolve and difuse equally, which the adulterated sort doth not. The Natives use it no otherwise but as an ingredient of other well scented species, in order, as they say, to fix their volatile smell. In the main they value it but little, and 'tis owing entirely to the Dutch and Chinese, who would buy it up at any rate, that they haare now learnt to prize it. And yet every body is at liberty to take it up, where he finds it, and to sell it as his own property. During my stay in Japan, there was a piece to be sold of I40 Catti's weight, and of a greyish colour. It was too Iarge for any single person to purchase, for which reason they sold it by retail, from sixty to seventy Thails a Catti. I bought my self for about thirty ThaiEs of that which was blackest. (A more particular Account of the Ambergreese is inserted in the Appendix)

All sorts of Submarine Plants, Shrubs, Corals, Stones,

Submarint SubsZanrel.

Mushrooms, Sea-fans, Corallines, Fuci, Algae, and the like, as also Shells o f all ki nd s, are fo und pren ti fu lly in the Japanese Seas, no ways inferior in beauty to those found about Amboina and the Spice Islands. But the Natives value them so little, that they won't be at the trouble of looking for them, and if by chance they happen to fish them up amongst other things, their way is to carry them to the next tempie, or chapel of jebus, who is the neptune of the country, thinking that it is not an unpleasing offerint to this god, whom they look upon, and worship, as the protector of sea-faring people.

Minerals not found Japan. Antimony. Salarmoniac, Quick-silver

It remains to say something of the Minerals and Mineral substances, which have not as yet been found in Japan, and are imported from beyond Sea. Antimony and Salarmoniac are absolutely wanted, nor are their qualitiesand uses in the Ieast known to the natives.

Borax

Quicksilver and Borax are imported by the Chinese. I met however with two sorts of Borax, growing naturally in Japan, but they are so throughly mix'd with heterogeneous substances, that the Inhabitants don't

Sublimate

think it worth their while topick them up. Sublimate Mercury is very much ask'd for by some private People, who will give an extravagant price for it. They use it as the chief Ingredient of a Mercurial water, which is in great vogue among them for the cure of ulcers, cancers, and other cutaneous diseases. CinnabarNative Cinnabar is by them given inwardly, in several distempers. The artificial Cinnabar they make use of for a colour. Both are imported from China. The buying and selling of this Commodity is in the hands of private Merchants, who monopolize it by virtue of Letters Patents from the Emperor. The native Cinnabar in general, is of a beautiful red colour, but some of it is so exquisitely fine, that it is sold for more than its weight in Silver.

 

 

Chap. IX. Of the Fertility of the Country, as to Plants.

Fruitfulness of Japan.

It is not in the least surprising, considering either the peculiar happiness of the Japanese Climate, or the industry of its laborious Inhabitants, that the Country affords so large a stock, and such an infinite variety of plants and fruits, both wild and cultivated. as it may deservedly boast of. Most of these their Forefathers, indigent and frugal as they were, used for their food and sustenance. In succeeding ages, as wealth and riches encreas'd, the taste also became more refined, and their tables more sumptuous and magnificent. In this present Chapter, I will take notice only of such Plants as are of a more extensive use, and as to the rest refer the more curious Reader to my Amoenitates Exoticae, wherein I have given a Catalogue, and begun a more accurate and botanical Description of them.

Mulberry-trees

Among the Trees the deservedly claims the first Place. For although its fruits, both black and white, be altogether insipid, and not fit for eating, yet this defect is sufficiently made good by the extensive usefulness of its leaves, which are the common Food of Silk-worms It grows in most parts of Japan, but in great plenty in the Northern Provinces, where many Cities and Villages subsist almost wholly upon the Silk Manufactures, tho' the Silk wove there be not of the finest. The best and most curious Stuff are made by the banish'd Grandees in the Island Fatsinsio, weaving being their chief amusement, but they make them of fine foreign Silk. The Kadsi, or Paper-tree, is of the Mulberry Kind. Tho' it

Paper-tree

grows wild in the Country, yet they transplant and cultivate it in several places, by reason of its great usefulness. It is observed to grow with surprizing quickness, and to spread its branches very far. It affords a great quantity of bark, out of which they make Paper, as also ropes, matches, stuffs, cloth, and several other Things. This Tree also, and the way of making Paper out of its Bark, which is very laborious and tedious, I have more fully describ'd in my Amoenitates Exoticae. (The Account which the Author here mentions hath been inserted in the Appendix.)

Varnish-Tree

The Urusi or Varnish-Tree, is another of the noblest and most useful Trees of this Country. It affords a milky Juice, which the Japanese make use of to varnish, and as we call it, to japan all their Houshold-goods, dishes, and plates of Wood, and this from the Emperor down to the meanest Peasant. For even at Court, and at the Imperial Table, services of lacker'd ware are preferr'd to those of gold and Silver. Another kind of Varnish-tree with narrow leaves, is call'd Faasi: It grows wild on hills and mountains. It affords a small quantity of Milk, and that too of a very bad sort, and therefore the Natives think it hardly worth their while to gather it. The true Urusi is of a kind peculiar to this Country. It grows in the Provinces Figo and Tsikoku. But that which grows in Jamatto is reckon'd the fittest for use, and to yield a better sort of Varnish, than it doth any where else out of this Province. The Indian Varnish-tree, which I take to be the true Anacardinus, is a Tree quite different from the Urusi of the Japanese. At Siam it is call'd Rack-tree. It grows and bears fruits in most Eastern Countries, but is observ'd to afford none of its milky juice to the West of the River Ganges, whether because of the barrenness of the SoiI, or thro' the carelessness and ignorance of the Natives, who do not know how to manage its culture. The greatest quantity of the Milk of this Indian Varnish tree is brought from the Kingdoms of Siam and Cambodia, and sold very cheap all over the East-Indies. It is imported even into Japan, where the Natives use it to lacker things of little value, and also as an ingredient of their scarcer and better sort of Varnish. (The Japanese Varnish-tree is describ'd and figur'd in the Amoenitates, pag. 792.)    [115]     

Bay-tree.

Lauri; or Bay-trees of several kinds grow in Japan. That which bears red berries is a Cannelifera spuria, or rather, by reason of its viscosity, a Cassia lignea. It

Spurious Cinnamon-Tree

resembles exactly the Cinnamon-tree, both in its shape, and in the figure and substance of its leaves. But the bark falls far short of that agreeable sweetness, which is peculiar only to the bark of the true Cinnamon, and it hath more of the aromatick sharpness of a Costus. T his Imperfection I take to be owing entirely to the quality of the Soil, wherein it grows. For I observ'd also, that the bark of the Malabarian, Sumatran, and Javan Cinnamon-trees, (which latter is wholly neglected) hath not near that eminent degree of sharpness and agreeableness to the taste, which the true Ceylonese Cinnamon is so much and so deservedly esteem'd for; that besides it is apt either to lose its aromatick quality in a short time, or that its sharp pungent Particles are so wrapt up in a viscous substance, as to make it altogether unworthy of bearing the very Name of Cinnamon, a substance, which is suppos'd to yield a fine, pleasant, fragrant Oyl, which no Cassia lignea ever will. (v. Amoenit. Exot. p. 772.)

Camphire-tree

The Kus, or Camphire-tree, is also of the Laurel-kind. It bears black and purple Berries. The Camphire is prepar'd by the Country-people in the Province Satzuma,and the Islands Gotho, by a simple decoction of the roots and wood cut into small pieces. It is extremely cheap and 80 to 100 Catti's of the Japanese boil'd Camphire may be had for one single Catti of the true Bornean Camphire, which is said to be a Natural substance gather'd on the stumps of old Camphire-trees in the island of Borneo, upon incisions made between the Bark and Wood. (The Japanese Camphire-tree is describ'd and figur'd p. 770. & seq. of the Amoenitates.)

Tea

Tsianoki, that is the Tea-shrub, is one of the most useful Plants growing in Japan, and yet it is allow'd no other room but round the borders of Rice and Cornfields, and in other barren Places) unfit for the culture of other things. The common drink of the Japanese is brew'd of the larger leaves of this Shrub; but the young and tender leaves dried, powder'd and mix'd in a Cup of hot water into a sort of Soup, are drank in houses of people of quality before and after their meals: And it is the custom of the Country to present friends that come to visit them, with one or more dishes of Tea, both when they come and go. (A complete Description of this Shrub, of its culture, growth, &c. hath been inserted in the Appendix.)

Sansio

Sansio, is a middle-sized Tree with prickles. They make use of its bark and husks instead of pepper or ginger, and they eat the leaves by reason of their pleasant aromatick taste, as they do also the Riches, which grow in the Country. (v. Amoen. Ex. p. 892, where this Tree is describ'd and figur'd.)

Fig-trees

There are three different sorts of Fig-trees growing in Japan. One is call'd Kaki, if otherwise it may be call'd a Fig-tree, it differing from it in several particulars. It grows very plentifully in all parts of the Empire. It is a very ugly deform'd sort of a Tree to look at, much like a short old Apple-tree. It hath long oval leaves, without

[180]    notches. The fruit resembles a reddish Apple both in shape and colour, and its fleshy part hath the taste of a delicate Fig. The seed is of a hard, and almost stony Substance, and not unlike Gourd-seeds. It is no less commendable for its great fruitfulness, than it is for its extensive use, for the fruits of it dried afford a pleasant and agreeable food for rich and poor. The Chinese preserve them with Sugar. The second sort of Figs is not unlike that which grows with us in Europe, only it grows on a Tree, with broad, oblong, rough leaves without 4 notches. Our European Fig-tree makes up the third sort. It was brought into the Country, and planted there by the Portuguese. It bears a very large fruit, bigger than ours, and I think better tasted. But it is very scarce. I need not mention here any thing of the Sycamores, or

Wild-fig-tree

Wild-fig-tree, because its fruits are not eat in the Country, tho' it grows there very plentifully. (The two first sorts of the Fig-tree are describ'd and figur'd, p. 803, & seq. of the Amoen. Exoticae)

Chesnut-trees

Chesnut-trees grow in great plenty in Japan, particularly in the Province Tsikusen, and they bear Chesnuts much larger and better than ours. Apple-trees, such as we have them in Europe, they know nothing of. Nor have they more than one sort of Pears, of that kind, which we call

Pears

Winter-pears. They grow in great plenty, and come to an extraordinary bigness, the least weighing seldom less than a pound: But they are not fit to be eat raw.

Wallnut-trees

Wallnut-trees grow chiefly in the Northern Provinces. In the same Provinces grows a certain tall kind of Taxus,

Kaja

calI'd by the Japanese Kaja, with oblong nuts, inclos'd in a fleshy pulp, and not unlike, in bigness and shape, to the Arrack-nut. These Nuts are not very agreeable to z the taste, when fresh, tho' taken-out of their pulp, for they have something astringent in them: They taste better when dried. they have a gentle purging quality, which is owing to their sweet Oyl, and are for their many medicinal vertues serv'd at table along with the desert. The Oyls express'd out of these Nuts is very sweet and agreeable, and tastes not unlike the Oyl of sweet Almonds. It is much commended for its medicinal vertues, and also made use of to dress victuals. The smoke of the kernels of these Nuts is the chief ingredient of the best and dearest Japanese Ink. (This kind of Taxus is describ'd and figur'd, p. 814 of the Amoenit.)

Pistaches

Another sort of Nuts, call'd Ginan, as big as large Pistaches grow very plentifully almost every where in Japan, on a fine tall tree, the leaves of which are not unlike the large leaves of an Adianthum. The Japanese call it Itsionoki. The Nuts affort plenty of Oyl, which is also much commended for several uses. As to a more accurate description of this Tree, I refer the Reader to the Amoenitates Exotic. p. 812. There are two sorts of Oaks grow in the Country, both different from ours.

Oakl.

The Acorns of the larger sort are boil'd and eat by the common People. The fruit of the Naatsme, or PaliurusNaatsme

Of Prosp. Alpinus, as it grows in the Country, is extraordinary good, and I think much larger than I saw it any where else.

Pome Citron-trees. Oranges. Lemons.

Pome Citron-trees are to be seen only in the Gardens of the curious. Oranges and Lemons grow very plentifully, and of different sorts. That sort of Lemons, which is reckon'd the best, is call'd Mican. It resembles a Peach, both in shape and bigness, and hath an excellent aromatick flavour, but tastes somewhat sower. Another sort they call Kinkan. It is much scarcer, in shape and bigness not unlike a Nutmeg, and exceedingly sower. It grows on a shrub, rather than a Tree, and is much used n dressing their victuals, and in what they call Atsiaer. (v. Am. Exot. p. 801.)

Vines. Brambleberries. Rasberries. Strawberries. Plums.

They plant but few Vines, because they observe, that the Grapes won't easily ripen. Brambleberries and Rasberries, are not very agreeable to the taste. Strawberries are entirely insipid and not eat. With Peaches, Apricocksand Plums they are plentifully supplied. Of Plums particularly they have two sorts, both different from ours, one white, the other purple, both granulated like Mulberries, and ingredients of what they call Atsiaer. Cherry trees, and the like, are kept only for the sake of the flowers, as are also by some the Apricock and Plumtrees which they improve much by culture, so that the flowers become as big as roses, and in the Spring, when they are in full blossom, afford a most delightful sight about their temples, in their gardens and walks, the trees being thick cover'd with the Flowers, as with Snow.

Firs

Firs and Cypress-trees are the most common Trees in their woods and forests. There are several different sorts of both. Houses and Ships are built of the wood, of which are made also all sorts of Houshold-goods, as cabinets, trunks, boxes, tubs and the like. The branches, and what falls down, serve for fewel and fire-wood. - The common people burn also the nuts and leaves, which fall down from the trees, and gathering the same daily they keep the ground and roads neat and clean. For ornament's sake, they are planted in rows along the roads, and over the ridges of hins and mountains, which makes travelling very pleasant. The natives, as they improve every inch of ground, take care to plant them in sandy and barren places, which are good for nothing else. No Firs nor Cypress-trees may be cut down, without leave from the Magistrate of the place; and lest the felling of them should in time too much prejudice their growth they must always plant young ones instead of those they cut down.

Bambous

Bambous are very common, and of great use here, as every where in the Indies. Several sorts of Houshold goods, baskets, matches, and other things are made of them, as are also gutters and spouts, and the walls of houses. A particular sort of 13ambous grows in the Province Oomi, which the Dutch export by the name of Rottang, and sell for walking-canes. I shall explain else where, how they are fitter for sale. Both Firs and Bambous are in great esteem among the Japanese, for their constant verdure; and the superstitious believe, that they have no small influence over the happy occurrences of human life. The Temple-walks, and other holy places, are adorn'd with them, chiefly upon their festivals and other solemn days: And they make frequent allusions to them in their emblematical and poetical writings, particularly in congratulatory Poems; for they are of opinion, that they will subsist a long while, that common Bambous will stand several hundred years, and that the common Fir, which they call MatznokiX will come to the age of a thousand, that then it will bend down its branches towards the ground, as not being able to support itself any longer. And lest the truth of this assertion should be call'd in question, they shew up and down the Country some Firs and Bambous of an uncommon size indeed, and pretended long standing. I have seen some extraordinary large ones my self.

Cypress-trees

Finoki, and Suggi are two sorts of Cypress-trees, yielding a beautiful light whitish wood, but nevertheless of a good substance, and remarkable for this singular quality, that it sucks in no water, and might well pass for Cedar-wood. It hath been sometimes forbid by the Emperor to fell these trees for any use whatsoever. But little regard is had to orders of this kind, particularly in those provinces which are remote from Court, unless there be a very severe punishment put upon transgression thereof.

Stinking Maki-Tree. Oak. Iron-tree.

Ksamaki, that is a stinking Maki-tree, Ssinoki a sort of Oak, and Jusnoki, that is Iron-tree, so call'd from the uncommon hardness of its wood, are all very common trees. Most Houses are built of the wood of them. Fatznoki, a tree growing about the City of Jeseri, and the root of the Camphire-tree, afford the best and scarcest wood for cabinets, chests of drawers, and such sort of work, by reason of the curious running of its grain.

Japan I think may vie with most, if not all, known Countries, for a great variety of beautiful plants and flowers, wherewith kind nature hath most liberally and curiously adorn'd its fields, hills, woods and forests. Some of these they transplanted into gardens, and improv'd by assiduity and culture to the utmost, and indeed to a

[184]

interr'd. Nobody may, under severe penalties, insult or abuse them, and to kill them is a capital Crime, whatever mischief they do. In this case, notice of their miF demeanours must be given to their keepers, who are alone empower'd to chastise and to punish them. This extra

 

Fig. 31. Foo, a chimerical bird of Paradise, according to the Chinese

ordinary care for the preservation of the Dog-kind is the effect of a superstitious fancy of the now reigning t Emperor, who was born in the Sign of the Dog, (The Reader is desir'd to take notice, that the Dog is one of the

[199]    twelve Celestial Signs of the Japanese, as shall be shewn hereafter in Book II. Chap. 2.) and hath for this reason so great an esteem for this Animal, as the great Roman Emperor Augustus Caesar is reported in Histories to have

 

Fig. 32. Foo, a chimerical bird of Paradise, as figur'd by the Japanese

 

had fior Rams. The natives tell a pleasant tale on this head. A Japanese as he was carrying up the dead carcass of a Dog to the top of a mountain, in order to its burial, srrew impatient, grumbled and curs'd the Emperor's birth Qiay and whimsical commands. His companion, tho'

[200]

 

 

Chap. X. Of the plenty of the Country, as to Beasts Birds, Reptiles, and Insects.

Of the Animals of this Country some are merely Chimerical, not existing in nature nor invented by the Japanese themselves but borrow'd from their Neighbours the Chinese. Of these it will not be improper to give some account, before I proceed to describe those, which really exist.

Kirin, according to the description and figure, which the Japanese give of it, is a winged Quadruped, of incredible swiftness, with two soft horns standing before the breast, and bent backwards, with the body of a Horse, and claws of a Deer, and a head which comes nearest to that of a Dragon. The good nature and holiness of this Animal are so great, that they say, it takes special care, even in walking, not to trample over any the least Plant, nor to injure any the most inconsiderable Worm, or Insect, that might by chance come under its feet. Its conception and birth require a particuIar constellation in Heaven, and the birth of a Sesin upon earth. Sesin is a Man endow'd by nature with an incomparable understanding, and a more than human penetration, a Man capable to dive into the Mysteries of divine and supernatural things, and withal so full of love towards Mankind, as to reveal his discoveries for their common benefit. There are famous, as such, the two Chinese Emperors Gio and Siun, the memory of whose excellent Government, and the great discoveries they made in the knowledge and virtues of Plants, will be always dear in that Empire: Koosi and Moosi, two Chinese Philosophers: Siaka an Indian Philosopher, and great discoverer of supernatural truths: Darma in China, and Sotoktais in Japan, both founders d Persons of an unspotted holy Life. of particular Sects) an of this Creature according to the 25. is the. Figure the same according to the Japanese.) Chinese) and Fig. .26 there are two other Chimera's of the Besides the Kirin)ne is call'd Suugu, represented in . Quadruped kind: unlike a Leopard, as to its shape, It It before the breast, bent back but hath two soft s call'd Kaitsu, or Kaisai. This hath 8 wards- The other Fox in its shape, two horns before something of the I horn in the forehead and a row the breast, another of prickles, like the Crocodile, along the back (Se After the four-footed Chimera's, the Tats, Dria or . Dsja, as it is call'd by the Japanese, that is, the must be mention'd. The    [124]    Chronicles and histories of their Gods and Heroes are full of fabulous Stories of this Animal. They believe that it dwells at the bottom of the Sea, as in its proper element. They represent it in their Books, as a huge, long, four-footed Snake, scaly allover the body) like the Crocodil, with sharp prickles, along the back, but the head is beyond the rest monstrous and terrible The Tail of the Japanese Oragon ends, as it e) into a two-edged sword. (Fig. 29.) Some of the Japanese Emperor's cloth, his arms, Scimeters, knives, and the like, as also the furniture and hangings of the Imperial Palace) are adorn'd with figures of this Dragon, holding a round jewel, or pearl in the right fore-claw. The Japanese Dragon hath but three claws on each foot, whereby it is distinguish'd from the Chinese I i Dragon, which is represented with five. Tatsmak;erial another Dragon, with a long watry tail. It is believ,ds that this also lives at the bottom of the Sea, and b'. fi in' up from thence into the Air, occasions by its viOlentt turnings, what we call a Water-spout, which Phtnomenon is very common on the Japanese Seas, and observ'd frequently to break towards the Coasts (See Fig. 30 )

Foo is a Chimerical, but beautiful, large Bird, of Paradise, of a near kin to the Phinix of the ancients It dwells in the high regions of the air, and it hath this common with the Kirin, that it never comes down from thence) as the Japanese religiously believe, to honour the Earth with its blessed presence, but upon the birth of a Sesin, or that of a great Emperor, or upon some such other extraordinary occasion. The Foo of the Chinese is represented in Fig 3I. and that of the Japanese in Fig. 32. Thus far the Chimerical Animals. I proceed now to give an account of such as do really exist.

Considering the largeness and extent of the Japanese Empire, it is but sparingly supply'd with four-footed Beasts, wild or tame. The former find but few desart places, where they could increase and multiply, and follow their usual shy way of life. The latter are bred up only for carriage and agriculture. Pythagoras's doctrine of the transmigration of the Soul being receiv'd almost universally, the natives eat no Flesh-meat, and living, as they do, chiefly upon Vegetables, they know how to improve the ground to much better advantage, than by turning it into meadows and pastures for breeding of Cattle. l'o begin with the tame Beasts. There are Horses in the Country: They are indeed little in the main, but some of them not inferior in shape, swiftness and dexterity to the Persian Breed. They serve for state, for riding, for carriage and ploughing. The best Horses come from the Provinces Satzuma and Osju. And a certain breed of nd little Horses from Kai is very much esteem'd. Oxen and Cows serve only for ploughing and carriage. Of milk and butter they know nothing. They have a sort of large gudless of a monstrous size, with bunches on the back, like Carnels, which serve for carriage and transport of goods only, <   [125]    in large Cities. They know nothing of Asses, Mules, Camels, and Elephants. Sheep and Goats were ffi kept formerly by the Dutch and Portuguese at Firando, where the kind still subsists. They might be bred in the Country to great advantage, if the natives were permitted to eat the flesh, or knew how to manage and manufacture the Wool. They have but few Swine, which we brought over from China, and are bred by the COuntrye people in Fisen, not indeed for their own Use, wh;ch would be contrary to their superstitious Notions) but to sell them to the Chinese, who come over for trade every year, and are great admirers of Pork, tho' otherwise the doctrine of Pythagoras, about the transmigration of Soulsa hath found place likewise in China. Since the now reigning Emperor came to the throne, there are more Dogs bred in Japan, than petrhaps in any one Country hateverX and than there were before even in this Empire. They have their Masters indeed, but lie about the Streets, and are very troublesome to passengers and travellers. Every street must, by special command of the Emperor, keep a certain number of these Animals, and provide them with victuals. There are Huts built in every street, where they are taken care of when they fall sick. Those that die, must be carried up to the tops of mountains and hills, as the usual burying-places, and very decently interr'd. Nobody may, under severe penaltie abuse them, and to kill them is a capital Crime, whatev mischief they do. In this case, notice of their er demeanours must be given to their keepers, who are al s empower'd to chastise and to punish them. This extraordinary care for the preservation of the Dog-kind is the effect of a superstitious fancy of the now reigning Emperor, who was born in the Sign of the Dog, (The Reader is desir'd to take notice, that the Dog is one of the 198 twelve Celestial Signs of the Japanese, as shall be shewn reafter in Book II. Chap. 2.) and hath for this reason so eat an esteem for this Animal, as the great Roman Emperor Augustus Caesar is reported in Histories to have had for Rams. The natives tell a pleasant tale on this head. A Japanese, as he was carrying up the dead carcass of a Dog to the top of a mountain, in order to its burial, grew impatient, grumbled and curs'd the Emperor's birth day and whimsical commands. His companion, tho' 199 sensible of the justice of his complaints, bid him ho1 w tongue and be quiet, and instead of swearing and d his return thanks to the Gods, that the Emperor was no ng) in the Sign of the Horse, because in that case th n wou'd have been much heavier. Greyhounds and Spanle1 are wanting. They hunt but little, and only with conlmOll Dogs, this kind of diversion being not very proper fo populous a Country, and where there is so little ga They have a particular beautiful kind of Cats, which is a domestick Animal with them, as with us. They are of a whitlsh colour, with large yellow and black spots, and a very short Tail, as if it    [126]    had been purposely cut oi They don't care for mousing, but love mightily to be carried about, and caress'd chiefly, by Women. Of four footed wild Beasts the Country produces Deer, Hares and Boars, all which the adherents of some Sects are permitted to eat at certain times of the year. The Island MijOsima, or Akino MijOsima, so call'd from the neighbourhood of the Province Aki, is famous for a particular breed of Deer, which they say are very tame and familiar with the Inhabitants. It is contrary to the Laws of the Country to chase and to kill them. The Country People take care to remove their dead Carcases from their Houses and Fields, forasmuch as the Governor of the Island is empower'd by virtue of another Law, to sentence those, before whose doors, or upon whose ground such Carcases are found, to some days work, either at the Temples, or for the Publick. They have some few Monkeys of a docile kind, with short tails, of a brownish dark colour, with naked red faces and backs. A Mounte bank shew'd one about the Country, which he pretended was 106 years old, and which play'd several artful tricks with great dexterity. They have some few Bears in the Northern Provinces, but of a small kind. Tanuki is a very singular kind of an Animal, of a brownish dark colour, with a snout not unlike a Fox's snout, and pretty small: It seems otherwise to be of the Wolf's kind. They have likewise a sort of wild Dogs, with large gaping

Itutz is a small Animal of a redish colour. It 3nother larger sort of it is call'd Tin: They both live in 1: hOuseS) and lodge themselves under the roofs, they are so tame) that they might be rank'd among the domestick Animals. They are very dextrous at catching of Fowl, chiefly Chickens, and Fish. The whole Country swarms With Rats and Mice. The Rats are tam'd by the Natives, R. and taught to perform several tricks. Rats thus taught M are the common diversion of some poor People. The best of the kind, and which play with most dexterity are to be seen at Osacca, as the place which Mountebanks, Jugglers and Raryshow-people resort to from all parts of the Empire. Foxes also are very common. The Natives Fe believe that they are animated by the Devil, and their Historical and Sacred Writings are full of strange accounts of several odd accidents, which happen'd with, and with regard to Foxes. The Fox-hunters however are very expert in conjuring and stripping this animated Devil, the Hair and Wool being very much coveted for their writing and painting Pencils. They make the same distinction between the Kis, or Fox, and Oni or Devil, as they do in Sweden between Faan, and Dieblen. Of Tygers, Panthers, Lyons, and such other voracious Animals Japan is entirely free.

Thus much of the four footed wild and tame Beasts, which are to be met with in Japan. The Insects of the Reptile kind are next to be taken into consideration. R, Among these a mischievous small Creature,    [127]    known all over the East-Indies by the name of white Ants, claims g the first place. It is a small slender Worm, perfectly white like Snow. They live together in commonalty, as our European Ants do, from whom they do not much differ in shape and bigness. Their head and breast, are of a brownish dark colour and hard to the touch. The Japanese call them Do Toos, which is as much as to say, Piercers, an Epithet, which they very well deserve, for they pierce and perforate whatever they meet with, Stones only and Ores excepted, and when once they get into a Merchant's Ware-house, they are able within a very sh compass of time to ruin and to destroy his best Good Nothing hath been as yet found out, that will keep them off, but Salt laid under the Goods and spread about theln Our common European Ants are their mortal Enemies and whatever place the one sort takes possession of, the others must necessarily quit it. They are no more able than Moles to support the open air, and whenever they go out upon an expedition, they defend themselves by building arches or trenches all along their march, which they know how to tie fast to the ground. These arches are much of the same substance with that of wasp's-nests I was told surprizing and melancholly Stories of their quick and mischievous marches and expeditions. But I will only relate what I was an Eye-witness of my self. During my stay at Coylang, a Dutch Fort upon the Coasts of Malabar, I had an apartment assign'd me in the Governor's own House. One Night I did not go to bed till about mid-night, having been very busy. The next Morning, when I rose, I took notice of the marks of such arches upon my table, which were about the bigness of mJ little finger, and upon a more accurate inspection I found, that these Animals had pierc'd a passage of that thickness up one foot of the table, then across the table (tho' as good luck would have it, without any damage done to the papers and things I had left there) and so down again through the middle of the other foot into the floor. All this was perform'd within a few hours time. Some attribute the cause of so quick and surprizing a corrosion to the sharpness of their excrements, but wrongly as I found upon examination, for I took notice, that their snouts were arm'd with four sharp crooked pinchers, which in m) opinion, are Instruments far more proper to do such quick execution, than any excrements how sharp and corrosive soever.

Mukadde, according to the common Japanese dialect) and Goko in their significant or Character language, are not what we call Aselli or Wood-lice, but the Indian Millepedes, Palmer-worms, or Forty-legs, a worm of about two or three inches in length, slender, of a brown colour, having a great number of legs on both sides, from whence it hath borrow'd its name. The Indian Forty-legs are very venomous, and their bites are

reckon'd more dangerous and painful, than those of the Scorpion. There are but few in Japan, and those not very    [128]    mischievous. The part which is stung, or bit, is dress'd with spittle, and the bite seldom observ'd to be attended with ill consequences. (See Fig. 33.)

The Lizards of this Country do not differ from our common European Lizards.

There are but few Snakes in the Country. o most famous is call'd Fitakutz, and Fibakari. It is the green colour, with a flat head and sharp teethv It h a borrow'd its name from the length of the day, or the time the Sun stays upon the Horizon, because People bit by it, are said to die before Sun-set. Soldsers are very fond of its flesh, which they eat, firmly believing, that Yt hath the virtue of making them bold and couragious This Snake calcin'd in an earthen-pot, hermetically seal'd gives that powder, which they call Gawatsio, and which is very famous for its vertues in curing several internal distempers. This same Powder, put under the gutters of a house, is said in a short time to produce young Snakes of the same kind. I met with this sort of Snake no where else but upon the Coasts of Malabar, where I was shewad some by the Bramines. Another sort of Snakes of a monstrous size, call'd Jamakagats, or according to the common Dialect Uwabami, and sometimes Dsja, that is Dragon, is found in waters and upon mountains. It is very scarce, and when taken, shew'd about for money. (See Fig. 34.) From the Reptiles I proceed to the Birds.

Of tame Fowl they keep Chickens and sometimes Ducks, but being as I took notice above, imbued with the superstitious notions of Pythagoras, the generality will not eat them, and they are kill'd and sold to such as do venture to eat them, only by Persons of a mean extraction When a Man lies at the point of death, as also upon those days which are sacred to the memory of deceas'd Persons, none of their relations and friends may kill any bird or beast whatever. In the mourning years for the death of an Emperor, and at any other time, when the Emperor thinks fit to order it, no living creature whatever mae be kill'd or brought to market in any part of his dominions

The Cocks oftner find pardon than Hens, and are kept alive with great care, because they are held in great estetm' chiefly among the religious Orders, by reason of their measuring the time, and foretelling future changes of the weather. Wild Fowl, tho' naturally shy, are in this opulous Country grown so familiar, that many kinds of tPhem might be rank'd among the tame. The Tsuri, or Crane, is the chief of the wild Birds of the Country, and Cranc. hath this particular Imperial Privilege, that nobody may shoot him without an express order from the Emperor, and only for the Emperor's own pleasure or use. In SaiKokf however, and in other Provinces remote from Court) a less strict regard is had to the like Imperial Commands. The Cranes and Tortoises are reckon'd very happy Animals in themselves, and thought to portend good luck to others, and this by reason of their pretended long and fabulous life, of which there are several remarkable instances recorded    [129]    in their Historical Writings. For this reason the Imperial Apartments, walls of Temples, and other happy places are commonly adorn'd with Figures of them, as also with Figures of Firs and Bambous for the like reason. I never heard Country people, and Carriers, call this Bird otherwise than, O Tsurisama, that is, My great Lord Crane. There are two different kinds of them, one white as Snow, the other grey or ash-colour'd There are several kinds of Saggi, or Herons, which differ in colour and size. The chief are Sijro Saggi, the white Heron, Goi Saggi, the grey Heron, both very common, and Awoi Saggi, a Heron of a bluish colour and almost as big as a Crane. There are two different sorts of wild Geese, which couple each with their kind. One sort is as white as Snow, only the extremities of the wings are black; the other is grey or ash-colour'd. Both are very common in this Country, particularly the grey ones, and so familiar, that they might be taken for tame, for they will not fly up, nor get out of the way at any body's approach. They do a great deal of mischief in the Fields, and yet no body may disturb, or kill them, under pain of death, except those who have bought the privilege to shoot them in some tracts of ground. The Country-people, to keep them off, surround their Fields with nets, tho' to very little purpose, for they will fly over the nets, as I have seen my self, to get at their Food.

Of Ducks also there are several differing kinds, and as tame as the Geese. One kind particularly I cannot forbear mentioning, because of the surprizing beauty of its male, call'd Kinmodsui, which is so great, that being shew'd its

picture in colours, I could hardly believe my own Eyes, till I saw the Bird it self, it being a very common one (See Fig. 35.) Its feathers are wonderfully diversify'd with the finest colours imaginable, about the Neck and breast chiefly they are red. The head is crown'd with a most magnificent topping. The Tail rising obliquely, and the wings standing up over the back in a very singular manner, afford to the Eye a sight as curious, as it is uncommon. There are also Pheasants of uncommon beauty. One kind particularly is remarkable for the various colours and lustre of its feathers, and for the beauty of its tail, which equals half a Man's length, and in a curious variety and mixture of the finest colours, chiefly blue and gold, is no ways inferior to that of a Peacock.

Woodcocks are a very common Bird; they are eat by th adherents of some Sects, as are also the pheasants, Geese and Ducks. There is a sort of wild Pigeons with black and blue feathers, tho' otherwise they are no great beauties The Natives won't suffer them to nest in their Houses because they found by experience, that their dung upon removal is very apt to take fire, and they say that many an unlucky accident happen'd thereby.

Storks stay in the Country all the year round.    [130]     

The best Falcons are caught in the Northern Provinces and are kept more for State than Sport.

Hawks are common here, as they are every where in the East-Indies, and a very proud Bird, as is also a kind of Ravens, of a middling size, which was first brought over fiom China, as a Present to the Emperor.

Another scarce Bird was sent over from Corea, by way of Present to the Emperor, and is thence call'd Coreigaras, that is, a Corean Raven.

Our common European Crows, as also Parrots, and some other Indian Birds, are not to be met with in Japan.

Foken, or according to the common Dialect Fototenis, is a scarce Night Bird, of an excellent and delicious taste, and a dish only for the tables of people of quality upon extraordinary occasions. The ashes of this Bird calcin'd, and put into old sower Sacki, are said to restore it to its former taste and goodness. (See Fig. 36.)

 

Misago, or Bisago, is a voracious Sea Bird of the Hawkkind. It preys chiefly upon Fish. It makes a hole in some Rock, upon the Coasts, where it lays up its prey and provision, which is observ'd to keep as well as pickel'd Fish, or Atsiaar, and is thence call'd, Bisagonosusi, or the Bisago's Atsiaar. It tastes very salt, and is sold dear Whoever knows such a Cave can make a good deal of Money of it, provided he doth not take out too much at a time. (See Fig. 37.)

Mews, Sea Ravens, Snipes, Sea-pies, Sparrows,

Swallows, and some other small Birds are as common

here, as in Europe.

tarks sing much better here, than they do in Europe. The Nightingales, if they have a good voice, are sold cometimes to curious People for twenty Cobangs a piece. thus far, what I had to observe concerning the Birds of this Country.

Of flying Insects the Country hath Bees, consequently g Some Honey and Wax, tho' but in a small quantity. I Humble-Bees, Wasps, common Flies, Gnats, Fire-flies, several sorts of Beetles and Bugs, as also Locusts, and a great variety of other Insects of this Tribe, it hath common with Europe, besides some other particular and remarkable sorts, the chief of whlch I will here giva a short account of.

Among the Butterflies there is one very large sort call'd Jamma Tsio, or the Mountain Butterfly. It is either entirely black, or party colour'd, and curiously diversified with white, black and other spots, chiefly upon its forke,d wings. Komuri is a large, spotted, party colour'd, hairy, beautiful Nightfly. The same name is given also to Bats Of Beetles, they have several scarce and beautiful kinds One in particular is very large, in shape not unlike the Dung-fly, shining, black, with two crooked and branched Horns, one larger standing over    [131]    the Nose, after the manner of a Rhinoceros's Horn, the other smaller, standing out on one side from the Shoulder. This Animal cannot walk easily. It lives chiefly under ground. It is scarce, and the Natives have as yet given it no name.

A certain kind of brown Beetles call'd Sebi, and sometimes Semi, affords several curious and remarkable things to the attentive Eye of an inquisitive Naturalist. They are of three different kinds. The largest is call'd Kuma Sebi. (See Fig. 38. A. B.) It resembles in shape and bigness that sort of Flies, which with us in Europe are generally observ'd to fly about in the Evening, but it hath no Wings. In the Spring they creep out of the Ground, (where they have lain in Winter-quarters) in the nighttime, and fasten themselves with their sharp hoary legs to Trees, their branches, or leaves, or whatever in their march they can lay hold of. A little while after they burst, and split their back length­ways, to give room to another Fly not unlike a Beetle, which was enclos'd within it, tho' much bigger than the Prison to which it was confin'd. Some hours after, this second Fly flies away with a hurrying noise. This curious little Animal hath been described by Gessner by the name of Cicada Bursting open the shell in which it lay, and at the same time spreading out its four wings, it makes a sharp and loud noise, which they say, may be heard (a thing almost incredible) very distinctly at full an English Mile's distance. Woods and mountains are full of the noise these little creatures make. They disappear gradually in the Dogdays, and 'tis said, that they creep into the ground again in order to undergo a new Metamorphosis or change, and to re-appear in the same state the next year. How far this agrees with truth, I am not able to determine for

00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

following Fable ows its origin to the unparallel'd beauty of this little creature. They say that all other Night-flies fall in love with it, and that to get rid of their importunities it maliciously bids them (for a trial of their constancy) to go and to fetch fire. The blind lovers scruple not to obey commands, and flying to the next fire or candle, they never fail to burn themselves to death. The female is not near so beautiful as the male, but grey, or ash-colour'd and spotted.

 

 

Chap. XI. Of Fish and Shells.

The Sea, and its Productions, contribute full as much towards the sustenance of the Natives, as the growth of the Country, Rice only excepted. The Sea all about Japan is plentifully stor'd with all sorts m of Sub-marine Plants, Fish, Crabs and Shells, of all which there are very few, but what were eat by their indigent Ancestors, and are so to this day. There are even many which in these wealthy and refin'd Ages appear upon the sumptuous tables of People of the highest quality. Both Fish, Crabs and Shells, are comprehended under one general Name Kiokai, or Iwokai. In this present chapter, which may be look'd upon as an Introduction to one of the following, wherein I intend to treat of their tables and kitchin, I will set down as many of them as came to my knowledge, along with their true Japanese Names, though it must be observid in general, that several of them are found likewise in our European and other Seas.

Of all the animal productions of the Japanese Seas, I know none of so extensive an use, for rich and poor, as the Kudsuri or Whale. It is caught frequently about A Japan, but particularly in the Sea Khumano, which washes the Southern Coasts of the great Island Nipon, as    [133]    also about the Islands Tsussima and Goto, and upon the Coasts of Omura and Nomo. The common way of catch them is with darts, or harping-irons, as they do in thg Groenland-fishery, but the Japanese Boats seem to b fitter for this purpose than ours, being small, narrw, tapering into a sharp point at one end, with five oarS ten Men each, who row them with incredible swiftness About 1680, a rich Fisherman in the province Omura whose name was Gitaijo, found out a new way of catchin Whales with Nets made of strong ropes about two Incheg thick. This method was afterwards followid with good success by a Countryman in the Islands of Gotho, whose name was Iwonomo. They say, that as soon as the Whale finds his head entangled in a net, he cannot without great difficulty swim further, and may be very easily kill'd with Harpoon-irons after the common manner. The reason why this new Method, which seem'd to bid very fair for success, hath not been universally receiv'd is, because it requires a greater, and much more expensive set of proper Tackle, than common Fishermen can afford. For whereas the expence of Whale-fishing, after the common manner, $eldom exceeds 20 Chests of Silver, this cannot be so much as attempted with a less Sum.

There are several sorts of Whales, which differ in their names, shape, and bigness.. Sebio is the chief, and indeed the largest Fish of the Whale-kind. It affords most Train-oyl, and its flesh is very good, and wholesom, so far that Fisher-men and the common People attribute their good state of health amidst all the injuries of cold and weather, which they are continually expos'd to, chiefly to their eating this flesh. z. Awo Sangi, commonly Kokadsura, that is a small Whale, is grey or ash-colour'd, smaller than the Sebio, from which it also differs something in shape. 3. Nagass, is commonly 20 to 30 fathom long, and hath this particular, that he can stay under water for two or three hours, during which time he can travel a vast way, whereas other Whales must continually come up to the surface of the water for fresh supplies of air. 4. Sotookadsura, that is, the Whale of blind People)

50 call'd from the figure of a Bijau, or a sort of a Lute, whiCh blind people in this Country use to play upon, whiCh is said to be naturally represented on its back. It is not a very large sort, and seldom exceeds ten fathom in length. It is caught frequently about Japan, but the flesh is reckon'd unwholsome food, being, as they say, too hot, and occasioning coughs, fevers, eruptions on the skin, and sometimes the Small-pox. It is brought to market with other fish, and sold for the flesh of the Sebio, but those who know it will never buy it. 5. Mako never exceeds three or four fathom in length. This same name is given to the young ones of the other kinds. That, which I hear speak of, is caught frequently upon the Eastern Coasts of Japan, as also upon the Coasts of Kijnokuni and Satzuma. Ambergreese is found in the intestins of this Whale. The head yields a small quantity of Train-oyl. 6. Iwasikura, that is, Sardin's-Eater, hath a tail and fins like common Fish. We saw this    [134]    sort, when we went up to Court, between CaMinoseki, and Simonoseki, and I took it to be that Fish which the Dutch call Noord Caper. Of all these several kinds of Whales nothing is thrown away as useless, excepting only the large Shoulder-bone. The skin which is black in most kinds, the Flesh which is red and looks like Beef, the intestins, which from their remarkable length are call'd Fiaksiro, that is, an hundred fathoms long, and all the inward parts are eat, pickel'd, boil'd, roasted, or fry'd. The fat or blubber is boil'd into Train-oyl, and even the sediments of the second boiling are eat. The bones, such as are of a cartilaginous substance, are boil'd when fresh, and eat, or scrap'd, clean'd and dried for the use of the kitchin. Out of the nervous and tendious parts, both white and yellow, they make cords and ropes, chiefly for their Cotton-manufactures, as also for their Musical Instruments. Not even the garbage is thrown away, but kept for some use in the Kitchin. Several little things are made of the jaw-bones, fins and other bones, which are of a more solid substance; particularly their fine stilyards for weighing Gold and Silver are made of them and have borrow'd their name from thence.

Satsifoko is a Fish two, three, and sometimes five to six fathoms long, with two long teeth or tusks, stan

Out of the mouth upwards, which are sometimes, by way of ornament, put at the top of castles, temples, and publick buildings. I was inform'd by Fishermen, that this Fish is a cunning and mortal enemy of Whales, and that he kills them by creeping into the mouth, and devouring their tongues. He hath a way, as he creeps in, to put his head and teeth into such a posture, that they are no hindrance to him.

Iruku is a known Fish, call'd Tenije in the Indies, . (Fig. 39.) Furube is another Fish, not very large, (Fig. 4o.) The Dutch call him Blazer, which signifys Blower, because he can blow and swell himself up into the form Gf a round Ball. He is rank'd among the poisonous Fish, and if eat whole, is said unavoidably to occasion death There are three different sorts of it found in the JapaneSe Seas, all in great plenty. The first sort call'd Susumebuka is small, and seldom eat. The second is callud Mabuku

that is the true Buku. This the Japanese reckon a very delicate Fish, and they are very fond of it. But the Head, Guts, bones, and all the garbage must be thrown away, and the Flesh carefully wash'd and cleanid before it is fit to eat. And yet many People die of it, for want, as they say, of thoroughly washing and cleaning it. People that by some long and tedious sickness are grown weary of their lives, or are otherwise under miserable Circumstances, frequently chuse this poisonous Fish, instead of a knife or halter, to make away with themselves. A Neighbour of my Servant at Nangasaki being so strongly infected with the Pox, that his nose was ready to drop off, resolv'd to take this Meal, in order to get rid at once both of his life and distemper. Accordingly h bought a good quantity of this poisonous Fish, cut it intO pieces, boil'd    [135]

it, and in order as he thought, to make the poison still stronger, he took soot from the thatch'd roof of his house, and mix'd it with the rest. After dinner he laid himself down to die, and soon falling mortally sick, he brought up not only the poison he had taken, but a large quantity of viscid, sharp, nasty matter, probably not the least cause of his distemper, and by this means found life and health, in what he sought for death, for he recover'd and was well afterwards. A few years ago fi~~~ e persons of Nagasaki having eat a dish of this Fish, fainted soon after dinner, grew convulsive and delirious, and fell into such a violent spitting of Blood, as made an end of their lives in a few days. And yet the Japanese won't deprive themselves of a dish so delicate in their opinion, for all they have so many Instances, of how fatal and dangerous a consequence it is to eat it. Soldiers only and military men, are by special command of the Emperor forbid to buy and to eat this fish. If any one dies of it, his son forfeits the succession to his fatheräs post, which otherwise he would have been entitled to. It is sold much dearer than common Fish, and not eat, but when fresh. The third sort is call'd Kitamakura, which signifies North Cushion. I could not learn the reason of this Appellation. The same Name is given to a Person that sleeps with his head turn'd to the North. The poison of this sort is absolutely mortal, no washing nor cleaning will take it off. It is therefore never ask'd for, but by those who intend to make away with themselves.

The Sea Horse, or Sea Dog, and, as the Germans call him Wasserbauch, is a very singular fish, much about the length of a Boy of ten years of age, without either staleS or fins, with a large Head, mouth and breast, a large thin belly like a bag, which will hold a large quantity of water He hath thin sharp teeth in the chops much like a snake

The inner parts are so minute, that they are scarce visib]e. He hath two flat cartilaginous feet with fingers, not unlike the hands of a child, under the belly, by the means of which, he creeps, in all likelyhood or walks at the bottom of the Sea. All his parts are eat, none excepted. He is caUght frequently in the Gulf of Jedo, between Kamakura and that Capital, where I saw him brought to market.

Tai, is what the Dutch in the Indies call Steenbrassem. 2 This is very much esteem'd by the Japanese as the King of Fish, and a peculiar Emblem of happiness, partly because he is sacred to their Jebis, or S5eptune, partly by reason of a beautiful variety of shining colours, which appear on him when under Water. It is a very scarce Sish, not unlike a Carp, and finely variegated with red and white. The Female hath some red spots It is so scarce, that upon some great entertainment at Court, or other extraordinary occasions, it is not to be had under a thousand Cobangs. Another sort of this Eish is call'd Kharo Tai, or black Steenbrassem, from the colour. This is not near so much esteem'd, and is caught frequently about SaiKokf.    [136]     

Susuki, is what the Germans call Kahlkopf, that is, 2 Baldhead- (Fig. 41) Funa is a fish not unlike a Carp, I and much commended for his Medicinal Virtues, chiefly against Worms. A larger kind of the same is call'd Najos. Mebaar is a red colour'd fish, in bigness and shape not unlike a Carp, or Steenbrassem, with the Eyes standing out of the head like two balls. It is caught every where in great plenty, and is the common food of poor People. Koi is another sort of it, which also X resembles a Carp, and is sometimes one Sackf and a half long. This sort is caught in Rivers, chiefly about Water falls, against which they endeavour to swim. They are so strong that two Men can hardly hold them. They are exported all over the Empire, fresh and pickel'd. They take some in the Lake of Saifa, or Tensiu which are four Sakf long. (Fig. 42.) Maar, the Salmon is taken in Rivers and fresh water Lakes. Itojori is a Salmonat, or small Salmon. Makuts, is what the Dutch call Harder. Sawara, a King's-fish. Fiuwo is what the Dutch call Draatvish

Ewertz. Kusuna, a short nose. Kamas a Pike. Susuki X is the Schaarvish of the Dutch, only a longer and narrower 4 sort. Adsi is the Maasbancker of the l)utch. Of this there are several diflferent kinds, the chief and largest whereof is call'd Ooadsi. i (Fig. 44.) Taka is what the Dutch call a Kaye. Kame, and Takasame, (Fig. 45.) are j

Rays, of the hard skins of which they make cases and other curious things in Japan. The skin of this fish is imported also from Siam, where it is found much finer. Jeje is a broad flat fish with a long tail. There is one sort of it, which hath a small horny, or bony, sting at the end of the tail, which the Dutch in the Indies call Pijlstaart. The Japanese believe, that this sting taken from a live fish is an infallible remedy against the bite of Snakes, rubbing the bitten part with it- For this reasOn they carry it along with them among other House Medicines Come, or Jel, are Soles, and Karei, Bots or Bruts Bora is a fish much like a pike, with a white and delicious flesh.

Some call him Songaats Fish, because he is taken in the Songaats, or first month of the Japanese year. They pickle and smoke them, as they do pikes at Bremen. These and all pickel'd fish in general, are callad Karasumi. They export them from Nagasaki and Nomo, where they are frequently caught, and carry them to Jedo, and into several other parts of the Empire, tied to straw-ropes, ten to a rope. They are exported by the Dutch and Chinese. Other fish made into Karassumi are valu'd but little by the Natives. The best sort of the Katsuwo fish is caught i about Gotho. They cut this fish into four pieces, which they dry by degrees over the damp of hot boiling water, and bring it upon the table along with the Liquors. The Dutch export it by the name of Comblomaas, which however is not the true name. Managatsuwo is a flat fish, . not unlike a But, with one Eye on each side. Sake, perhaps a sort of Cablian, is a pickel'd fish, not unlike Cod It is imported from the Country of    [137]    Jeso, and hath borrow'd its name from its smell, which is not unlike the smell of their Sake Beer. Tara is a sort of Cod imported from the Northern Provinces; the best of the kind comes from Tsiosijn, whence it is call'd Tsiosijn Tara. Sajori, is what the Inhabitants of Nagasaki call Susumoiwo, and the Dutch Naadelvish, (Fig. 46.) which signifies Needlefish. It is a small fish, not above a span long, thin, with a row of sharp, long prickles along the back. Tobiwo is what the Dutch call a Springer, (Flying-fish) because it leaps out of the water. The Japanese one seldom exceeds a foot in length, and is very delicious, but rarely taken. Iwas, is the Sardin; Kissugo, the Smelt, or Sand-smelt Jeso by the Dutch call'd Sandkruper, is a middling fish between a Smelt and an Eel. Saba are Mackrels. Ai, or Ai no iwo, by the Dutch call'd Modevish, is a fresh-water fish, not above a span long, swimming with surprizing swiftness. Sijroiwo, is what the Dutch call Kleiner Stind: They also call him Weissvish, that is white fish. He is caught in the Spring about the mouths of rivers Kono sijro, call'd by the Dutch Sassap, is a sort of Herring not unlike the Swedish Strohmlings. Kingio, the Gold Fish, is a small fish seldom exceeding a finger in length red? with a beautiful shining, yellow or goldcolour'd tail, whlch in the young ones is rather black. In China and Japan, and almost all over the Indies, this fish is kept in ponds, and fed with flies before their wings come out. Another kind hath a silver-colourad tail. Unagi is the common Eel. Oounagi is another sort of Eels much larger than the common. (Fig. 47.) Jaatzme Unagi, that is an Eel with eight Eyes, is what is call'd in Germany Neunaug, that is Nineeye, or an Eel with nine eyes. (Fig. 48.) Doodsio is by the Dutch call'd Puyt Aal. (Fig. 49.) It is a fish about a finger long, with a very large Head in proportion to the Body, found frequently in waty Ricefields and muddy ponds. They are of two different Kinds, the one with, the other without a beard. They have a Notion, that they may be brought forth artificially out of straw cut, and mix'd with mud and dirt, and expos'd to the heat of the Sun early in the morning. Fammo, by the Dutch call Conger Aal, is larger than a common Eel, which it resembles, when under water, but slenderer. (Fig. 50.)

- Ika is a common Seaqualm- Both the Chinese and Japanese esteem it a scarce and dellcate blt. Fish also are easier caught with the flesh of this qualm, than with an~~~. Other bait. (Figs. SI, 52.) Jako or Sepia, is another Sea qualm with long tails or feet, at the end whereof are, as it were, small hooks, wherewith the creature fastens itself to rocks, or the bottom of the Sea. (Fig. 53.) It is a common Soccano or Side-dish, and eat either fresh, boil'd or pickel'd. There are two sorts of Kuragge, which is k also of the Sea-qualm kind. One is callad Midsukurage, that is, the white qualm. (Fig. 54.) This is common in all Seas, whitish, transparent, watry, and not fit to eat.

The other is scarcer, fleshy, and eatable after it hath been prepar'd and    [138]

depriv'd of its sharpness. It is prepar'd after the following manner. They first macerate them in a dissolution of Alum for three days together, then they rub, wash and clean it, till it grows transparent) which done, it is pickel'd and preserv'd for use. Before the Infusion, the skin is taken off, wash'd, pickelwd and ke t by itself. Some of these Sea-qualms are so large, thPt two men can scarce lift them up. Pickel'd, as they are brought upon the table, they are of the same substance) colour and taste with the edible Bird's-nests (Nidi Alcyonum) brought from China, and I have been credibly inform'd by Chinese Fishermen, that these Bird's Nests are made of the very flesh of this Animal.

Namako, by the Dutch at Batavia call'd KaSerkull, is i edible. (Fig55.) Imori is a small venomous Water-lizard, black, with a red belly. (Fig. 56.) Takanomakura, which is as much as to say, the pillow of the Sea-qualm Tako, is the common Sea-star, and is not eat.

Of all the footed animal produce of the water, the Ki, or Came, Tortoises, are most esteem'd by the JapaneSe being look'd upon as peculiar Emblems of happineSS, by reason of the long life which is ascrib'd to them. That kind particularly, which hath a broad tail much like a large round beard, and which in their learned language is call'd Mooke, and by the cornmon people Minogame) for all it doth not exist in nature, is yet frequently to be seen among other emblematical figures, wherewith t:hey adorn the walls of their temples, the sides of their altars, and the apartments of the Emperor and Princes of the Empire (Figs. 57, 58.) The most common Tortoises are, Isicame, or Sanki, that is, the Stone,or Mountain Tortoise,which is so call'd because found in these places, and is nothing else but the common Land-tortoise. (Fig. 59.) Jo Game, or Doo Game, that is, Fishy. or Water-tortoise, (Fig. 60.) because of its living in the water. They say, that upon the Southern and Eastern Coasts of Japan there are found Tortoises large enough to cover a Man from head to toe.

All sorts of Crabs and Shrimps both of fresh and salt water, are call'd in general Jebi. The following particular Kinds are come to my knowledge. Jebisako is the common small Crab, which is found in great plenty upon the Coasts of the Baltick. Sako signifies all sorts of small fish in general. Si Jebi differ but Wittle from the common Crabs, no more than what they call Dakma Jebi, excepting only, that the latter are caught in fresh water, and will within a year turn black. Kuruma Jebi, is as much as to say Wheel-crabs; they are so call'd from the figure of their tail. Umi Jebi, that is great Crabs or Lobsters, are commonly a foot long. they are boil'd, then cut into small pieces, and brought upon the table, as a Soccana or Side-dish. Care must be taken not to eat their black tail, because it hath been observ'd, that it gives people the belly-ach, or throws them into a Cholera morbus. Siakwa, is a Crab with a broad Tail, which is caught frequently with other small fish. It hath but little flesh, and almost none at the time of the full moon. All the    [139]    testaceous and crustaceous animals, which are found in these Seas, and indeed every where in the Indian Ocean beyond the Eastern shores of the Ganges, are observ'd to be fleshier and fuller, at the time of the new moon, contrary to what happens in our European Seas. Gamina, (Fig. 6I.) otherwise Koona, is a Crab, which lives in a beautiful shell diversified with various colours. (This is what the English call Soldier's Crab, Fresh water Soldier, Hermit Crab, because they live in other People's quarters.) Kani, which signifies Pocket Crab, is our common European fresh-water Crab. It bears the name of the whole Tribe of the fresh-water Crabs. Kabutogani, or Unkiu, is a Crab of a singular structure, with a sharp, long, serrated prickle or sword, standing out from the head, and a roundish, smooth back. (Fig. 62.) Gadsame is no bigger than the common Crab, with the upper shel1 tapering into a point on both sides. It hath four claws, two large ones before, and two behind, which are smaller. (Fig. 64.) Simagani, that is, a Striated Pocketcrab. It rnight be call'd Wart-crab, from the great number of warts and prickles, which cover the Shell all over, the hind Claws only excepted, which are smooth and almost cylindrical. (Fig. 65.) They are caught frequently upon the Eastern Coasts, as also in the Gulf of Suruga. Some of this sort are incredibly large. I bought one of the hind Claws at Suruga in a Cook-shop, which was as long, and full as big as a Man's Shin-bone. (Fig. 63 )

{ A11 sorts of oysters, muscles and shells, of which there is a great plenty and surprizing variety in the Japanese seas, are eat, none excepted, raw, pickel'd, salted, boil'd, or fryed. They are daily gather'd on the Coasts in low water. Divers dive for them to a considerable depth Others fish them with nets. The following sorts are the most common and best known. Awabi, which I have already mentioned, when I spoke of the pearls of this Countr,v, is an open Univalve, as big as a middle siz'd Persian Pearl shell, but deeper. (Fig. 66.) They lie deep underwater, sticking fast to rocks, or to the bottom of the Sea, from whence they are taken up by Fishermen's wives, they being the best Divers of the Country. They go down arm'd with Darts or long knifes, to defend themselves against Kayes and Porpesses, and when they see an Awabi, they pull it ofl^ suddenly before the animal is aware because otherwise it would fasten itself to the rocks, or to the bottom of the Sea, so strongly, that no force woUld be strong enough to tear it off. This shell is fillrd with a large piece of flesh of a yellowish, or whitish colour, and a very tough substance, though without fibres. They say, it was the common food of their necessitous Ancestors, in memory whereof when they entertain company at dinner they always provide a dish of it. It is also become a custom with them, as well among the vulgar, as among people of quality, that when they send one another presents of money, cloth, stuflfs, fruits, or any thing else, a string, or at least a small bit of the dried flesh of this shell is sent    [140]    along with them, as a good Omen, and in order to put them in mind of the Indigency of their Forefathers. The flesh is cut into thin slices or strings, which are extended on a board, and dried. A large Pearl is found sometimes in this Shell, but of an ugly yellowish colour, a deformed shape and of no Value. Tairagi is a flat, long, thin, and very large bivalve, almost transparent, near of a triangular Figure, running from a large base tapering intO a point. The Animal is tied fast to both sides of the shell with a strong tendon. (Fig. 67.) The best of the kind are found in the Gulf of Arima, where it sometimes yields Pearls. Akoja is a flat bivalve, about a hand broad, scaly, on its outward surface, and of a very ugly appearance, within of an exquisite Mother of Pearl's glimmering. The best of the kind, and which yield the finest Pearls, are found in the Gulf of Omura. Mirakai is the common e or lvlaree, oDlong Inln Dlvalves gaplng at DOLII t:llUb, black fresh water Muscle, which is found also in our Rivers and Lakes in Germany. Famaguri, (Fig. 68.) are bivalves much of the same shape and bigness, but thicker, smooth and white within, without of a brown or chesnut colour. Divers curious figures are painted on the inside and they serve as an Amusement to the Court of the Dairi, or Ecclesiastical Hereditary Emperor, who pla) with them after the following manner. Large heaps are thrown on the ground, and every one of the Company having taken his Portion, he wins, that can shew the most pairs. Every pair hath proper hooks, by the means of which they are easily known, and brought together, tho' never so much mix'd. The best are gatherxd, and in greatest plenty upon the Coasts of Quano. Sidsimi is a « small bivalve not unlike the Famaguri, but thinner, and is found sticking in mud. Katsi or Utsikaki, are Oysters. . The Oysters found about Japan are deformed, rough, stony, growing together, and to rocks. There are chiefly two sorts, one remarkably large, the other smaller. The best and largest are found in great plenty in the Gulf of Kamakura. Kisa, or Akagai is also a bivalve, white without, with deep furrows running as it were parallel to each other, within of a reddish colour. (Fig. 69.) They fix a handle to this shell, and use it in the kitchen instead of a spoon,or pail. Nakatagai is a large,ugly,roundish, striated and black shell. Asari, is a small thin shell, grey or ash colour'd. Te or Matee, (Fig. 69.) is an oblong thin bivalve gaping at both ends. The Animal that live5 within it, is reckoned very delicious. Umi Fake is another bivalve much of the same kind, about a span long, and so big, that one can scarce grasp it between the thumb and fore-finger. Its flesh is pickel'd and kept for use. This shell is found only upon the Coasts of Tsikungo, where by express order of the Prince of that Country it is forbid to fish them, till a sufficient quantity hath been provided for the EmperorXs own Table. Takaragai call'd in the Indies Cowers, are brought from the Maldive and other Islands, and imported into Bengala, Pegu, and Siam, where they go for current Money. Those found about Japan are of different    [141]    sorts. (Fig. 70.) The best are brought from the Riuku Islands, and are the chief ingredient of their white Cheek varnish. Sasai (Fig.7I.) is a large, thick, odoriferous, turbinated univalve, white and prickled. Its mouth is shut close, with a flat, thick covering, or operculum, of a stony substance, rough, on the outside not unlike the Lapis Judaicus, only sharper and smooth. Nisi is an Univalve much of the same shape, but larger, and hath not near so good a flesh. Both can fasten themselves very close to rocks, and the bottom of the Sea, like the Awabi. Common People make use of the shell instead of Pots to spit in. Tannisi are the common black Land Snails gather'd for Food in mudd) Rice Fields. They have their mouth shut with an oblong, almost stony operculum. Bai is a Snail in a common oblong, turbinated white shell. Ras or Mina is another of the same kind, but black and smaller. Both are gather'd on the shore in low water. Kabuto is a small, oval, not turbinated univalve. Another small lurbinated univalve is call'd Sugai.

ooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo

 

Chap. XI. Of Fish and Shells.

He Sea, and its Productions, contribute full, as much towards the sustenance of the Natives, as the growth of the Country, Rice only excepted. The Sea all about Japan is plentifully stor'd with all sorts of Sub-marine Plants, Fish, Crabs and Shells, of all which there are very few, but what were eat by their indigent Ancestors, and are so to this day. There are even many which in these wealthy and refin'd Ages appear upon the sumptuous tables of People of the highest quality. Both Fish, Crabs and Shells, are comprehended under one general Name Kiokai, or Iwokai. In this present chapter, which may be look'd upon as an Introduction to one of the following, wherein I intend to treat of their tables and kitchin, I will set down as many of them as came to my knowledge, along with their true Japanese Names, though it must be observxd in general, that several of them are found likewise in our European and other Seas.

Of all the animal productions of the Japanese Seas, I know none of so extensive an use, for rich and poor, as the Kudsuri or Whale. It is caught frequently about Japan, but particularly in the Sea Khumano, which washes the Southern Coasts of the great Island Nipon, as    [133]    also about the Islands Tsussima and Goto, and upon the Coasts of Omura and Nomo. The common way of catching them 1s with darts, or harping-irons, as they do in the Groenland-fishery, but the Japanese Boats seem to te fitter for this purpose than ours, being small, narrO>. tapering into a sharp point at one end, with five oars, or ten Men each, who row them with incredible Swiftlless About 1680) a rich Fisherman in the province OmUra whose name was Gitaijo, found out a new way of catching Whales with Nets made of strong ropes about two Inches thick. This method was afterwards follow'd with good success by a Countryman in the Islands of Gotho, whose name was Iwonomo. They say, that as soon as the Whale finds his head entangled in a net, he cannot without great difficulty swim filrther, and may be very easily kill'd with Harpoon-irons after the common manner. The reason why this new Method, which seem'd to bid very fair for success, hath not been universally receiv'd is, because it requires a greater, and much more expensive set of proper Tackle, than common Fishermen can afford. F or whereas the expence of Whale-fishing, after the common manner, seldom exceeds 20 Chests of Silver, this cannot be so much as attempted with a less Sum.

There are several sorts of Whales, which differ in their ?S. names, shape, and bigness. r. Sebio is the chief, and indeed the largest Fish of the Whale-kind. It affords most Train-oyl, and its flesh is very good, and wholesom, so far that Fishermen and the common People attribute their good state of health amidst all the injuries of cold and weather, which they are continually expos'd to, chiefly to their eating this flesh. 2. Awo Sangi, commonly Kokadsura, that is a small Whale, is grey or ash­colour'd, smaller than the Sebio, from which it also differs something in shape. 3. Nagass, is commonly 20 to 30 fathom long, and hath this particular, that he can stay under water for two or three hours, during which time he can travel a vast way, whereas other Whales must continually come up to the surface of the water for fresh supplies of . air. 4. Sotookadsura, that is, the Whale of blind Peoplen so call'd from the figure of a Bijwu, or a sort of a Lute, vvhich blind people in this Country use to play upon, which is said to be naturally represented on its back. It is not a very large sort, and seldom exceeds ten fathom in length. It is caught frequently about Japan, but the flesh is reckon'd unwholsome food, being, as they say, too hot, and occasioning coughs, fevers, eruptions on the skin, and sometimes the Small-pox. It is brought to market with other fish, and sold for the flesh of the Sebio, but those who know it will never buy it. 5. Mako never exceeds three or four fathom in length. This same name is given to the young ones of the other kinds. That, which I hear speak of, is caught frequently upon the Eastern Coasts of Japan, as aJso upon the Coasts of Kijnokuni and Satzuma. Ambergreese is found in the intestins of this Whale. The head yields a small quantity of Train-oyl. 6. Iwasikura, that is, Sardin's-Eater, hath Isaasik'w a tail and fins like common Fish. We saw this    [134]    sort, when we went up to Court, between CaMinoseki, and Simonoseki, and I took it to be that Fish which the Dutch call Noord Caper. Of all these several kinds of Whales nothing is thrown away as useless, excepting only the large Shoulder-bone. The skin which is black in most kinds, the Flesh which is red and looks like Beef, the intestins, which from their remarkable length are call'd Fiaksiro, that is, an hundred fathoms long, and all the inward parts are eat, pickel'd, boil'd, roasted, or fry'd. The fat or blubber is boil'd into Trainoyl, and even the sediments of the second boiling are eat. The bones, such as are of a cartilaginous substance, are boil'd when fresh, and eat, or scrap'd, clean'd and dried for the use of the kitchin Out of the nervous and tendious parts, both white and yellow, they make cords and ropes, chiefly for their Cottonmanufactures, as also for their Musical Instruments. Not even the garbage is thrown away, but kept for some use in the Kitchin. Several little things are made of the jaw-bones, fins and other bones, which are of a more solid substance; particularly their fine Mako. stilyards for weighing Gold and Silver are made of h and have borrow'd their name from thence. t em, Satsifoko is a Fish two, three, and sometimes fi six fathoms long, with two long teeth or tusks, standiln,, Out of the mouth upwards, which are sometimes, by way of ornament, put at the top of castles, temples, and publick buildings. I was inform'd by Fishermen, that this Fish is a cunning and mortal enemy of ViThales, and that he kills them by creeping into the mouth, and devouring their tongues. He hath a way, as he creeps in, to put his head and teeth into such a posture, that they are no hindrance to him.

Iruku is a known Fish, call'd Tenije in the Indies, (Fig. 39.) Furube is another Fish, not very large, (Fig. 4c.) The Dutch call him Blazer, which signifys Blower, because he can blow and swell himself up into the form of a round Ball. He is rank'd among the poisonous Fish, and if eat whole, is said unavoidably to occasion death There are three different sorts of it found in the JapaneSe Seas, all in great plenty. The first sort callwd Susumebuka is small, and seldom eat. The second is calltd Mabuku that is the true Buku. This the Japanese reckon a very delicate Fish, and they are very fond of it. But the Head, Guts, bones, and all the garbage must be thrown away, and the Flesh carefully washad and clean'd before it is fit to eat. And yet many People die of it, for want, as they say, of thoroughly washing and cleaning it. People that by some long and tedious sickness are grown weary of their lives, or are otherwise under miserable Circumstances, frequently chuse this poisonous Fish, instead of a knife or halter, to make away with themselves A Neighbour of my Servant at Nangasaki being so strongly infected with the Pox, that his nose was ready

00000000000000000000000000000000000000

want of proper Observations- The name Sernmi or Seb which they bear, is borrow'd from their Musick, Thlc' begins slowlyandupon a low tune, then increases graduallX in swiftness and loudness, and again ends nretty 1

This Musick, I thought, was not unlike the Noise a Buttonmaker's spxndle makes in turning. They beain to sing with the Rising-sun, and end about Noon. The Exuviae call'd Semi no Mukigara are preserv'd for physical uses, and sold publickly in shops both in Japan and China (See Fig. 38. C. D. E.) Another smaller kind is from its smallness call'd Kosebi, or the small Sebi. (See Fig. 38. F. G. H. I.) They appear later in the year, much about the time when the others disappear. They sing from Noon to Sun-set, and live till late in Autumn. Their musick is not near so loud as that of the first kind, and is by the common people call'd Tsuku Tsukuboo. The third kind difl*ers from the second neither in shape nor bigness, only they sing from morning to night. The Females of all the three kinds are mute, and have their breast shut: In all other respects they are like the Males. (See Fig. 38. K. L.)

. The Cantharides, or Spanish-flies are of the same colour with our Spanish-flies, but somewhat bigger and rounder, and very near as big as our common    [132]    European Beetles. Their use is entirely unknown in Japan. Another particular sort of Spanish-flies is called Fanmio. They are extremely caustick, and rank'd among the Poisons. They are found upon Rice-Ears, and are long, slender, and smaller than the Spanish-flies, blew or gold-colour'd, with scarlet or crimson spots and lines, which makes them look very beautiful. (See Fig. 38.) But the finest of all the flying tribe of Insects, and which by reason of its incomparable beauty is kept by the Ladies among their Curiosities, is a peculiar and scarce Night-fly, about a finger long, slender, roundbodied, with four wings, two of which are transparent and hid under a pair of others which are shining, as it were polish'd, and most curiously adorn'd with biew and golden lines and spots. The following Fable ows its origin to the unparallel'd beauty of this little creature. They say that all other Night-flies fall in love with it, and that to get rid of their importunities it maliciously bids them (for a trial of their constancy) to go and to fetch fire. The blind lovers sauple not to obey commands, and flying to the next fire or candIe, they never fail to burn themselves to death. The female is not near so beautiful as the male, but grey, or ash-colour'd and spotted.

 


TOPTOP
inserted by FC2 system